SPC-FD-00-G00-Part 09 of 12-Division 23 (2 of 2)

Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1
Of the New Administrative Capital
TABLE OF CONTENTS
REF DIVISION - SECTION TITLE
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
010000 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

011000 SUMMARY
011200 MULTIPLE CONTRACT SUMMARY
012500 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
013100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
013200 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
013233 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION
013300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
013520 HEALTH & SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
014000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
014200 REFERENCES
014339 MOCKUPS
015000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
016000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
017300 EXECUTION
017419 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
017700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
017823 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
017836 WARRANTIES
017839 RECORD (AS-BUILT) DOCUMENTS
017900 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE
033000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

033050 MASSIVE CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033125 PRECAST ULTRA-HIGH-PERFORMANCE CONCRETE CLADDING
034501 MISCELLANEOUS ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE
034910 DECORATIVE GLASS FIBER REINFORCED CONCRETE
035216 LIGHTWEIGHT INSULATING CONCRETE
035416 HYDRAULIC CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT
035440 CEMENT-BASED SCREED
DIVISION 04 - MASONRY
042000 UNIT MASONRY

044200 EXTERIOR STONE CLADDING
DIVISION 05 - METALS
051200 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

053100 STEEL DECKING
055000 METAL FABRICATIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - Page 1 of 8

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-TOC-PMC-01 REV 1
055213 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS

055300 METAL GRATINGS
057300 DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS
057310 DECORATIVE METAL BALUSTRADES AND FENCES
057500 DECORATIVE FORMED METAL
DIVISION 06 - WOOD AND PLASTICS
061000 ROUGH CARPENTRY

064023 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
066200 CAST PLASTIC (GRP) FABRICATIONS
067300 COMPOSITE DECKING
DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
071113 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING

071355 APP-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET WATERPROOFING
071614 POLYMER MODIFIED CEMENT WATERPROOFING -
ARCHITECTURAL
071616 CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING
071800 TRAFFIC COATINGS
072100 THERMAL INSULATION
074213.16 METAL PLATE WALL PANELS
074213.23 METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL WALL PANELS
075323 ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING
076200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
077100 ROOF SPECIALTIES
077129 MANUFACTURED ROOF EXPANSION JOINTS
077200 ROOF ACCESSORIES
078100 APPLIED FIREPROOFING
078123 INTUMESCENT MASTIC FIREPROOFING
078413 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
078446 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS
078800 FIRE CURTAINS
079200 JOINT SEALANTS
079500 EXPANSION CONTROL
DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS
081113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

081416 FLUSH WOOD DOORS
083113 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
083323 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
083326 OVERHEAD COILING GRILLES
083473 SOUND-CONTROL DOOR ASSEMBLIES
084114 INTERIOR ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
084126 ALL-GLASS ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
084229.23 SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-TOC-PMC-01 REV 1
084233 REVOLVING DOOR ENTRANCES

084415 GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS AND WINDOW WALLS
084429 MECHANICALLY ATTACHED STRUCTURAL GLASS ASSEMBLIES
084436 OVERHEAD GLAZING ASSEMBLIES
085113 ALUMINUM WINDOWS
087110 DOOR HARDWARE
088000 GLAZING
088300 MIRRORS
088400 PLASTIC GLAZING
089119 FIXED LOUVERS
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES
092216 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

092400 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING
092713 GLASS-REINFORCED GYPSUM FABRICATIONS
092900 GYPSUM BOARD
092940 CEMENT BOARD ASSEMBLIES
093000 TILING
093014 LANDSCAPE TILING
095113 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
095133 ACOUSTICAL METAL PAN CEILINGS
095423 LINEAR METAL CEILINGS
095427 SUSPENDED WOOD CEILINGS
095443 STRETCHED-FABRIC CEILING SYSTEMS
096340 STONE FLOORING
096400 WOOD FLOORING
096513 RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES
096516 RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING
096519 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
096536 STATIC-CONTROL RESILIENT FLOORING
096723 RESINOUS FLOORING
096813 TILE CARPETING
096816 SHEET CARPETING
096900 ACCESS FLOORING
097225 SIMULATED STONE CLADDING
097500 STONE FACING
097700 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED (FRP) WALL PANELS
097723 FABRIC-WRAPPED PANELS
097763 TERRACOTTA BAGUETTE
099113 EXTERIOR PAINTING
099123 INTERIOR PAINTING
099300 STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING
099600 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
101100 VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-TOC-PMC-01 REV 1
101400 SIGNAGE
102113 TOILET COMPARTMENTS
102600 WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION
102800 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES
102819 TUB AND SHOWER DOORS
104400 FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
104413 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS (Iconic Tower)
104413 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS (Office Towers)
104413 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS (Residential Towers)
104900 PARKING ACCESSORIES
105113 METAL LOCKERS
107113 EXTERIOR SUN CONTROL DEVICES
108214 LED MEDIA MESH SCREENS
DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT
110000 AUTOMATED PARKING SYSTEM (Office Towers)

110101 FAÇADE ACCESS EQUIPMENT
111200 PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT
111300 LOADING DOCK EQUIPMENT
111400 PEDESTRIAN CONTROL DEVICES
114000 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT (Iconic Tower)
117000 LAUNDRY EQUIPMENT (Iconic Tower)
118226 FACILITY WASTE COMPACTORS
118230 WASTE HANDLING EQUIPMENT
118230 WASTE HANDLING EQUIPMENT (Iconic Tower)
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS
122413 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES

123640 STONE COUNTERTOPS
123661 SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS
124813 ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES
124816 ENTRANCE FLOOR GRILLES
129300 SITE FURNISHINGS
DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
131213 EXTERIOR FOUNTAIN

133423 FABRICATED STRUCTURES
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT
142100 ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS

143100 ESCALATORS
149182 TRASH CHUTES

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-TOC-PMC-01 REV 1
DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION
210513 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION

EQUIPMENT
210517 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
210518 ESCUTCHEONS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING
210548 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION
PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
210553 IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
211200 FIRE SUPPERSSION STANDPIPES
211313 WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
212200 CLEAN-AGENT FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS
213113 ELECTRIC-DRIVE, CENTRIFUGAL FIRE PUMPS
213400 PRESSURE-MAINTENANCE PUMPS
DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING
220513 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT

220516 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220517 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220518 ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220519 METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220523 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
220529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
220548 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT
220553 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
220716 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT INSULATION
220719 PLUMBING PIPE INSULATION
221116 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
221119 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
221123 DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS
221123.13 DOMESTIC-WATER PACKAGED BOOSTER PUMPS
221223 FACILITY INDOOR POTABLE-WATER STORAGE TANKS
221316 SANITARY WASTE, VENT AND STORM DRAINAGE PIPING
221319 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES (Iconic Tower)
221319 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES (Office Towers)
221319 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES (Residential Towers)
221423 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES (Iconic Tower)
221423 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES (Office Towers)
221423 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES (Residential Towers)
221429 SUMP PUMPS
223100 DOMESTIC WATER SOFTENERS
223200 DOMESTIC WATER TREATMENT EQUIPMENT
223300 ELECTRIC, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS
223400 FUEL-FIRED, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS
223500 DOMESTIC-WATER HEAT EXCHANGERS
224100 RESIDENTIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES (Iconic Tower)

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-TOC-PMC-01 REV 1
224100 RESIDENTIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES (Office Towers)

224100 RESIDENTIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES (Residential Towers)
225000 SWIMMING POOL SPECIALTIES AND EQUIPMENT
225100 JACUZZI SPECIALTIES AND EQUIPMENT
DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING
230513 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT

230516 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING
230517 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING
230518 ESCUTCHEONS FOR HVAC PIPING
230519 METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING
230523 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING
230529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
230548 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT
230553 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
230593 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
230713 DUCT INSULATION
230716 HVAC EQUIPMENT INSULATION
230719 HVAC PIPE INSULATION
230900 BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM (BAS)
230901 INTEGRATED BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (IBMS)
232113 HYDRONIC PIPING
232123 HYDRONIC PUMPS
232300 REFRIGERANT PIPING
232500 HVAC WATER TREATMENT
233113 METAL DUCTS
233130 AIR DUCT CLEANING
233300 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
233413 AXIAL HVAC FANS
233416 CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS
233423 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
233433 AIR CURTAINS
233600 AIR TERMINAL UNITS
233713 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES (Iconic Tower)
233713 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES (Office Towers)
233713 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES (Residential Towers)
233813 COMMERCIAL-KITCHEN HOODS
235100 BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS
235239 FIRE-TUBE BOILERS
235700 HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR HVAC
236313 AIR-COOLED REFRIGERANT CONDENSERS
237200 AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT
237313 MODULAR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS
237413 PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING
UNITS
238123 COMPUTER-ROOM AIR-CONDITIONERS

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-TOC-PMC-01 REV 1
238126 SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS

238146 WATER-SOURCE UNITARY HEAT PUMPS
238219 FAN-COIL UNITS
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
260500 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

260513 MEDIUM-VOLTAGE CABLES
260519 LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
260526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260533 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260536 CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260543 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS
260548 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
260940 ROOM MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
260943 NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS
261200 MEDIUM-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
261300 MEDIUM-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
262413 SWITCHBOARDS
262416 PANELBOARDS
262419 MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS
262500 ENCLOSED BUS ASSEMBLIES
262726 WIRING DEVICES
262743 ELECTRIC VEHICLE CHARGING STATIONS
262816 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
263324 DC CENTRAL BATTERY SYSTEM FOR EMERGENCY LIGHTING
263353 STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY
263533 POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITORS
264113 LIGHTNING PROTECTION FOR STRUCTURES
264313 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES
265100 INTERIOR LIGHTING
265600 EXTERIOR LIGHTING
DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS
271005 COMMON CLAUSES FOR STRUCTURED CABLING

271055 IDENTIFICATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
271105 COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS
271305 COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING
271505 COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING
271800 COMMON CLAUSES FOR IT & SECURITY SYSTEMS
272000 DATA COMMUNICATIONS
272133 WIRELESS DATA NETWORK
272231 COMPUTERS & RELATED PERIPHERALS
273123 IP-BASED TELEPHONY COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM
274100 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR INTEGRATED AUDIOVISUAL SYSTEMS

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-TOC-PMC-01 REV 1
274116.21 INTEGRATED AUDIOVISUAL SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT - FOR

MEETING ROOMS
274116.28 INTEGRATED AUDIOVISUAL SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT - FOR
HOTEL SPACES
274132 IP-BASED HOSPITALITY TV MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (IPHTM)
275117 IP-BASED PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM
275123.80 IP BASED VIDEO INTERCOM
DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
281300 ACCESS CONTROL

281353 SECURITY SCREENING SYSTEMS (SSS)
282300 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
283111 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK
312000 EARTH MOVING
DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
321116.16 AGGREGATE SUBBASE COURSE

321123 AGGREGATE BASE COURSE
321216 ASPHALT PAVING
321400 UNIT PAVING
321440 STONE PAVING
323113 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
329113 SOIL PREPARATION
329300 PLANTS
DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES
334300 LANDSCAPE DRAINAGE

334600 SUBDRAINAGE
DIVISION 34 - TRANSPORTATION
348313 PRESTRESSED CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION

348323 BRIDGE BEARINGS
DIVISION 40 - PROCESS INTERCONNECTIONS
405000 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS SCOPE OF WORK

406343 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS (PLC)
406710 PROCESS CONTROL WIRING
407000 INSTRUMENTATION FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-TOC-PMC-01 REV 1
SPECIFICATIONS
(Part 9 of 12)
SECTION 232113 - HYDRONIC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes piping, special-duty valves, and hydronic specialties for hot-water
heating, chilled-water cooling, and condenser water systems; makeup water for these
systems; blowdown drain lines; and condensate drain piping.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 230719 "HVAC Piping Insulation."
1.3 STANDARDS
A. The following standards are referred to in this section as alternative equivalent standards to
those specified in this section:
1. BS 10 Flanges for bolting pipes, valves and fittings.

2. BS 21 Pipe threads for tubes and fittings where pressure-type joints are made on
threads (metric dimensions).
3. BS EN 10255 Non-alloy steel tubes suitable for welding and threading. Technical
delivery conditions.
4. BS EN 1044 Filler metals for brazing.
5. BS EN 10253-1 Butt-welding pipe fittings. Wrought carbon steel for general use and
without specific inspection requirements.
6. BS EN 10253-2 Butt-welding pipe fittings. Non-alloy and ferritic alloy steels with
specific inspection requirements.
7. BS EN 1092-1 Flanges and their joints. Circular flanges for pipes, valves, fittings
and accessories, PN designated. Steel flanges.
8. API American Petroleum Institute.
9. Or other equivalent relevant EN standards.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Welding inspector: Mechanical Engineer, Certified Welding Inspector (CWI) or

(CSWIP3.1) and shall have minimum 10 years’ experience.
B. Painting inspector: BSC chemical, certified painting inspector (BGAS CSWIP) or (NACE)
level II and shall have minimum 10 years’ experience.
C. NDT inspector: NDT personal certified as level II minimum in the NDE methods utilized.
HYDRONIC PIPING 232113 - Page 1 of 21

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A8-ME-01 REV 1
D. Third Party : International inspection company ( GL,LG,BV,TUV,…etc)]
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Quality Manual and Quality plan for Contractor and its related Sub Contractors including:
1. Inspection Test Plan (ITP) for Manufacturing , Fabrication and installation

2. NDT procedures and shall be prepared by certified ASNT NDE Level III and
approved & stamped by 3rd Party Level III.
3. Organization Chart, CV’s and certificates for each personal including NDT Company
and Third Party Company; Third party Engineers shall have minimum 10 years’
experience.
4. Product Data: For each type of special-duty valve indicated. Include flow and
pressure drop curves based on manufacturer's testing for diverting fittings, calibrated
balancing valves and automatic flow-control valves.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication of piping Isometric & spools, pipe anchors, hangers,
special pipe support assemblies, alignment guides, expansion joints and loops, and their
attachment to the building structure. Detail location of anchors, alignment guides, welding
map and expansion joints and loops.
C. Proposal Welding Procedure Specification (PWPS).
D. Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) supported by Procedure Qualification Record

(PQR).
E. Welder Qualification Certificates.
F. Original Mill Certificates for piping, fitting, filler metal,…etc.
G. Release for shipment for ERW, Seam weld & spiral weld pipe and Equipment.
H. Calibration Certificate for Equipment and Gauges.
I. Surface preparation, Insulation and protection Coating procedures
J. Handling and storage procedures
K. Field Test Reports: Written reports of tests specified in Part 3 of this Section. Include the
following:
1. Test procedures used.( NDT Procedures, Hydrostatic& leak test procedures,…etc)

2. Test results that comply with standards and specifications requirements.
3. Failed test results and corrective action taken to achieve requirements.
L. Maintenance Data: For hydronic specialties and special-duty valves to include in

maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A8-ME-01 REV 1
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Retain option below if section 1.4 is retained or if required for special projects Surface
preparation for all steel pipes: Shot blasting to SA 2.5 and then immediate application of 150
µm polyamide epoxy paint to be confirmed for proper bonding with pre-insulated pipes
manufacturer , and the contractor shall employ a certified painting inspector to be
responsible.
B. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to the ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications" and ASME B31.1 or
ASME B31.9 as applicable. Welders shall be certified for the type of pipe material specified,
welding process and position of welds required during fabrication of the piping. Welder’s
Qualification Test to be performed on site and attended by Contractor Welding Inspectors,
Third Party and Engineer prior to commencing piping fabrication.
C. Nondestructive examination shall be performed to all pipe welds in accordance to ASME

B31.1 or ASTM B31.9 as applicable. A Nondestructive test shall perform the tests and
submit the related reports after getting the approval and stamping of third party inspection
company, prior prequalification approval should be obtained from Engineer on NDT &
Third Party Inspection both companies.
D. All welds shall be identified by the welder’s mark and a sequence number. The Contractor
shall employ a Certified Welding Inspector (CWI) or CSWIP 3.1, NDT personal certified as
Level 2 minimum in the NDE methods utilized (independent of the contractor fabricating or
installing the piping) to visually examine all welds in accordance with inspection and
examination requirements of ASME B31.1 or ASME B31.9 as applicable. Any welds
failing the visual or NDE inspection shall be ground out or cutout, re-welded and radio
graphed at the expense of the Contractor. The CWI shall submit a written report signed and
stamped from the approved third party for each weld to the Engineer.
E. Additionally, 5% of all fitting, flange and Butt joint welds shop or field or as per ASME
requirements, minimum of 5% of Butt Joints welds, randomly selected by the Engineer,
shall be radio graphed at the expense of the contractor. The certified welding inspector shall
examine the films and provide a written report to the Engineer. All welds not meeting the
requirements of ASME B31.1 or ASME B31.9 latest edition as applicable will be ground
out, re-welded and re-radio graphed at the expense of the Contractor. If any 10% of the
randomly selected radio graphed welds fail, all welds in the piping will be radio graphed and
repaired at the expense of the contractor.
F. High rejection rate welders (with rejection rate of 25%or more) will be revoked from the
project
G. 10 % of Fillet Joints shall be tested by Dye Pentrent Test Or Magnetic Test
H. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.1 and ASME B31.9 as applicable for
materials, products, and installation. Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the
appropriate ASME label. Fabricate and stamp air separators and expansion tanks to comply
with the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A8-ME-01 REV 1
I. All pre-insulated piping systems shall be completely sealed and waterproof, and they shall
be capable of allowing sufficient movement for thermal expansion and contraction. Each
assembly shall be factory-designed for the specific service medium, temperature, and
pressure. Expansion loops, expansion joints, anchors, and guides shall be furnished and
installed to provide a trouble-free system and avoid stress on any equipment.100% Welding
joints of Pre-insulated piping spools shall be tested by RT , RT films shall interpretation by
approved 3rd party
J. The pre-insulated pipe manufacturer shall comply with the inspection requirements of BS
EN 253 or approved equal.
K. On Site Supervision of Underground Pre-insulated Chilled Water Piping Installation:
1. The pre-insulated pipe manufacturer shall have a determined quality assurance

program to ensure compliance with specifications.
2. All inner insulation to be visually inspected to ensure absence of any void prior to the
application of jacket.
3. The following tests shall be performed on daily basis to ensure quality of installation:
a. Density (greater or equal to 60 Kg/m3)

b. Thermal conductivity (smaller or equal to 0.023 W/m°C)
c. Compressive strength (greater or equal to 300 KPa)
d. Closed cell content (greater or equal to 88%)
4. Full Time Factory trained field technical assistance & supervision shall be provided
by pre-insulated manufacturer during installation.
5. Representative's daily written reports to the Resident Engineer: Present the original of
each report on the day it is prepared. The report shall be signed by the manufacturer's
representative. The report shall state whether or not the condition and quality of the
materials used and the installation of the system is in accordance with the plans,
specifications, and published standards of the manufacturer, and is satisfactory in all
respects. If anything connected with the installation is unsatisfactory, the report shall
state that corrective action has been taken or shall contain the manufacturer's
recommendations for corrective action. The report shall cover any condition that
could result in an unsatisfactory installation. The representative shall take prompt
action to return to the factory all damaged and defective material, and shall order
prompt replacement of such material.
6. On completion of the installation, the Contractor shall deliver to the Resident
Engineer a certificate from the manufacturer that the installation is in compliance
with all installation recommendations and warranty requirements of the manufacturer.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of hydronic piping and suspension system components
with other construction, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression-system
components, and partition assemblies.
B. Coordinate pipe sleeve installations for foundation wall penetrations.
C. Coordinate piping installation with roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.
D. Coordinate pipe fitting pressure classes with products specified in related Sections.
E. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into base.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A8-ME-01 REV 1
F. Coordinate installation of pipe sleeves for penetrations through exterior walls and floor
assemblies. Coordinate with requirements for firestopping specified in Section "Penetration
Firestopping" for fire and smoke wall and floor assemblies.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE and HANDLING
A. Products shall be delivered in original, unbroken packages, containers, or bundles bearing

the name of the manufacture.
B. Products shall be carefully stored in a manner that will prevent damage and in an area that is
protected from the elements.
C. End caps weather supplied by the piping manufacturer or fabricated by the contractor are to
be placed at the ends of the piping sections to keep debris and reptiles from entering inside
the pipe while it is placed in storage.
D. Prefabricated sections of the pre-insulated pipe are to be handled per the manufacturer’s
recommendations or instructions.
E. All pre-insulated pipes shall be protected from direct sunlight while transported or stored.
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Water Treatment Chemicals: Furnish sufficient chemicals for initial system startup and for
preventive maintenance for one year from date of Substantial Completion.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's warranty form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components

that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
B. Provide system warranty in which Manufacturer, Installer, and Contractor are jointly and
severally liable and agree to repair or replace defective components of the warranted item.
C. Warranty shall include:

1. Defective materials and installation.
2. Failure to comply with requirements stated in technical specifications.
3. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection.
4. Faulty operation of movable parts such as hardware.
5. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal
weathering and use.
6. Delamination of exterior or interior facing materials.
7. Making good and installation and finishing all items that are disturbed and that may
be required due to repair or replacement of defective items. Coordinate with
Employer, manufacturer, and installer of adjacent disturbed items to ensure that their
warranty is not cancelled due to the repair work.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A8-ME-01 REV 1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING MATERIALS
A. General: Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe and fitting
materials.
2.2 PIPE AND TUBING
A. Minimum steel pipe size recommended for hydronic piping is NPS 3/4 (DN 20).
B. Chilled Water (above ground), Heating Water (above ground), Condenser Water (above
ground), and Vent Piping:
1. Steel pipes DN 50 and smaller: ASTM A53/A53M Grade B, ERW, Schedule 40 with
threaded ends.
2. Steel pipes DN 50 and up to DN 250: ASTM A53/A53M Grade B or ASTM
A106/A106M Grade B, ERW, Schedule 40 with beveled ends for butt welding
downstream the heat exchanger and could be accepted as roll Grooved ends for
Coupled Joints.
3. Steel pipes DN 300 to DN 600: ASTM A53/A53M Grade B, or ASTM A106/A106M
Grade B, ERW, and beveled ends for butt welding downstream the heat exchanger
and could be accepted as roll Grooved ends for Coupled Joints.
4. Pipes above DN 600: API 5L Grade B, SAW at both sides with helical seam and
beveled ends for butt welding downstream the heat exchanger and could be accepted
as roll Grooved ends for Coupled Joints.
5. Minimum wall thickness shall be in accordance with the calculation based on ASME
B31.1 to verify that wall thickness is adequate enough as per actual system pressure:
C. Extension of Domestic Water Make-up Piping: as specified for Domestic water piping.
Refer to section 221116 “Domestic Water Piping”.
D. Cooling Coil Condensate Drain Piping:

1. From air handling units: Schedule 40, PVC Pipe with solvent-welded joints.
2. From fan coil or other terminal units: Schedule 40, PVC Pipe with solvent-welded
joints.
2.3 FIELD APPLIED INSULATION:
A. Insulation for valves, fittings, field casing closures, as required, and other piping system
accessories shall be cellular glass conforming to ASTM C552, calcium silicate conforming
to ASTM C533 or polyurethane matching the pipe insulation. Insulation shall be pre-
molded, precut or job fabricated to fit and shall be removable and reusable. Thickness shall
match adjacent piping.
B. Metal jackets shall be provided for all pipe insulation in manholes. Insulation bands shall be
19 mm wide 0.13 mm stainless steel.
C. Buried fittings and accessories shall be factory fabricated and may have field foamed
polyurethane insulation to match adjacent piping and shall be protected with a covering
matching the pipe casing. Shrink sleeves shall be provided over casing connection joints.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A8-ME-01 REV 1
2.4 END SEALS:
A. General: Each pre-insulated section of piping shall have a complete sealing of the insulation
to provide permanent water and vapor seal at each end of the pre-insulated section of piping.
Pre-insulated sections of piping modified in the field shall be provided with an end seal
which is equivalent to the end seals furnished with the pre-insulated section of piping.
Provide complete sealing of the insulation at each end of each pre-insulated conduit section
by one of the following methods:
1. Carrying the outer casing over tapered pipe insulation ends and extending it to the
carrier pipe. Provide sufficient surface bonding area between the casing and the
carrier pipe to ensure a permanent water and vapor resistant seal.
2. Using specially designed prefabricated caps made of the same material and not less
than the same thickness as the casing. Provide sufficient surface bonding area
between the cap, and both the casing and carrier pipe, to ensure permanent water and
vapor resistant seal.
B. Factory casing and end seal testing and certification:
1. Testing and certification procedures by an independent testing laboratory shall

demonstrate that casings and end seals are capable of resisting penetration of water
into the casing and insulation at 60 kPa of head pressure, measured above the highest
point of the test sample, subjected over the entire surface of an 2.5 m test sample of
prefabricated pipe for not less than 48 hours. Test shall use 24 degrees C water for
chilled water service, while the sample is either buried or encased in dry bedding sand
with a minimum of 305 mm of sand all around sample. The carrier pipe size in the
test section shall be 75 mm in diameter and shall be restrained during the test period.
The insulation thickness shall not exceed the maximum thickness provided for the
piping in the project.
2.5 JOINTS:
A. Welded joints: Welded joints between sections of pipe and between pipe and fittings shall
be provided where specified or indicated. Branch connections shall be made with either
welding tees or forged branch outlet fittings attached to the main and reinforced against
external strains.
B. Flanged joints: Flanged joints shall be provided with gaskets and made perfectly square and
tight. Full-faced gaskets shall be used with cast-iron flanges and all gaskets shall be as thin
as the finish of the flange face permits. Gaskets shall be 5 mm (3/16-inch) thick for 25
through 300 mm (1 through 12 inch) flanges and 6 mm (1/4-inch) thick for flanges 350 mm
(14 inches) and larger.
C. Threaded joints: Joints shall be made tight with polytetrafluoroethylene tape applied to the
male threads only. Not more than three threads shall show after the joint is made up.
D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according
to ASTM B 813.
E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for
joining copper with copper; or BAg-1, silver alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A8-ME-01 REV 1
F. Mechanical joints: Sleeve and grooved pipe couplings shall be installed and protected
against corrosion as recommended by the coupling manufacturer. Joints between
nonmetallic and metallic carrier pipe shall be designed and furnished by the piping system
manufacturer. The transition pieces shall be factory fabricated and shall be designed so that
no field chemical welding of the carrier pipe will be required. Transitional joint connections
to manhole steel piping shall be made inside the manhole except for prefabricated, pre-piped
manholes where joints shall be outside the manhole wall.
G. Insulating joints and dielectric fittings: Shall be installed where shown.
H. Nonmetallic pipe joints: Nonmetallic pipe joints shall be installed in accordance with the
written instructions of the manufacturer.
2.6 FITTINGS FOR STEEL PIPE
A. General
1. The pipes fittings shall be to ASTM A234/A234M WPB, ASTM A105/A105M or

ASTM A53/A53M Grade B, suitable for butt welding, seamless or ERW and
thickness as per matching pipe.
2. All Butt welded fittings shall be in accordance with ASME B16.9, socket welded
fittings shall be to ASME B16.11.
3. Mechanical coupled joints are allowed as alternative in mechanical rooms and chiller
house but not in pre-insulated pipes running in culverts or tunnels.
4. Manufacture trade name to be marked on pipes and fitting
B. 50 mm and Smaller: Screwed. Mechanical couplings are optional for water piping only.
1. Fitting shall have same wall thickness as pipes.

2. Pipes 50 mm and smaller shall have threaded ends.
3. Forged steel, socket welding or threaded: ASME B16.11.
4. Screwed: 150 pound malleable iron, ASME B16.3. 125 pound cast iron, ASME
B16.4, may be used in lieu of malleable iron. Bushing reduction of a single pipe size,
or use of close nipples, is not acceptable.
5. Unions: ASME B16.39.
6. Water hose connection adapter: Brass, pipe thread to 20 mm garden hose thread, with
hose cap nut.
C. 65 mm and Larger: Welded or flanged joints. Mechanical couplings and fittings are optional
for water piping only.
1. Pipe fitting material shall be to ASTM A 234/A 234M WPB, ASTM A105/A105M or
ASTM A53/A53M Grade B ERW.
2. Butt welding fittings: ASME B16.9 with same wall thickness as connecting piping.
Elbows shall be long radius type, unless otherwise noted.
3. Socket welded fittings shall be in accordance with ASME B16.11.
4. Welding flanges and bolting: ASME B16.5:
a. Water service: Weld neck or slip-on, plain face, with 6 mm (1/8 inch) thick full
face neoprene gasket suitable for 104 degrees C (220 degrees F).
1) Contractor's option: Convoluted, cold formed 150 pound steel flanges,

with Teflon gaskets, may be used for water service.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A8-ME-01 REV 1
b. Flange bolting: Carbon steel machine bolts or studs and nuts, ASTM A307,
Grade B.
D. Welded Branch and Tap Connections: Forged steel weldolets, or branchlets and threadolets
may be used for branch connections up to one pipe size smaller than the main. Forged steel
half-couplings, ASME B16.11 may be used for drain, vent and gage connections.
E. Mechanical Pipe Couplings and Fittings: If used and accepted by The Engineer shall be used
with roll grooved pipe, in water service up to 110 degrees C (230 degrees F).
1. Grooved mechanical couplings: Malleable iron, ASTM A47/A47M or ductile iron,

ASTM A536, fabricated in two or more parts, securely held together by two or more
track-head, square, or oval-neck bolts, ASTM A183.
2. Gaskets: Rubber product recommended by the coupling manufacturer for the
intended service.
3. Grooved end fittings: Malleable iron, ASTM A47/A47M; ductile iron, ASTM A536;
or steel, ASTM A53/A53M or ASTM A106/A106M, designed to accept grooved
mechanical couplings. Tap-in type branch connections are acceptable.
2.7 FITTINGS FOR COPPER TUBING
A. Solder Joint:
1. Joints shall be made up in accordance with recommended practices of the materials

applied. Apply 95/5 tin and antimony on all copper piping.
2. Mechanically formed tee connection in water and drain piping: Form mechanically
extracted collars in a continuous operation by drilling pilot hole and drawing out tube
surface to form collar, having a height of not less than three times the thickness of
tube wall. Adjustable collaring device shall insure proper tolerance and complete
uniformity of the joint. Notch and dimple joining branch tube in a single process to
provide free flow where the branch tube penetrates the fitting.
B. Bronze Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.24.
2.8 FITTINGS FOR PLASTIC PIPING
A. PVC Plastic Pipe fittings socket-type, schedule 40, ASTM D2466.

1. PVC Solvent Cement: ASTM D2564-04el.
B. Chemical feed piping for condenser water treatment: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride
(CPVC), Schedule 80, ASTM F439.
2.9 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A. Provide where copper tubing and ferrous metal pipe are joined.
B. 50 mm and Smaller: Threaded dielectric union, ASME B16.39.
C. 65 mm and Larger: Flange union with dielectric gasket and bolt sleeves, ASME B16.42.
D. Temperature Rating, 99 degrees C.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A8-ME-01 REV 1
2.10 SCREWED JOINTS
A. Pipe Thread: ANSI B1.20.1.
B. Lubricant or Sealant: Oil and graphite or other compound approved for the intended service.
C. Grooved Mechanical-Joint Fittings: ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12 ductile iron;

ASTM A 47/A 47M, Grade 32510 malleable iron; ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F, E, or S,
Grade B fabricated steel; or ASTM A 106/A 106M, Grade B steel fittings with grooves or
shoulders designed to accept grooved end couplings.
D. Grooved Mechanical-Joint Couplings: Ductile- or malleable-iron housing and synthetic

rubber gasket of central cavity pressure-responsive design; with nuts, bolts, locking pin,
locking toggle, or lugs to secure grooved pipe and fittings.
E. Welding Materials: Comply with Section II, Part C, of the ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and for chemical analysis
of pipe being welded.
F. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be handled; and design
temperatures and pressures.
2.11 VALVES
A. Gate, globe, check, ball, butterfly valves and motorized valves are specified in Section
"General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping."
B. Asbestos packing is not acceptable.
C. All valves of the same type shall be products of a single manufacturer. Provide gate and
globe valves with packing that can be replaced with the valve under full working pressure.
D. Provide chain operators for valves 100 mm (4 inches) and larger when the centerline is
located 2400 mm (8 feet) or more above the floor or operating platform.
E. Refer to Part 3 "Valve Applications" Article for applications of each valve.
F. The indicated pressure is the minimum working pressure and shall be verified across each
building operating pressure and to be approved by the engineer.
G. Dynamic Water Flow Balancing Valves, used for balancing, shut off and measuring of
pressure drop. Balancing valves shall be provided with two measuring nipples to have the
possibility to measure the differential pressure (water flow indirectly) through the balancing
valve and a tight shut off function with a hidden memory of the setting. Each valve shall be
provided with a label including at least the valve reference number, valve’s diameter, design
flow, setting after balancing and pressure drop in setting and design position. All valves
shall be supplied with Prefab insulation material sourced from the valve manufacturer, made
of Polyurethane, volume weight 50-60 Kg/cubic m.
H. Dynamic Water Flow Balancing Valves, DN 50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: bronze body, fitted
with a red nylon hand-wheel and a protection cap, 1035-kPa (150 psig) working pressure,
107 deg C (225 deg F) maximum operating temperature, and having threaded end
connections.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A8-ME-01 REV 1
I. Dynamic Water Flow Balancing Valves, DN 65 (NPS 2-1/2) and Larger: Y-pattern globe
valve style, Cast-iron or steel body, fitted with seat seal cone, bonnet bolts chromed steel
and digital hand wheel, 1035-kPa (150 psig) working pressure, 107 deg C (225 deg F)
maximum operating temperature, and having flanged or grooved connections.
J. Pressure-Reducing Valves: Diaphragm-operated, bronze or brass body with low inlet

pressure check valve, inlet strainer removable without system shutdown, and noncorrosive
valve seat and stem. Select valve size, capacity, and operating pressure to suit system.
Valve shall be factory set at operating pressure and have capability for field adjustment.
K. Safety Valves: Diaphragm-operated, bronze or brass body with brass and rubber, wetted,
internal working parts; shall suit system pressure and heat capacity and shall comply with
the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IV: Heating Boilers, Bear ASME
stamp
L. Pressure Relief Valve: Bronze or iron body and bronze or stainless steel trim, with testing
lever. Comply with ASME Code for Pressure Vessels, Section 8; bear ASME stamp.
M. Automatic Dynamic Flow-Control Valves: Gray-iron body, factory set to maintain constant
flow with plus or minus 5 percent over system pressure fluctuations, and equipped with a
readout kit including flow meter, probes, hoses, flow charts, and carrying case. Each valve
shall have an identification tag attached by chain, and be factory marked with the zone
identification, valve number, and flow rate. Valve shall be line size and one of the following
designs:
1. Gray-iron or brass body, designed for 1206 kPa (175 psig) at 93 deg C (200 deg F)
with stainless-steel piston and spring.
2. Brass or ferrous-metal body, designed for 2068 kPa (300 psig) at 121 deg C (250
deg F) with corrosion-resistant, tamperproof, self-cleaning, piston-spring assembly
easily removable for inspection or replacement.
3. Combination assemblies, including bronze ball valve and brass alloy control valve,
with stainless-steel piston and spring, fitted with pressure and temperature test valves,
and designed for 2067 kPa (300 psig) at 121 deg C (250 deg F).
N. Triple Duty Valve: Contractors option for use at pump discharge in lieu of check valve and
balancing/shut-off valve. Triple duty valve is a non-slam check valve with spring-loaded
weighted disc and a calibrated adjustment feature permitting regulation of pump discharge
flow and shut-off. Valves shall be designed to permit repacking under full line pressure.
Unit shall be installed on discharge side of pump in a horizontal or vertical position with the
stem up. Unit shall be cast iron body construction suitable for maximum working pressure
of 1205 kPa (175 PSI) and maximum operating temperature of 149 C (300 F), bronze disc
and seat, stainless steel stem and spring.
O. Drain Valves: Valves shall be the gate valve types which are in accordance with MSS SP-
80. Valve shall be manually operated, 20 mm pipe size and above with a threaded end
connection. Valve shall be provided with a water hose nipple adapter.
P. Drain Cocks: MSS SP-110, DN20 (3/4-inch NPS) ball valve, rated for 2760 kPa (400-psig)
minimum CWP. Include 2-piece, bronze body with standard port, chrome-plated brass ball,
replaceable seats and seals, blowout-proof stem, and vinyl-covered steel handle.
1. Inlet: Threaded or solder joint.

2. Outlet: Short-threaded nipple with ANSI/ASME B1.20.7 garden-hose thread and
cap.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A8-ME-01 REV 1
2.12 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES
A. Air Vents
1. Manual Air Vent: Bronze body and nonferrous internal parts; 1035-kPa (150-psig)
working pressure; 107 deg C (225 deg F) operating temperature; manually operated
with screwdriver or thumbscrew; with DN 6 (NPS 1/8) discharge connection and
DN 15 (NPS 1/2) inlet connection.
2. Automatic Air Vent: Designed to vent automatically with float principle; bronze
body and nonferrous internal parts; 1035-kPa (150-psig) working pressure; 116 deg C
(240 deg F) operating temperature; with DN 8 (NPS 1/4) discharge connection and
DN 15 (NPS 1/2) inlet connection.
3. Air vents on water coils shall have not less than 3 mm threaded end connections.
4. Air vents on water mains shall have not less than 20 mm threaded end connections.
5. Air vents on all other applications shall have not less than 15 mm threaded end
connections
B. Closed Expansion Tanks: Welded carbon steel, rated for 1206-kPa (175-psig) working
pressure and 121 deg C (250 deg F) maximum operating temperature. Separate air charge
from system water to maintain design expansion capacity by a flexible bladder securely
sealed into tank. Provide sight glass and include drain fitting and taps for pressure gage and
air-charging fitting. Support vertical tanks with steel legs or base; support horizontal tanks
with steel saddles. Factory fabricate and test tank with taps and supports installed and
labeled according to the ASME Boiler & Pressure Vessel Code - Section VIII - Pressure
Vessels, Division 1.
C. Tangential-Type Air Separators: Welded black steel; ASME constructed and labeled for
1206-kPa (175-psig) minimum working pressure and 191 deg C (375 deg F) maximum
operating temperature; perforated stainless-steel air collector tube designed to direct released
air into expansion tank; tangential inlet and outlet connections; threaded connections for
DN 50 (NPS 2) and smaller; flanged connections for DN 65 (NPS 2-1/2) and larger;
threaded blowdown connection. Provide units in sizes for full-system flow capacity.
Applicable to central plants.
D. Y-Pattern Strainers: 1035-kPa (150-psig) working pressure; cast-iron body (ASTM A126-
04, Class B), flanged ends for DN 65 (NPS 2-1/2) and larger, threaded connections for
DN 50 (NPS 2) and smaller, bolted cover, perforated stainless-steel basket, and bottom drain
connection.
E. Basket Strainers: 1035-kPa (150-psig) working pressure; high-tensile cast-iron body

(ASTM A126-04, Class B), flanged-end connections, bolted cover, perforated stainless-steel
basket, and bottom drain connection.
F. Flexible Connectors: Stainless-steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze, wire-reinforcing

protective jacket; 1035-kPa (150-psig) minimum working pressure and 121 deg C (250
deg F) maximum operating temperature. Connectors shall have flanged- or threaded-end
connections to match equipment connected and shall be capable of 20-mm (3/4-inch)
misalignment.
G. Spherical, Rubber, Flexible Connectors: Fiber-reinforced rubber body with steel flanges
drilled to align with Classes 150 and 300 steel flanges; operating temperatures up to 121
deg C (250 deg F) and pressures up to 1035 kPa (150 psig).

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A8-ME-01 REV 1
H. Packed, Slip, Expansion Joints: 1035-kPa (150-psig) minimum working pressure, steel pipe
fitting consisting of telescoping body and slip-pipe sections, packing ring, packing, limit
rods, flanged ends, and chrome-plated finish on slip-pipe telescoping section.
2.13 WATER FLOW MEASURING DEVICES
A. Minimum overall accuracy plus or minus three percent over a range of 70 to 110 percent of
design flow. Select devices for not less than 110 percent of design flow rate.
B. Venturi Type: Bronze, steel, or cast iron with bronze throat, with valved pressure sensing
taps upstream and at the throat.
C. Wafer Type Circuit Sensor: Cast iron wafer-type flow meter equipped with readout valves
to facilitate the connecting of a differential pressure meter. Each readout valve shall be fitted
with an integral check valve designed to minimize system fluid loss during the monitoring
process.
D. Self-Averaging Annular Sensor Type: Brass or stainless steel metering tube, shutoff valves
and quick-coupling pressure connections. Metering tube shall be rotatable so all sensing
ports may be pointed down-stream when unit is not in use.
E. Flow Measurement/Balance Valves: A system comprised of two valves of bronze and

stainless steel metallurgy designed for 1205 kPa pressure at 121 degrees C, with thermal
insulation sleeve.
F. Measurement and shut-off valve: An on/off ball valve with integral high regain venturi and
dual quick connect valves with integral check valves and color coded safety caps for
pressure/temperature readout.
G. A butterfly balancing valve as specified herein, with memory stop and quick connect valve
for pressure/temperature readout.
H. Flow Measuring Device Identification:
1. Metal tag attached by chain to the device.

2. Include meter or equipment number, manufacturer's name, meter model, flow rate
factor and design flow rate in l/m (gpm).
I. Vent and drain hose and two 3000 mm (10 feet) lengths of hose with quick disconnect
connections.
J. Factory fabricated carrying case with hose compartment and a bound set of capacity curves
showing flow rate versus pressure differential.
K. Provide one portable meter for each range of differential pressure required for the installed
flow devices.
L. Permanently Mounted Water Flow Indicating Meters: Minimum 150 mm diameter, or 450
mm long scale, for 120 percent of design flow rate, direct reading in lps with three valve
manifold and two shut-off valves.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A8-ME-01 REV 1
2.14 EXPANSION JOINTS
A. Factory built devices, inserted in the pipe lines, designed to absorb axial cyclical pipe
movement which results from thermal expansion and contraction. This includes factory-built
or field-fabricated guides located along the pipe lines to restrain lateral pipe motion and
direct the axial pipe movement into the expansion joints.
B. Manufacturing Quality Assurance: Conform to Expansion Joints Manufacturers Association

Standards.
C. Bellows - Internally Pressurized Type:
1. Multiple corrugations of Type 304 or Type A240-321 stainless steel.

2. Internal stainless steel sleeve entire length of bellows.
3. External cast iron equalizing rings for services exceeding 340 kPa (50 psig).
4. Welded ends.
5. Design shall conform to standards of EJMA and ASME B31.1.
6. External tie rods designed to withstand pressure thrust force upon anchor failure if
one or both anchors for the joint are at change in direction of pipeline.
7. Integral external cover.
D. Bellows - Externally Pressurized Type:
1. Multiple corrugations of Type 304 stainless steel.

2. Internal and external guide integral with joint.
3. Design for external pressurization of bellows to eliminate squirm.
4. Welded ends.
5. Conform to the standards of EJMA and ASME B31.1.
6. Threaded connection at bottom, 25 mm (one inch) minimum, for drain or drip point.
7. Integral external cover and internal sleeve.
E. Expansion Compensators:
1. Corrugated bellows, externally pressurized, stainless steel or bronze.

2. Internal guides and anti-torque devices.
3. Threaded ends.
4. External shroud.
5. Conform to standards of EJMA.
F. Expansion Joint Identification: Provide stamped brass or stainless steel nameplate on each
expansion joint listing the manufacturer, the allowable movement, flow direction, design
pressure and temperature, date of manufacture, and identifying the expansion joint by the
identification number on the contract drawings.
G. Guides: Provide factory-built guides along the pipe line to permit axial movement only and
to restrain lateral and angular movement. Guides must be designed to withstand a minimum
of 15 percent of the axial force which will be imposed on the expansion joints and anchors.
Field-built guides may be used if detailed on the contract drawings.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A8-ME-01 REV 1
2.15 GAGES, PRESSURE AND COMPOUND
A. ASME B40.100, Accuracy Grade 1A, (pressure, vacuum, or compound for air, oil or water),
initial mid-scale accuracy 1 percent of scale (Qualify grade), metal or phenolic case, 115
mm (4-1/2 inches) in diameter, 6 mm (1/4 inch) NPT bottom connection, white dial with
black graduations and pointer, clear glass or acrylic plastic window, suitable for board
mounting. Provide red "set hand" to indicate normal working pressure.
B. Provide brass lever handle union cock. Provide brass/bronze pressure snubber for gages in
water service.
C. Range of Gages: Provide range equal to at least 130 percent of normal operating range.
1. For condenser water suction (compound): Minus 100 kPa (30 inches Hg) to plus 700
kPa (100 psig).
2.16 PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE TEST PROVISIONS
A. Pete's Plug: 6 mm (1/4 inch) MPT by 75 mm (3 inches) long, brass body and cap, with
retained safety cap, nordel self-closing valve cores, permanently installed in piping where
shown, or in lieu of pressure gage test connections shown on the drawings.
B. Provide one each of the following test items to the Resident Engineer:
1. 6 mm (1/4 inch) FPT by 3 mm (1/8 inch) diameter stainless steel pressure gage
adapter probe for extra-long test plug. PETE'S 500 XL is an example.
2. 90 mm (3-1/2 inch) diameter, one percent accuracy, compound gage, –—100 kPa (30
inches) Hg to 700 kPa (100 psig) range.
3. 0 - 104 degrees C (220 degrees F) pocket thermometer one-half degree accuracy, 25
mm (one inch) dial, 125 mm (5 inch) long stainless steel stem, plastic case.
2.17 THERMOMETERS
A. Mercury or organic liquid filled type, red or blue column, clear plastic window, with 150
mm (6 inch) brass stem, straight, fixed or adjustable angle as required for each in reading.
B. Case: Chrome plated brass or aluminum with enamel finish.
C. Scale: Not less than 225 mm (9 inches), range as described below, two degree graduations.
D. Separable Socket (Well): Brass, extension neck type to clear pipe insulation.
E. Scale ranges may be slightly greater than shown to meet manufacturer's standard. Required
ranges in degrees C (F):
1. Chilled Water 0 to 38 degrees C (32-100 degrees F)

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A8-ME-01 REV 1
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. External chilled water/ heating water pipes and chilled water/ heating water pipes inside
utility culverts or directly buried: Pre-insulated piping. Chilled water/ heating water pipes
inside building: Black steel pipes.
B. Condensate drain pipes: uPVC pipes.
C. Chilled water/ heating water pipes above ground and exposed to outdoors: Black steel pipes.
3.2 VALVE APPLICATIONS
A. General-Duty Valve Applications: Unless otherwise indicated, use the following valve
types:
1. Shutoff Duty: Gate, ball, and butterfly valves.

2. Throttling Duty: Globe and ball valves.
B. Install shutoff duty valves at each branch connection to supply mains, at supply connection
to each piece of equipment, unless only one piece of equipment is connected in the branch
line. Install throttling duty valves at each branch connection to return mains, at return
connections to each piece of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.
C. Install calibrated balancing valves in the return water line of each heating or cooling element
and elsewhere as required to facilitate system balancing.
D. Install silent type check valves at each pump discharge and elsewhere as required to control
flow direction.
E. Install safety valves as required by the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Install
safety-valve discharge piping, without valves, to floor. Comply with the ASME Boiler &
Pressure Vessel Code - Section VIII - Pressure Vessels, Division 1, for installation
requirements.
F. Install pressure-reducing valves on hot-water generators and elsewhere as required to

regulate system pressure.
3.3 PIPING INSTALLATIONS
A. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and
servicing of valves.
B. Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, DN 20 (NPS 3/4) ball valve, and short DN 20
(NPS 3/4) threaded nipple with cap, at low points in piping system mains and risers, and
elsewhere as required for system drainage.
C. Install piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent upward in direction of flow.
D. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side up.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A8-ME-01 REV 1
E. Unless otherwise indicated, install branch connections to mains using tee fittings in main
pipe, with the takeoff coming out the bottom of the main pipe. For up-feed risers, install the
takeoff coming out the top of the main pipe.
F. Install strainers on supply side of each control valve, pressure-reducing valve, solenoid
valve, in-line pump, and elsewhere as indicated. Install DN 20 (NPS 3/4) nipple and ball
valve in blowdown connection of strainers DN 50 (NPS 2) and larger. Match size of strainer
blowoff connection for strainers smaller than DN 50 (NPS 2).
G. Anchors shall be provided wherever necessary or indicated to localize expansion or to

prevent undue strain on piping. Anchors shall consist of heavy steel collars with lugs and
bolts for clamping and attaching anchor braces, unless otherwise indicated. Anchor braces
shall be installed in the most effective manner to secure the desired results using turnbuckles
where required. Supports, anchors, or stays shall not be attached where they will injure the
structure or adjacent construction during installation or by the weight of expansion of the
pipeline. Where pipe and conduit penetrations of vapor barrier sealed surfaces occur, these
items shall be anchored immediately adjacent to each penetrated surface, to provide
essentially zero movement within penetration seal. Detailed drawings of pipe anchors shall
be submitted for approval before installation.
3.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Hanger, support, and anchor devices are specified in Section "Hangers and Supports for
HVAC Piping and Equipment." Comply with requirements below for maximum spacing of
supports.
B. Install the following pipe attachments:
1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal piping less than 6 m long.
2. Adjustable roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal piping 6 m or
longer.
3. Pipe Roller: MSS SP-58 for multiple horizontal piping 6 m or longer, supported on a
trapeze.
4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs.
5. On plastic pipe, install rubber pads or cushions on bearing surfaces to prevent hanger
from scratching pipe.
C. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod
sizes:
1. DN 20 (NPS 3/4): Maximum span, 2.1 m; minimum rod size, 10 mm.

2. DN 25 (NPS 1): Maximum span, 2.1 m; minimum rod size, 10 mm.
3. DN 40 (NPS 1-1/2): Maximum span, 2.7 m; minimum rod size, 10 mm.
4. DN 50 (NPS 2): Maximum span, 3 m; minimum rod size, 10 mm.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A8-ME-01 REV 1
D. Install hangers for drawn-temper copper piping with the following maximum spacing and
minimum rod sizes:
1. DN 20 (NPS 3/4): Maximum span, 1.5 m; minimum rod size, 10 mm.

E. PVC Piping Hanger Spacing: Space hangers according to pipe manufacturer's written
instructions for service conditions. Avoid point loading. Space and install hangers with the
fewest practical rigid anchor points.
F. Support vertical runs at roof, at each floor, and at 3-m intervals between floors.
3.5 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before
assembly.
C. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to
tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook,"
using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.
D. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube"
Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8/A5.8M.
E. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut
threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore
full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal
threading is specified.
2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or
damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
F. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12M/D10.12, using qualified

processes and welding operators according to "Quality Assurance" Article.
G. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service
application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.
H. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cemented Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and
fittings according to the following:
1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and
solvent cements.
2. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A8-ME-01 REV 1
3. PVC Pressure Piping: Join ASTM D 1785 schedule number, PVC pipe and PVC
socket fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule number PVC
pipe and socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855.
4. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.
I. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with coupling and gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Cut or roll
grooves in ends of pipe based on pipe and coupling manufacturer's written instructions for
pipe wall thickness. Use grooved-end fittings and rigid, grooved-end-pipe couplings.
J. Mechanically Formed, Copper-Tube-Outlet Joints: Use manufacturer-recommended tool

and procedure, and brazed joints.
K. Pressure-Sealed Joints: Use manufacturer-recommended tool and procedure. Leave insertion

marks on pipe after assembly.
L. Mechanical and Heat Fusion Joints: Assemble joints according to fitting manufacturer’s
written instructions.
3.6 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION
A. Install manual air vents at top of risers and high points in piping, at heat-transfer coils, and
elsewhere as required for system air venting.
B. Install automatic air vents in mechanical equipment rooms only at high points of system
piping, at heat-transfer coils, and elsewhere as required for system air venting.
C. Install combination air separator and strainer in pump suction lines. Install piping to
compression tank with a 2 percent upward slope toward tank. Install blowdown piping with
gate valve; extend to nearest drain.
D. Install expansion tanks on floor. Vent and purge air from hydronic system, and ensure tank
is properly charged with air to suit system design requirements.
3.7 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
A. Size for supply and return piping connections shall be same as for equipment connections.
B. Install control valves in accessible locations close to connected equipment.
C. Install bypass piping with globe valve around control valve. If multiple, parallel control
valves are installed, only one bypass is required.
D. Install ports for pressure and temperature gages at coil inlet connections.
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Prepare hydronic piping according to ANSI/ASME B31.9 and as follows:
1. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during test.
2. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain reactions due to
test pressure. If temporary restraints are impractical, isolate expansion joints from
testing.
3. Flush system with clean water. Clean strainers.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A8-ME-01 REV 1
4. Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure
shall be capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install
blinds in flanged joints to isolate equipment.
5. Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test pressure,
to protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of overpressure during
test.
B. Perform the following tests on hydronic piping:
1. Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium unless there is risk of damage
due to freezing. Another liquid that is safe for workers and compatible with piping
may be used.
2. While filling system, use vents installed at high points of system to release trapped
air. Use drains installed at low points for complete draining of liquid.
3. Check expansion tanks to determine that they are not air bound and that system is full
of water.
4. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the
design pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any vessel,
pump, valve, or other component in system under test. Verify that stress due to
pressure at bottom of vertical runs does not exceed either 90 percent of specified
minimum yield strength or 1.7 times "SE" value in Appendix A of ANSI/ASME
B31.9, "Building Services Piping."
5. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine
piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing,
or replacing components, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks.
6. Prepare written report of testing.
C. In addition to mentioned code requirements, ensure the following further specific

requirements for welding joints in hydronic piping:
a. Primary welding procedure specification to be submitted for review and

approval by welding engineer.
b. Procedure qualification to be done prior to any welding activity on site.
c. Welder qualification test to be done prior to any welding activity on site.
d. Mill certificate for consumable material “Electrode, flux,..etc” to be submitted

for review and approval and the mechanical test for electrode material may be
required.
e. Heat input during welding is important value so the visual inspection for
welding activity “before, during and after” welding is required.
3.9 ADJUSTING
A. Mark calibrated nameplates of pump discharge valves after hydronic system balancing has
been completed, to permanently indicate final balanced position.
B. Perform these adjustments before operating the system:
1. Open valves to fully open position. Close coil bypass valves.

2. Check pump for proper direction of rotation.
3. Set automatic fill valves for required system pressure.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A8-ME-01 REV 1
4. Check air vents at high points of system and determine if all are installed and
operating freely (automatic type), or bleed air completely (manual type).
5. Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow.
6. Check operation of automatic bypass valves.
7. Check and set operating temperatures of boilers, chillers, and cooling towers to
design requirements.
8. Lubricate motors and bearings.
3.10 PAINTING
A. All exposed surfaces of ferrous and non-ferrous piping outdoors or indoors in equipment
rooms and exposed to view in occupied spaces shall be cleaned, primed and painted.
B. Refer to Sections "Interior Painting" and "Exterior Painting" for painting requirement.
3.11 CLEANING
A. Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water. Remove and clean or replace strainer
screens. After cleaning and flushing hydronic piping systems, but before balancing, remove
disposable fine-mesh strainers in pump suction diffusers.
B. Coordinate with HVAC water treatment Sub-Contractor for flushing requirement to ensure
adequacy of flushing prior to Chemical Treatment.
C. Submit cleaning and flushing method statements for Engineer approval.
END OF SECTION 232113

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A8-ME-01 REV 1
SECTION 232123 - HYDRONIC PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following categories of hydronic pumps for hydronic systems:
1. Vertical in-line pumps.
2. End-suction pumps.
3. Split Case pumps.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Buna-N: Nitrile rubber.
B. EPT: Ethylene propylene terpolymer.
1.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Pumps shall be designed using hydraulic criteria based upon actual model developmental
test data. Manufacturer shall certify that pumps have been hydraulically tested at the
factory.
B. Head-capacity curves shall slope up to maximum head at shut-off. Curves shall be relatively
flat for closed systems. Select pumps near the midrange of the curve, so that the design
capacity falls to the left of the best efficiency point, to allow a cushion for the usual drift to
the right in operation, without approaching the pump curve end point and possible cavitation
and unstable operation. Select pumps for open systems so that required net positive suction
head (NPSHR) does not exceed the net positive head available (NPSHA). Deviations within
3 percent of maximum efficiency are permissible, provided the lesser efficiency is not less
than the scheduled efficiency.
C. The head for pumps submitted for pumping through condensers and through chilled water
coils and evaporators shall be increased, if necessary, to match the equipment approved for
the project.
D. Pump Driver: Furnish with pump. Size to be non-overloading at any point on the
head-capacity curve including one pump operation in a parallel pumping installation.
E. Pumps having impeller diameters larger than 90 percent of the published maximum
diameter of the casing or less than 15 percent than the published minimum diameter of the
casing will be rejected.
HYDRONIC PUMPS 232123 - Page 1 of 10

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
F. Acceptable maximum impeller diameter calculations shall not be based on percentage of

impeller diameter range for a given casing. Shop Drawings will be approved only if
complete performance curves for all impeller sizes for a given casing are included in the
submittal.
G. Where parallel-pump operation is indicated, pumps selected shall have characteristics

specifically suitable for the service without unstable operation.
H. When net positive suction head (NPSH) calculations are made, inlet-storage head shall be
considered at empty point and the centerline pump location shall include not less than a 150
mm concrete base.
I. Pumps of the same duty condition, classification, and accessories, or with specified
accessory deviation, shall be identical and the product of one manufacturing source.
J. Pumps from more than one manufacturing source shall be provided only when a single
manufacturing source is unable to meet all Specification requirements.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Installation drawings for pumps shall be submitted in accordance with Part
3, "Execution," of this Section.
B. Product Data: The following shall be submitted for pumps in accordance with paragraph
entitled "General Requirements," of this Section.
1. Equipment and performance data including certified performance curves and rated
capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties; final
impeller dimensions; and accessories for each type of product indicated. Indicate
pump's operating point on curves.
2. Equipment foundation data.
C. Test Reports: The following tests shall be submitted from the manufacturer prior to shipping
the pump from the factory:
1. Hydraulic Tests.
2. Efficiency Tests.
3. Vibration Tests.
4. Output Efficiency.
5. Surface Hardness Tests.
6. Deflection Tests.
D. Certificates: Certificates shall be submitted for the following items showing conformance
with the referenced standards contained in this section.
1. Base-mounted centrifugal pumps.

2. Line-mounted pumps.
3. Accessories.
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For pumps to include in emergency, operation and
F. Warranties: Warranties specified in this Section.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
1.6 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Design analysis and calculations shall show NPSH calculations for centrifugal pumps.
B. Equipment and performance data consisting of pump curves gallons (liters) per minute
versus total head in feet (meters) per rpm shall be provided for each type of centrifugal
pump.
C. Equipment foundation data shall be submitted for centrifugal pumps.
A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, connections, and dimensional

requirements of pumps and are based on the specific types and models selected. Other
manufacturers' pumps with equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to
Division 1 Section "Product Requirements."
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, Article 100 or equivalent European standard (IEC), by a testing agency
acceptable to Engineer.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Manufacturer's Preparation for Shipping: Clean flanges and exposed machined metal
surfaces and treat with anticorrosion compound after assembly and testing. Protect flanges,
pipe openings, and nozzles with wooden flange covers or with screwed-in plugs.
B. Store pumps in dry location.
C. Retain protective covers for flanges and protective coatings during storage.
D. Protect bearings and couplings against damage from sand, grit, and other foreign matter.
E. Comply with pump manufacturer's written rigging instructions.
1.9 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Section "Cast-in-Place
Concrete."
1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Mechanical Seals: One set of mechanical seals for each pump.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
1.11 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide written warranty, signed by manufacturer agreeing to

repair or replace components of the hydronic pumps that fail in materials or workmanship
within specified warranty period.

5. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering and
use.
7. Making good and installation and finishing all items that are disturbed and that may be
required due to repair or replacement of defective items. Coordinate with Employer,
manufacturer, and installer of adjacent disturbed items to ensure that their warranty is not
cancelled due to the repair work.
D. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Materials and equipment shall be standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in
the manufacturing of such products, which are of a similar material, design and
workmanship. The standard products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or
industrial use for 5 years prior to bid opening. The 5 year use shall include applications of
equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. The 5 years
experience shall be satisfactorily completed by a product that has been sold or is offered for
sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturer's catalogs, or
brochures. Products having less than a 5 year field service record shall not be acceptable.
Products shall be supported by a service organization. System components shall be
environmentally suitable for the indicated locations.
2.2 GENERAL PUMP REQUIREMENTS
A. Certificates for pumps and accessories shall show conformance with the referenced
standards contained in this section. Pumps provided shall conform to ISO 5199 and ISO
2858 standards or equivalent European standards for centrifugal pumps and to requirements
specified herein.
B. Pump Units: Factory assembled and tested.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
C. Pump casings shall be bronze-fitted cast iron, seasoned cast iron with a design working
pressure of minimum 1.5 times system’s operating pressure, or the minimum specified
rating whichever is greater. Casings shall be single or double volute with flanged piping
connections conforming to ASME B16.1, MSS SP-51, MSS SP-86 and ISO 7005-2 Class
125 psi or equivalent European standard.
D. Motors: Refer to Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment" for
general requirements for factory-installed motors. Motors shall be NEMA MG 1, general
purpose, continuous duty, Design B, except Design C where required for high starting
torque or equivalent characteristics in accordance with IEC 60034 parts 1 to 30. Include
built-in, thermal-overload protection, grease-lubricated ball bearings and terminal blocks.
Select each motor to be non-overloading over full range of pump performance curve.
E. Motors Indicated to be Energy Efficient: Minimum efficiency as indicated according to

IEEE 112, Test Method B. Include motors with higher efficiency than "average standard
industry motors" according to IEEE 112, Test Method B, if efficiency is not indicated.
F. Pump impeller assemblies shall be statically and dynamically balanced to ISO 1940-1.
G. Pump shaft shall be connected to the motor shaft through a flexible coupling or closed
coupling. Flexible member shall be a tire shape in shear, or a solid-mass serrated-edge disk
shape made of chloroprene materials and retained by fixed flanges. Flexible coupling shall
act as a dielectric connector and shall not transmit sound, vibration, or end thrust.
H. Pump and driver shall be mounted on a common steel bedplate, multiribbed for maximum
rigidity, with adequate number of grout holes and grout air vents, and with drip rim and
drain tapping.
I. Mechanical seals shall be balanced or unbalanced, as necessary to conform to specified

service requirements. Mechanical seals shall be constructed in a manner and of materials
particularly suitable for the temperature service range and chemical analysis of water being
pumped. Materials of construction shall include AISI 300 series corrosion-resistant steel,
solid tungsten-carbide rotating-seal face, and Buna-N vinylidene-fluoride-
hexafluoropropylene, EPT, or tetrafluoroethylene seals. Seal construction shall not require
external source cooling for pumped-fluid service temperatures up to 121 degrees C (250
deg. F). Seal pressure rating shall be suitable for maximum system hydraulic conditions.
J. Bearings shall be heavy-duty ball or roller type with full provisions for the mechanical and
hydraulic radial and thrust loads imposed by any normal service condition. Bearings shall
be manufactured from vacuum-degassed or processed-alloy steel. Thrust bearings shall be
secured to the shaft by threaded collar and locknut. Double-row ball or roller bearings shall
be self-aligning. Bearings shall have an L-10 rated life of not less than 40,000 hours with
additional bearings set for each pump without extra cost. Shop Drawings shall bear
manufacturer's certification of bearing life. Bearings shall be grease lubricated and shall be
provided with grease supply and relief fittings located at bottom of bearings.
K. Factory finish: Manufacturer’s standard paint shall be applied to factory-assembled and

tested units before shipping. Special coating shall be applied for pumps exposed to outdoor
and other corrosive environment.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
2.3 VERTICAL IN-LINE PUMPS
A. Description: Vertical, in-line, centrifugal, flexible-coupled, single-stage, radially split case

design. Include vertical-mounting, bronze-fitted design and mechanical seals rated for 860-
kPa (125-psig) minimum working pressure subject to suit system operating pressure, and a
continuous water temperature of 107 deg C (225 deg F).
1. Casing: Cast iron, with threaded companion flanges for piping connections smaller
than DN80 (NPS 3), drain plug at low point of volute, and threaded gage tappings at
inlet and outlet connections.
2. Impeller: ASTM B 584, cast bronze, statically and dynamically balanced, closed,
overhung, single suction, and keyed to shaft.
3. Wear Rings: Replaceable, bronze casing ring.
4. Shaft and Sleeve: Ground and polished stainless-steel shaft with bronze sleeve; for
close-coupled pumps.
5. Seals: Mechanical, with carbon-steel rotating ring, stainless-steel spring, ceramic
seat, and flexible bellows and gasket.
6. Motor: Directly mounted to pump casing and with lifting and supporting lugs in top
of motor enclosure.
2.4 CLOSE-COUPLED, END-SUCTION PUMPS
A. Description: Centrifugal, close-coupled, end-suction, single-stage, bronze-fitted, back-pull-

out, radially split case design; rated for 1200-kPa (175-psig) minimum working pressure
subject to suit system operating pressure, and a continuous water temperature of 107 deg C
(225 deg F).
1. Casing: Cast iron, with flanged piping connections, drain plug at low point of volute,
and threaded gage tappings at inlet and outlet connections.
overhung, single suction, keyed to shaft, and secured by locking cap screw.
4. Shaft and Sleeve: Steel shaft extension with bronze sleeve and neoprene slinger; for
flanged connection pumps.
5. Shaft: Stainless-steel shaft close coupled to motor shaft; for threaded connection
pumps.
7. Motor: Directly mounted to pump casing and with supporting legs as integral part of
motor enclosure.
2.5 FLEXIBLE-COUPLED, SPLIT CASE PUMPS
A. Description: Base-mounted, centrifugal, flexible-coupled, single-stage, bronze-fitted,

axially split case design; rated for 1200-kPa (175-psig) minimum working pressure subject
to suit system operating pressure, and a continuous water temperature of 107 deg C
(225 deg F), with mechanical seals and impeller mounted between bearings and the
following:
1. Casing: Cast iron; with ASME B16.1, Class 250 flanged pipe connections. Include
threaded gage tappings at inlet and outlet connections, vent valve at high point of
volute, and threaded drain plug at low point of volute.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
a. Casing shall allow removal and replacement of impeller without disconnecting

piping.
double suction, and keyed to shaft.
4. Shaft and Sleeve: Stainless-steel shaft with bronze sleeve.
5. Pump Shaft Bearings: Grease-lubricated ball bearings contained in cast-iron housing.
7. Coupling: Flexible-spacer type, capable of absorbing torsional vibration and shaft
misalignment; with flange and sleeve section that can be disassembled and removed
without removing pump or motor.
8. Coupling Guard: Steel, removable, and attached to mounting frame.
9. Mounting Frame: Welded-steel frame and cross members, factory fabricated from
ASTM A 36/A 36M channels and angles. Fabricate for mounting pump casing,
coupling guard, and motor. Field-drill motor-mounting holes for field-installed
motors.
10. Motor: Secured to mounting frame, with adjustable alignment.
2.6 PUMP SPECIALTY FITTINGS
A. Suction Diffuser: Angle or straight pattern, 1725-kPa (250-psig) pressure rating, cast-iron
body and end cap, pump-inlet fitting; with bronze startup and bronze or stainless-steel
permanent strainers; bronze or stainless-steel straightening vanes; drain plug; and factory- or
field-fabricated support.
B. Triple-Duty Valve: Angle or straight pattern, 1725-kPa (250-psig) pressure rating, cast-iron
body, pump-discharge fitting; with drain plug and bronze-fitted shutoff, balancing, and
check valve features.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine equipment foundations and anchor-bolt locations for compliance with

requirements for installation.
1. Examine roughing-in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping

connections before pump installation.
2. Examine foundations and inertia bases for suitable conditions where pumps are to be
installed.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PUMP INSTALLATION
A. Install pumps according to manufacturer's written instructions. Comply with HI 1.4.
B. Install pumps to provide access for periodic maintenance, including removing motors,
impellers, couplings, and accessories.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
C. Support pumps and piping separately so piping is not supported by pumps.
D. Suspend in-line pumps using continuous-thread hanger rod and vibration-isolation hangers.
Install seismic bracing as required. Refer to Section 230548 for vibration and seismic
control.
E. Set base-mounted pumps on concrete foundation. Disconnect coupling halves before

setting. Do not reconnect couplings until alignment operations have been completed.
1. Support pump baseplate on rectangular metal blocks and shims, or on metal wedges
with small taper, at points near foundation bolts to provide a gap of 19 to 38 mm
between pump base and foundation for grouting.
2. Adjust metal supports or wedges until pump and driver shafts are level. Check
coupling faces and suction and discharge flanges of pump to verify that they are level
and plumb.
F. Automatic Condensate Pump Units: Install units for collecting condensate and pipe
discharge to nearest open drain.
3.3 ALIGNMENT
A. Align pump and motor shafts and piping connections after setting them on foundations, after
grout has been set and foundation bolts have been tightened, and after piping connections
have been made.
B. Comply with pump and coupling manufacturers' written instructions.
C. Adjust pump and motor shafts for angular and offset alignment by methods specified in
HI 1.1-1.2 "Rotodynamic Centrifugal Pumps for Nomenclature and Definitions", and HI 1.3
"Rotodynamic Centrifugal Pumps for Design and Application".
D. After alignment is correct, tighten foundation bolts evenly but not too firmly. Completely
fill baseplate with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout while metal blocks and shims or wedges are
in place. After grout has cured, fully tighten foundation bolts.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections. Drawings indicate general
arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.
C. Connect piping to pumps. Install valves that are the same size as piping connected to
pumps.
D. Install non-slam check valve and throttling or globe valve on discharge side of pumps, or
install triple-duty valves, contractor’s option, on discharge side of pumps.
E. Install shutoff valve on suction side of vertical in-line and end-suction pumps.
F. Install suction diffuser on suction side of vertical in-line and end-suction pumps wherever
available space doesn’t allow installation of strainers as per manufacturer recommendations.
G. Install basket type strainer and shut off valve on suction side of base-mounted pumps.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
H. Install flexible connectors on suction and discharge sides of pumps between pump casing
and valves.
I. Install temperature and pressure-gage connector plugs in suction and discharge piping
around each pump.
J. Install check valve and ball valve on each condensate pump unit discharge.
K. Install electrical connections for power, controls, and devices.
L. Electrical power and control wiring and connections are specified in Division 26 Sections.
M. Ground equipment.
1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published

torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those
specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.5 COMMISSIONING
A. Verify that pumps are installed and connected according to the Contract Documents.
B. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's written instructions
and the Contract Documents.
C. Perform the following preventive maintenance operations and checks before starting:
1. Lubricate bearings.
2. Remove grease-lubricated bearing covers, flush bearings with kerosene, and clean
thoroughly. Fill with new lubricant according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3. Disconnect coupling and check motor for proper rotation that matches direction
marked on pump casing.
4. Verify that pumps are free to rotate by hand and that pumps for handling hot liquids
are free to rotate with pumps hot and cold. Do not operate pumps if they are bound or
drag, until cause of trouble is determined and corrected.
5. Check suction piping connections for tightness to avoid drawing air into pumps.
6. Clean strainers.
7. Verify that pump controls are correct for required application.
D. Starting procedure for pumps with shutoff power not exceeding safe motor power is as
follows:
1. Prime pumps by opening suction valves and closing drains, and prepare pumps for
operation.
2. Open cooling water-supply valves in cooling water supply to bearings, where
applicable.
3. Open cooling water-supply valves if stuffing boxes are water cooled.
4. Open sealing liquid-supply valves if pumps are so fitted.
5. Open warm-up valves of pumps handling hot liquids if pumps are not normally kept
at operating temperature.
6. Open circulating line valves if pumps should not be operated against dead shutoff.
7. Start motors.
8. Open discharge valves slowly.
9. Check general mechanical operation of pumps and motors.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
10. Close circulating line valves once there is sufficient flow through pumps to prevent
overheating.
E. When pumps are to be started against closed check valves with discharge shutoff valves
open, steps are the same, except open discharge valves before starting motors.
F. Refer to Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for detailed requirements
for testing, adjusting, and balancing hydronic systems.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Employer's maintenance

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain hydronic pumps. Refer to Division 1.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
SECTION 232300 - REFRIGERANT PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes refrigerant piping used for air-conditioning applications, including
pipes, tubing, fittings, and specialties; special-duty valves; and refrigerants.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each valve type and refrigerant piping specialty specified. Include
pressure drop, based on manufacturer's test data, for the following:
1. Thermostatic expansion valves.

2. Solenoid valves.
3. Hot-gas bypass valves.
4. Filter dryers.
5. Strainers.
6. Pressure-regulating valves.
B. Shop Drawings: Show layout of refrigerant piping, specialties, and fittings, including pipe
and tube sizes, flow capacities, valve arrangements and locations, slopes of horizontal runs,
wall and floor penetrations, and equipment connection details. Show interface and spatial
relationship between piping and equipment.
1. Refrigerant piping indicated is schematic only. Size and design the layout and
installation of the piping, including oil traps, double risers, specialties, and pipe and
tube sizes, to ensure proper operation and conformance with warranties of connected
equipment.
C. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with
project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects/engineers and owners, and
any other information required by Engineer.
D. Maintenance Data: For refrigerant valves and piping specialties to include in the operation
and maintenance manual specified in Division 1.
A. ASME Compliance: Qualify brazing and welding processes and operators according to
ASME Section IX AMENDED by ASME Section IX Addenda A, ASME Section IX
Addenda B, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
REFRIGERANT PIPING 232300 - Page 1 of 10

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with provisions of the following codes:
1. ANSI/ASME B31.5, "Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components."

2. ASHRAE 15 AND 34 PACKAGE, “Safety Standards for Refrigeration Systems.”
C. UL Standard: Provide products complying with UL 207, "Refrigerant-Containing

Components and Accessories, Nonelectrical"; or UL 429, "Electrically Operated Valves."
D. Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are UL listed and
labeled.
1.5 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate the installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. Roof
specialties are specified in Division 7 Sections.
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with
protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents. Deliver
to Employer.
1. Refrigeration Oil Test Kits: 2 each, containing everything required to conduct 1 test.
2. Refrigerant: 2 containers each, with 10 kg (22 lb) of refrigerant.
3. Filter-Dryer Cartridges: 3 of each type.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPES AND TUBES
A. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B280, Type ACR, drawn temper.
B. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B88M, Type B, drawn temper.
C. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B88M, Type B, annealed temper.
D. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B88M, Type A, annealed temper.
2.2 PIPE AND TUBE FITTINGS
A. Copper Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.22, wrought-copper streamlined pattern.
2.3 JOINING MATERIALS
A. Brazing Filler Metals: ANSI/AWS A5.8/A5.8M, Classification BAg-1 (Silver) or BCup-5.
2.4 VALVES
A. Diaphragm Packless Valves: 3450-kPa (500-psig) working pressure and 121 deg C (250
deg F) working temperature, globe or angle pattern, forged-brass or bronze body and

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
bonnet, phosphor bronze and stainless-steel diaphragms, rising stem and handwheel,
stainless-steel spring, nylon seat disc, with solder-end connections.
B. Packed-Angle Valves: 3450-kPa (500-psig) working pressure and 121 deg C (250 deg F)
working temperature, forged-brass or bronze body, forged-brass seal caps with copper
gasket, back seating, rising stem and seat, molded stem packing, with solder-end
connections.
C. Check Valves DN25 (1-Inch NPS) and Smaller: 3450-kPa (500-psig) operating pressure,
121 deg C (250 deg F) operating temperature; cast-brass body, with removable piston, PTFE
seat, and stainless-steel spring; straight-through globe design. Valve shall be straight-
through pattern, with solder-end connections.
D. Check Valves Larger than DN25 (1-Inch NPS): 3100-kPa (450-psig) operating pressure,
121 deg C (250 deg F) operating temperature; cast-bronze body, with cast-bronze or forged-
brass bolted bonnet; floating piston with mechanically retained PTFE seat disc. Valve shall
be straight-through or angle pattern, with solder-end connections.
E. Service Valves: 3450-kPa (500-psig) pressure rating, forged-brass body with copper stubs,
brass caps, removable valve core, integral ball check valve, with solder-end connections.
F. Solenoid Valves: Conform to ANSI/AHRI 760; 121 deg C (250 deg F) temperature rating,
2760-kPa (400-psig) working pressure; forged brass, with PTFE valve seat, 2-way straight-
through pattern, and solder-end connections; manual operator; with NEMA 250, Type 1
solenoid enclosure with 13-mm (1/2-inch) conduit adapter, and 24-V normally closed
holding coil.
G. Pressure-Regulating Valves: Conform to ANSI/AHRI 770; pilot operated, forged brass or

cast bronze with pilot operator, stainless-steel bottom spring, pressure-gage tappings, 24-V
dc standard coil, and wrought-copper fittings for solder-end connections.
H. Pressure-Regulating Valves: Conform to ANSI/AHRI 770; direct acting, brass with pilot
operator, stainless-steel diaphragm, standard coil, and solder-end connections.
I. Pressure Relief Valves: Straight or angle brass body and disc, neoprene seat, factory sealed
and ASME labeled, for standard pressure setting.
J. Thermal Expansion Valves: Conform to ANSI/ARI 750; thermostatic-adjustable,

modulating type; size as required and factory set for superheat requirements; solder-end
connections; with sensing bulb, distributor having side connection for hot-gas bypass line,
and external equalizer line.
K. Hot-Gas Bypass Valve: Adjustable, sized for capacity equal to last step of compressor
unloading; solder-end connections.
2.5 REFRIGERANT PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Straight- or Angle-Type Strainers: 2960-kPa (430-psig) working pressure; forged-brass or

steel body with stainless-steel wire or brass-reinforced Monel screen, and screwed cleanout
plug, with solder-end connections.
B. Straight, Non-Cleanable-Type Strainers: 3450-kPa (500-psig) working pressure; steel shell

with stainless-steel screen, with solder-end connections.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
C. Moisture/Liquid Indicators: 3450-kPa (500-psig) operating pressure, 93 deg C (200 deg F)

operating temperature; forged-brass body, with replaceable, polished, optical viewing
window with color-coded moisture indicator, and solder-end connections.
D. Replaceable-Core Filter-Dryers: 3450-kPa (500-psig) operating pressure; steel shell, flange

ring, and spring, ductile-iron cover plate with steel cap screws, and wrought-copper fittings
for solder-end connections; with replaceable-core kit, including gaskets, as follows:
1. Filter Cartridge: Pleated media with integral end rings, stainless-steel support,
ANSI/AHRI 730 rated for capacity.
2. Filter-Dryer Cartridge: Pleated media with solid-core sieve with activated alumina,
ANSI/AHRI 730 rated for capacity.
3. Wax Removal Cartridge: Molded, bonded core of activated charcoal and desiccant
with integral gaskets.
E. Permanent Filter-Dryer: 2140-kPa (350-psig) maximum operating pressure, 107 deg C (225
deg F) maximum operating temperature; steel shell, and wrought-copper fittings for solder-
end connections; molded-felt core surrounded by desiccant.
F. Flanged Unions: 2760-kPa (400-psig) working pressure, 165 deg C (330 deg F) maximum
operating temperature; 2 brass tailpiece adapters for solder-end connections to copper
tubing; forged-steel flanges for 22- to 41-mm (1- to 1-1/2-inch) nominal copper-tube size
and ductile iron for 54- to 79-mm (2- to 3-inch) nominal copper-tube size with 4 plated steel
bolts, with silicon bronze nuts and fiber gasket; factory-applied rust-resistant coating on
flanges and bolts.
G. Flexible Connectors: 3450-kPa (500-psig) operating pressure; seamless tin-bronze or

stainless-steel core, high-tensile bronze-braid covering, solder-end connections, and
synthetic covering; dehydrated, pressure tested, minimum 180 mm long.
H. Mufflers: 3450-kPa (500-psig) operating pressure, brazed-steel construction with fusible

plug, sized for refrigeration capacity.
2.6 RECEIVERS
A. 150-mm (6-Inch) Diameter and Smaller: AHRI 495, UL listed, steel, brazed; 2760-kPa
(400-psig) pressure rating, with tappings for inlet, outlet, and pressure relief valve.
B. More than 150-mm (6-Inch) Diameter: AHRI 495, welded steel, tested and stamped
according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII; 2760 kPa (400 psig)
with tappings for liquid inlet and outlet valves, pressure relief valve, and liquid-level
indicator.
2.7 REFRIGERANT
A. ASHRAE 34, R-123: Dichlorotrifluoroethane.
B. ASHRAE 34, R-134a: Tetrafluoroethane.
C. ASHRAE 34, R-407C: Difluoromethane/Pentafluoroethane/1,1,1,2-Tetrafluoroethane.
D. ASHRAE 34, R-410A: Pentafluoroethane/Difluoromethane.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance of refrigerant piping. Do not proceed with installation
until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 APPLICATIONS
A. Aboveground, within Building: Type ACR drawn-copper tubing.
B. Aboveground, within Building: Type B (Type L) drawn-copper tubing.
C. Belowground for DN50 (2-Inch NPS) and Smaller: Type B (Type L) annealed-copper
tubing.
D. Belowground for Larger than DN50 (2-Inch NPS): Type A (Type K) annealed-copper
tubing.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install refrigerant piping according to ASHRAE 15 AND 34 PACKAGE, “Safety Standards

for Refrigeration Systems.”
B. Install piping in short and direct arrangement, with minimum number of joints, elbows, and
fittings.
C. Arrange piping to allow normal inspection and service of compressor and other equipment.
Install valves and specialties in accessible locations to allow for service and inspection.
D. Install piping with adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls and hangers, or
between pipes for insulation installation. Use sleeves through floors, walls, or ceilings,
sized to permit installation of full-thickness insulation.
E. Belowground, install copper tubing in conduit. Vent conduit outdoors.
F. Insulate suction lines and liquid lines, but insulate them together if adjacent.
1. Do not install insulation until system testing has been completed and all leaks have
been eliminated.
G. Install branch lines to parallel compressors of equal length, and pipe identically and
symmetrically.
H. Install copper tubing in rigid or flexible conduit in locations where copper tubing will be
exposed to mechanical injury.
I. Slope refrigerant piping as follows:
1. Install horizontal hot-gas discharge piping with a uniform slope of 0.4 percent
downward away from compressor.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
2. Install horizontal suction lines with a uniform slope of 0.4 percent downward to
compressor.
3. Install traps and double risers where indicated and where required to entrain oil in
vertical runs.
4. Liquid lines may be installed level.
J. Use fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
K. Install exposed piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are not
permitted, unless expressly indicated.
L. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fittings installed with level side down.
M. Provide bypass around moisture-liquid indicators in lines larger than DN50 (2-inch NPS).
N. Install unions to allow removal of solenoid valves, pressure-regulating valves, expansion

valves, and at connections to compressors and evaporators.
O. Install flexible connectors at the inlet and discharge connection, at right angles to axial
movement of compressor, parallel to crankshaft.
P. Install replaceable-core filter-dryers, with isolation valves and valved bypass.
Q. Install refrigerant valves according to manufacturer's written instructions.
R. When brazing, remove solenoid-valve coils; remove sight glasses; and remove stems, seats,
and packing of valves, and accessible internal parts of refrigerant specialties. Do not apply
heat near bulb of expansion valve.
S. Electrical wiring for solenoid valves is specified in Division 26 Sections. Coordinate

electrical requirements and connections.
T. Mount thermostatic expansion valves in any position, close to evaporator.
1. Where refrigerant distributors are used, mount directly on expansion-valve outlet.

2. Install valve so diaphragm case is warmer than bulb.
3. Secure bulb to clean, straight, horizontal section of suction line using 2 bulb straps.
Do not mount bulb in a trap or at the bottom of the line.
4. Where external equalizer lines are required, make connection where it will reflect
suction-line pressure at bulb location.
U. Install pressure relief valves as required by ASHRAE 15 AND 34 PACKAGE, “Safety

Standards for Refrigeration Systems” Pipe pressure relief valves on receivers to outdoors.
V. Charge and purge systems, after testing, and dispose of refrigerant following ASHRAE 15
AND 34 PACKAGE, “Safety Standards for Refrigeration Systems” procedures.
A. General: Hangers, supports, and anchors are specified in Section "Hangers and Supports for
HVAC Piping and Equipment." Provide according to ANSI/ASME B31.5 and ANSI/MSS
SP-69.
B. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal runs less than 6 m in length.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
C. Roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal runs 6 m or longer.
D. Pipe rollers for multiple horizontal runs, 6 m or longer supported by a trapeze.
E. Spring hangers to support vertical runs.
F. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod
sizes. Tube sizes are nominal or standard tube sizes as expressed in ASTM B88M.
1. 15 mm: Maximum span, 1500 mm; minimum rod size, 6 mm.

8. 79 mm: Maximum span, 3 m; minimum rod size, 10 mm.
9. 105 mm: Maximum span, 3.6 m; minimum rod size, 12 mm.
G. Support vertical runs at each floor.
3.5 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs.
B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before
assembly.
C. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," Chapter "Pipe and
Tube."
1. Use Type BcuP, copper-phosphorus alloy for joining copper socket fittings with
copper pipe.
2. Use Type BAg, cadmium-free silver alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel.
D. Fill pipe and fittings with nitrogen during brazing to prevent formation of scale.
3.6 VALVE INSTALLATIONS
A. Install refrigerant valves according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install valves on suction and discharge of compressor, for gage taps at compressor inlet and
outlet, for gage taps at hot-gas bypass regulators, on inlet and outlet, and on each side of
strainers.
C. Install check valves on compressor discharge and on condenser liquid lines on multiple
condenser systems.
D. Install refrigerant-charging (packed-angle) valve in liquid line between receiver shutoff

valve and expansion valve.
E. Install globe valves on each side of strainers and dryers, in liquid and suction lines at
evaporators, and elsewhere as indicated.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
F. Install a full-sized, 3-valve bypass around each dryer.
G. Install solenoid valves ahead of each expansion valve and hot-gas bypass valve. Install
solenoid valves in horizontal lines with coil at top.
1. Electrical wiring for solenoid valves is specified in Division 26 Sections. Coordinate

electrical requirements and connections.
H. Mount thermostatic expansion valves in any position, close to evaporator.
1. Where refrigerant distributors are used, mount directly on expansion-valve outlet.

2. Install valve so diaphragm case is warmer than bulb.
3. Secure bulb to clean, straight, horizontal section of suction line using 2 bulb straps.
Do not mount bulb in a trap or at the bottom of the line.
4. Where external equalizer lines are required, make connection where it will reflect
suction-line pressure at bulb location.
I. Install pressure-regulating and relief valves as required by ASHRAE 15 AND 34

PACKAGE, “Safety Standards for Refrigeration Systems”.
3.7 SPECIALTIES APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION
A. Install liquid indicators in liquid line leaving condenser, in liquid line leaving receiver, and
on leaving side of liquid solenoid valves.
B. Install strainers immediately upstream of each automatic valve, including expansion valves,
solenoid valves, hot-gas bypass valves, and compressor suction valves.
C. Install strainers on main liquid line where multiple expansion valves with integral strainers
are used.
D. Install moisture-liquid indicators in liquid lines between filter-dryers and thermostatic

expansion valves and in liquid line to receiver.
E. Install pressure relief valves on ASME receivers, and pipe to outdoors.
F. Install replaceable-core filter-dryers in vertical liquid line adjacent to receivers and before
each solenoid valve.
G. Install permanent filter-dryers in low-temperature systems, in systems using hermetic

compressors, and before each solenoid valve.
H. Install solenoid valves in liquid line of systems operating with single pump-out or pump-
down compressor control, in liquid line of single or multiple evaporator systems, and in oil
bleeder lines from flooded evaporators to stop flow of oil and refrigerant into suction line
when system shuts down.
I. Install receivers on systems 18 kW (5 tons) and larger, and on systems with long piping
runs, sized to accommodate pump-down charge.
J. Install flexible connectors at or near compressors where piping configuration does not
absorb vibration.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
3.8 CONNECTIONS
A. Electrical: Conform to applicable requirements of Division 26 Sections for electrical

connections.
A. Inspect and test refrigerant piping according to ANSI/ASME B31.5, Chapter VI.
1. Pressure test with nitrogen to 1380 kPa (200 psig). Perform final tests at 186-kPa
(27-psig) vacuum and 1380 kPa (200 psig) using halide torch or electronic leak
detector. Test to no leakage.
B. Test refrigerant piping, specialties, and receivers. Isolate compressor, condenser, evaporator,
and safety devices from test pressure if they are not rated above the test pressure.
C. In addition to mentioned code requirements, ensure the following further specific

requirements for welding joints in refrigerant piping:
a. Primary welding procedure specification to be submitted for review and

approval by welding engineer.
b. Procedure qualification to be done prior to any welding activity on site.
c. Welder qualification test to be done prior to any welding activity on site.
d. Mill certificate for consumable material “Electrode, flux,..etc” to be submitted

for review and approval and the mechanical test for electrode material may be
required.
e. Heat input during welding is important value so the visual inspection for
welding activity “before, during and after” welding is required.
D. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
E. Repair leaks using new materials; retest.
3.10 CLEANING
A. Before installation of copper tubing other than Type ACR, clean tubing and fittings with
trichloroethylene.
3.11 SYSTEM CHARGING
A. Charge system using the following procedures:
1. Install core in filter dryer after leak test, but before evacuation.
2. Evacuate refrigerant system with vacuum pump to 500 micrometers (67 Pa). If
vacuum holds for 12 hours, system is ready for charging.
3. During evacuation, apply heat to pockets, elbows, and low spots in piping.
4. Break vacuum with refrigerant gas, allowing pressure to build up to 14 kPa (2 psig).

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
5. Complete charging of system, using new filter-dryer core in charging line. Provide
full-operating charge.
3.12 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust thermostatic expansion valve to obtain proper evaporator superheat requirements.
B. Adjust high- and low-pressure switch settings to avoid short cycling in response to
fluctuating suction pressure.
C. Adjust set-point temperature of air-conditioning or chilled-water controllers to the system

design temperature.
D. Perform the following adjustments before operating the refrigeration system, according to
manufacturer's written instructions:
1. Open shutoff valves in condenser water circuit.

2. Verify that compressor oil level is correct.
3. Open compressor suction and discharge valves.
4. Open refrigerant valves except bypass valves that are used for other purposes.
5. Check open compressor-motor alignment and verify lubrication for motors and
bearings.
E. Replace core of replaceable filter dryer after system has been adjusted and after design flow
rates and pressures are established.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
SECTION 232500 - HVAC WATER TREATMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes water-treatment systems for the following:
1. Heating, hot-water piping (closed-loop system).

2. Chilled-water piping (closed-loop system).
3. Steam and condensate piping for humidifiers and cooking appliances (open systems).
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. TSS: Total suspended solids are solid materials, including organic and inorganic, that are
suspended in the water. These solids may include silt, plankton, and industrial wastes.
B. TDS: Total dissolved solids are the combined content of all inorganic and organic
substances contained in a liquid in molecular, ionized or micro-granular (colloidal sol)
suspended form.
1.4 CHEMICAL FEED SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Closed-Loop System: One manual bypass feeder and one automatic dosing system on each
system with isolating and drain valves downstream from circulating pumps, unless
otherwise indicated.
1. Introduce chemical treatment manually through bypass feeder when required or

indicated by test and automatically through electronic solid-state controller and
feeding pumps.
B. Open-Loop Systems for Humidifiers, Air Washers, Evaporative Condensers, and Cooling
Towers: PVC tubing with hole to feed chemical.
1. Conductivity controller samples sump water when activated by pump and operates
solenoid bleed-off valve in line to drain.
1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Maintain water quality for HVAC systems that controls corrosion and build-up of scale and
biological growth for maximum efficiency of installed equipment without posing a hazard to
operating personnel or the environment.
HVAC WATER TREATMENT 232500 - Page 1 of 9

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
B. Base chemical treatment performance requirements on quality of water available at Project

site, HVAC system equipment material characteristics and functional performance
characteristics, operating personnel capabilities, and specified requirements.
1. Closed System: Maintain system essentially free of scale, corrosion, and fouling to
sustain the following water characteristics:
a. pH: 8.5 to 10.5.

b. Corrosion rate of following metals shall not exceed specified mils per year
penetration:
a. Ferrous: 0 to 0.5.
b. Copper alloy: 0 to 0.2.
c. Total Iron as Fe++ to be less than 1.0 ppm

d. Inhibitor shall be stable at equipment skin surface temperatures and bulk water
temperatures of, respectively, not less than 121 deg. C (250 degrees F) and 52
deg. C (125 deg. F.).
e. Heat exchanger fouling and capacity reduction shall not exceed that allowed by
fouling factor 0.0005.
f. Microbiological Limits:
a. Total Aerobic Plate Count: Maintain a maximum value of 1000

organisms/mL.
b. Total Anaerobic Plate Count: Maintain a maximum value of 100
organisms/mL.
c. Nitrate Reducers: Maintain a maximum value of 100 organisms/mL.
d. Sulfate Reducers: Maintain a maximum value of zero organisms/mL.
e. Iron Bacteria: Maintain a maximum value of zero organisms/mL.
2. Small, Open Systems for Humidifiers, Air Washers, Evaporative Condensers, and
Cooling Towers: Maintain system essentially free of scale, total suspended solids,
and fouling to sustain the following water characteristics:
a. Iron: Less than (Feedwater iron x Concentration factor).

b. pH: 7.5 to 8.5.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities; water-pressure drops; shipping, installed, and
operating weights; and furnished products listed below:
1. Pumps.
2. Chemical solution tanks.
3. Agitators.
4. Control equipment and devices.
5. Test equipment.
6. Chemicals.
7. Filters.
8. Chemical feeders.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies indicating dimensions, weights, loads,

required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each
field connection.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Detail power and control wiring and differentiate between
manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
C. Water Analysis: Submit a copy of the water analysis to illustrate water quality available at
Project site.
D. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
E. Maintenance Data: For pumps, agitators, filters, system controls, and accessories to include
in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is an authorized representative of the

chemical treatment manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of chemical
treatment equipment required for this Project.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to Engineer.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
1. Chemical: Furnish sufficient quantity for four (4) month continuous operation.
2. Chemical: Furnish sufficient chemicals based on entire volume of chilled water
system including external chilled water distribution network served by this system.
3. Chemical: For system volume refer to Expansion Tanks Schedule shown on
mechanical drawings.
1.9 MAINTENANCE
A. Scope of Service: Provide chemicals and service program for maintaining optimum
conditions in the circulating water for inhibiting corrosion, scale, and organic growths in the
cooling, chilled-water piping, steam and condensate system for humidifier and cooking
appliance applications and equipment. Services and chemicals shall be provided for a
period of one year from date of Substantial Completion, including the following:
1. Initial water analysis and recommendations.

2. Startup assistance.
3. Periodic field service and consultation.
4. Customer report charts and log sheets.
5. Laboratory technical assistance.
6. Analyses and reports of all chemical items concerning safety and compliance with
government regulations.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CHEMICAL FEEDING EQUIPMENT
A. Bypass Feeders: Cast iron or steel, for introducing chemicals into system; with funnel
shutoff valve on top, air-release valve on top, drain valve on bottom, and recirculating
shutoff valves on sides.
1. Capacity: 19 L (5 gal.).
2. Working Pressure: 1210 kPa (175 psig).
B. Drip Feeders: Plastic reservoir with capillary tubing probe, weight, charging syringe, and
clip.
C. Positive-Displacement Diaphragm Pump: Simplex, self-priming, rated for intended

chemical with 25 percent safety factor for design pressure and temperature.
1. Adjustable flow rate.

2. Thermoplastic construction.
3. Fully enclosed, continuous-duty, 220-V, 50 Hz, single-phase motor.
4. Built-in relief valve.
D. Positive-Displacement Piston Pump: Metal and thermoplastic construction.

2. Built-in relief valve.
E. Chemical Solution Tanks: Chemical-resistant reservoirs fabricated from high-density

opaque polyethylene with graduated markings.
1. Molded fiberglass cover with recess for mounting pump, agitator, and liquid-level
switch.
2. Capacity: Minimum volume shall cater for 7 to 10 days continuous operation.
F. Agitator: Direct drive, 1450 rpm, mounted on tank with angle adjustment.

2. Stainless-steel clamp and motor mount, with stainless-steel shaft and propeller.
G. Liquid-Level Switch: Polypropylene housing, integrally mounted PVC air trap, receptacles
for connection to metering pump, and low-level alarm.
H. Packaged Conductivity Controller: Solid-state circuitry, 5 percent accuracy, linear dial

adjustment, built-in calibration switch, on-off switch and light, control-function light, output
to control circuit, and recorder.
I. Cold-Water Meter: Positive-displacement type with sealed, tamperproof magnetic drive;

impulse contact register; single-pole, double-throw, dry-contact switch.
1. Rotating-disc or Turbine type with bronze or cast-iron body rated for 860 kPa (125
psig).
2. Magnetic-drive or mechanical-impulse contactor matched to signal receiver.
3. At least six-digit totalizers.
4. 220-V ac.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
J. Solenoid Valves: Forged-brass body, globe pattern, and general-purpose solenoid enclosure
with 220-V, continuous-duty coil.
K. Electronic Timers: 150-second and 5-minute ranges, with infinite adjustment over full
range, and mounted in cabinet with hand-off-auto switches and status lights.
L. Chemical Tubing: Schedule 40, PVC with solvent-cement joints; or polypropylene tubing
with heat fusion.
M. Plastic Ball Valves: Rigid PVC or CPVC body, integral union ends, and
polytetrafluoroethylene seats and seals.
N. Plastic-Body Strainer: Rigid PVC or CPVC with cleanable stainless-steel strainer element.
O. Condenser Water-Treatment Control Panel: Incorporate solid-state integrated circuits and

digital LED displays, in NEMA 250, Type 12 enclosure with gasketed and lockable door.
1. Control dissolved solids, based on conductivity, and include the following:
a. Digital readout display.

b. Temperature-compensated sensor probe adaptable to sample stream manifold.
c. High, low, and normal conductance indicator lights.
d. High or low conductance alarm light, trip points field adjustable; with silence
switch.
e. Hand-off-auto switch for solenoid bleed-off valve.
f. Bleed-off light to indicate valve operation.
g. Internal adjustable hysteresis or dead band.
2. Control inhibitor feeding, based on makeup volume, and include the following:
a. Solid-state reset counter (accumulator), with selections from 1 to 15.

b. Solid-state timer, adjustable from 15 to 300 seconds.
c. Test switch.
d. Hand-off-auto switch for chemical pump.
e. Illuminated legend to indicate feed when pump is activated.
f. Solid-state lockout timer, adjustable from 15 to 180 minutes, with indicator
light. Lockout timer to deactivate the pump and activate alarm circuits.
g. Electromechanical-type, panel-mounted makeup totalizer to measure amount
of makeup water.
3. Control biocide with an adjustable time programmer and include the following:
a. 24-hour timer with 14-day skip feature to permit activation any hour of day.
b. Precision, solid-state, bleed-off lockout timer (zero to nine hours) and clock-
controlled biocide pump timer (zero to two and one-half hours). Prebleed and
bleed lockout.
c. Solid-state alternator to enable the use of two different formulations.
d. 24-hour digital display of time of day.
e. 14-day LED display of day of week.
f. Fast and slow internal clock set controls.
g. Battery backup so clock is not disturbed by power outages.
h. Quartz timekeeping accuracy.
i. Hand-off-auto switches for biocide pumps.
j. Biocide A and Biocide B illuminated legends to indicate pump is running.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
2.2 CHEMICAL TREATMENT TEST EQUIPMENT
A. Test Kit: Manufacturer recommended equipment and chemicals, in a carrying case, for
testing pH, total dissolved solids, dissolved oxygen, biocount, chloride, and total alkalinity
and for calcium hardness field tests.
B. Corrosion Test Coupon Assembly: Constructed of corrosion material, complete with

piping, valves, and mild steel and copper coupons. Locate copper coupon downstream from
mild steel coupon in the test coupon assembly.
1. Two- station rack for closed-loop systems.

2. Four4-station rack for open condenser water systems.
2.3 CHEMICALS
A. Furnish chemicals recommended by water-treatment system manufacturer that are

compatible with piping system components and connected equipment.
B. System Cleaner: Liquid alkaline compound with emulsifying agents and detergents to
remove grease and petroleum products.
C. Biocide: Chlorine release agents or microbiocides.
D. Closed-Loop, Water Piping Chemicals: Sequestering agent to reduce deposits and adjust
pH, corrosion inhibitors, and conductivity enhancers.
E. Open-Loop Piping Chemicals Serving Humidifiers, Air Washers, Evaporative Condensers,

Small Cooling Towers, and Liquid Coolers: Sequestering agent to inhibit scaling, corrosion
inhibitor, and biocide nonoxidizing.
2.4 CHEMICAL TREATMENT FOR CLOSED LOOP SYSTEMS
A. The water treatment system shall be capable of automatically feeding chemicals and
bleeding the system to prevent corrosion, scale, and biological formations. Automatic
chemical feed systems shall automatically feed chemicals into the chilled water based on
varying system conditions. Chilled water quality at selected locations as directed by The
Engineer shall be automatically monitored by the system.
B. Performance: Protect various wetted, coupled materials of construction including ferrous,

and red and yellow metals. Maintain system essentially free of scale, corrosion, and fouling.
Corrosion rate of following metals shall not exceed specified mils per year penetration;
ferrous, 0 to 2; copper and brass, 0 to 1. Inhibitor shall be stable at equipment skin surface
temperatures and bulk water temperatures of, respectively, not less than 121 deg. C (250
deg. F) and 52 deg. C (126 deg. F). Heat exchanger fouling and capacity reduction shall not
exceed that allowed by fouling factor 0.0005.
C. Inhibitor: Provide sodium silicate, sodium nitrite/borate, or other approved proprietary

compound suitable for make-up quality and make-up rate and which will cause or enhance
bacteria/corrosion problems or mechanical seal failure due to excessive total dissolved
solids. Shot feed manually. Maintain inhibitor residual as determined by water treatment
laboratory, taking into consideration residual and temperature effect on pump mechanical
seals.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
D. pH Control: Inhibitor formulation shall include adequate buffer to maintain pH range of 8.0
to 10.0.
E. Pot Feeder: Bypass type for chemical treatment schedule 3.5 mm (10 gauge) heads, 20 mm
system connections and large neck opening for chemical addition. Feeders shall be 7.6 L (2
gallon) minimum size for hot water heating systems and 18.9 L (5 gallon) for chilled water
systems.
1. The pot feeder shall be designed & implemented according to ASME code for
pressure vessels with necessary verification certificates & name plates.
F. Contractor to provide selection & sizing criteria of the chemical equipment (e.g. chemical
dosing pumps & tanks) for the corrosion and biocide inhibitor systems.
G. Contractor to submit warrantee certificate that guarantee, for three years from the date of
testing & commissioning, the following:
1. The performance and operation of the chemical treatment system.
2. The components of the chemical treatment system against any manufacturing or work
ship defects.
H. Contractor is requested to submit a method statement of how to bring the quantity of water
into the system during flushing process and where it will be disposed.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 WATER ANALYSIS
A. Perform an analysis of supply water to determine the type and quantities of chemical
treatment needed to maintain the water quality as specified in "Performance Requirements"
Article.
B. The chilled and condenser water shall be analyzed a minimum of once a month from the
date of substantial completion until the final handover by the installer water treatment
company.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install treatment equipment level and plumb.
B. Add cleaning chemicals as recommended by manufacturer.
C. Delivery and Storage: Deliver all chemicals in manufacturer's sealed shipping containers.
Store in designated space and protect from deleterious exposure and hazardous spills.
D. Install equipment furnished by the chemical treatment supplier and charge systems
according to the manufacturer's instructions and as directed by the Engineer.
3.3 CONNECTIONS

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.
C. Confirm applicable electrical requirements in Division 26 Sections for connecting electrical

equipment.
D. Ground equipment.

specified in UL 486A - 486B.
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
1. Inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including piping and

electrical connections. Report results in writing.
2. Inspect piping and equipment to determine that systems and equipment have been
cleaned, flushed, and filled with water, and are fully operational before introducing
chemicals for water-treatment system.
3. Place HVAC water-treatment system into operation and calibrate controls during the
preliminary phase of HVAC systems' startup procedures.
B. Test chemical feed piping as follows:
1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is tested and satisfactory
test results are achieved.
2. Test for leaks and defects. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report
for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
3. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, and replaced water piping
until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that has been covered or
concealed before it has been tested and approved.
4. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 345 kPa (50 psig) above operating
pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test
source and allow test pressure to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure
constitute defects.
5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping until satisfactory results
are obtained.
6. Prepare test reports, including required corrective action.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Sample boiler water at one-week intervals after boiler startup for a period of five weeks, and
prepare certified test report for each required water performance characteristic. Where
applicable, comply with ASTM D 3370 and the following standards:
1. Silica: ASTM D 859.

2. Steam System: ASTM D 1066.
3. Acidity and Alkalinity: ASTM D 1067.
4. Iron: ASTM D 1068.
5. Water Hardness: ASTM D 1126.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
B. Occupancy Adjustments: Within 12 months of Substantial Completion, perform two

separate water analyses to prove that automatic chemical feed systems are maintaining water
quality within performance requirements specified in this Section. Perform analyses at least
60 days apart. Submit written reports of water analysis.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain HVAC water-treatment systems and equipment.
Refer to Division 1.
1. Schedule at least eight hours of training.

2. Review manufacturer's safety data sheets for handling of chemicals.
3. Review data in maintenance manuals, especially data on recommended parts
inventory and supply sources and on availability of parts and service.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
SECTION 233113 - METAL DUCTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes rectangular, round, and flat-oval metal ducts and plenums for heating,
ventilating, and air-conditioning systems in pressure classes from minus 500 to plus 2490 Pa
(minus 2- to plus 10-inch wg).
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Thermal Conductivity and Apparent Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): As defined in

ASTM C 168. In this Section, these values are the result of the formula Btu x in./h x sq. ft.
x deg F or W/m x K at the temperature differences specified. Values are expressed as Btu
or W.
1. Example: Apparent Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.26 or 0.037.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Duct system design, as indicated, has been used to select and size air-moving and -
distribution equipment and other components of air system. Changes to layout or
configuration of duct system must be specifically approved in writing by Engineer.
Accompany requests for layout modifications with calculations showing that proposed
layout will provide original design results without increasing system total pressure.
A. Delegated Duct Design: Duct construction, including sheet metal thicknesses, seam and
joint construction, reinforcements, and hangers and supports, shall comply with SMACNA's
"HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and performance requirements
and design criteria indicated in "Duct Schedule" Article.
B. Structural Performance relevant to the life safety system: Duct hangers and supports and
seismic restraints shall withstand the effects of gravity and seismic loads and stresses within
limits and under conditions described in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -
Metal and Flexible" and ASCE/SEI 7 and ECP201. SMACNA's "Seismic Restraint Manual:
Guidelines for Mechanical Systems."
1. Seismic Hazard Level A: Seismic force to weight ratio, 0.48.

2. Seismic Hazard Level B: Seismic force to weight ratio, 0.30.
3. Seismic Hazard Level C: Seismic force to weight ratio, 0.15.
METAL DUCTS 233113 - Page 1 of 13

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For duct liner and adhesives, sealants and gaskets and seismic-restraint
devices.
B. Shop Drawings: Show details of the following:
1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections,

components, and attachments to other work.
2. Factory- and shop-fabricated ducts and fittings.
3. Duct layout indicating configuration, liner material, pressure classifications and sizes
on plans.
4. Fittings.
5. Reinforcement and spacing.
6. Seam and joint construction.
7. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions.
8. Locations for duct accessories, including dampers, turning vanes, and access doors
and panels.
9. Terminal unit, coil, and humidifier installations.
10. Hangers and supports, including methods for building attachment, vibration isolation,
seismic restraints relevant to the life safety system, and duct attachment.
C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans drawn to scale and coordinating

penetrations and ceiling-mounted items. Show the following:
1. Ceiling suspension assembly members.

2. Other systems installed in same space as ducts.
3. Ceiling- and wall-mounted access doors and panels required to provide access to
dampers and other operating devices.
4. Coordination with ceiling-mounted items, including lighting fixtures, diffusers,
grilles, speakers, sprinkler heads, access panels, and special moldings.
D. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates indicating welding procedures and personnel

comply with requirements in "Quality Assurance" Article.
E. Field Test Reports: As specified in "Field Quality Control" Article in Part 3 of this Section.
Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements.
F. Record (As-Built) Drawings: Indicate actual routing, fitting details, reinforcement, support,
and installed accessories and devices.
A. Welding Standards: Qualify welding procedures and welding personnel to perform welding
processes for this Project according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code--
Steel," for hangers and supports; AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code--
Aluminum," for aluminum supporting members; and AWS D9.1/D9.1M, "Sheet Metal
Welding Code," for duct joint and seam welding.
B. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," unless
C. Comply with NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning
Systems," unless otherwise indicated.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
D. Comply with NFPA 96, "Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking
Operations," Chapter 3, "Duct System," for range hood ducts, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Mockups: Before installing duct systems, erect mockups representing system pressure
classifications higher than 500 Pa (2-inch wg). Build mockups to comply with the
following requirements, using materials indicated for completed Work:
1. Locate mockups in the locations and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as
directed by Engineer. Mockup may be a representative section of the actual duct
system.
2. Include the minimum number of each of the following features and fittings:
a. Five transverse joints.

b. One access door.
c. Two typical branch connections, each with at least one elbow.
d. Two typical flexible duct or flexible connector connections for each duct and
apparatus.
3. Perform tests specified in "Field Quality Control" Article. Modify mockup

construction and perform additional tests as required to achieve specified minimum
acceptable results.
4. Obtain Engineer's approval of mockups before starting Work.
5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for
judging the completed Work.
6. When directed, demolish and remove mockups from Project site.
A. Deliver sealant and firestopping materials to site in original unopened containers or bundles
with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period
for use, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.
B. Store and handle sealant and firestopping materials according to manufacturer's written
recommendations.
C. Deliver and store stainless-steel sheets with mill-applied adhesive protective paper
maintained through fabrication and installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SHEET METAL MATERIALS
A. Galvanized, Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; ASTM A 653/A 653M, Z275 (G90) coating
designation; mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces of ducts exposed to view.
B. PVC-Coated Galvanized Steel: UL 181, Class 1 listing. Lock-forming-quality, galvanized,

sheet steel with ASTM A 653/A 653M, Z275 (G90) coating designation; factory-applied,
0.10-mm (4-mil) PVC coating on exposed surfaces of ducts and fittings (exterior of ducts
and fittings for underground applications and interior of ducts and fittings for fume-handling
applications) and with factory-applied, 0.05-mm (2-mil) PVC coating on reverse side of
ducts and fittings.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
C. Carbon-Steel Sheets: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, cold-rolled sheets; commercial quality;

with oiled, exposed matte finish.
D. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 316, sheet form with No. 4 finish for surfaces
of ducts exposed to view; and Type 304, sheet form with No. 1 finish for concealed ducts.
E. Aluminum Sheets: ASTM B 209M (ASTM B 209), Alloy 3003, Temper H14, sheet form
with standard, one-side bright finish for ducts exposed to view and with mill finish for
concealed ducts.
F. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized steel reinforcement where installed on

galvanized, sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts.
G. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 6-mm minimum diameter for 900-mm length or less; 10-mm
minimum diameter for lengths longer than 900 mm.
2.2 DUCT LINER
A. General: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.
B. Flexible Elastomeric-Closed Cell type Duct Liner: Preformed, cellular, closed –cell,sheet
materials complying with ASTM C534/C534M, Type TT, Grade 1; with NFPA 255; and
with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.
1. Thickness: 25 mm.
2. Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.037 at 24 °C – 0.25 (BTU-in/hr-ft2-°F) at 75 deg
°F mean temperature.
3. Density: 3-6 lb/ft3- 48-96 kg/m3
4. Water vapor permeability: 0.06 perm – in
5. Noise Reduction (NRC) : 0.5 at 1”
6. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame-spread index of 25 and maximum
smoke-developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with UL 723;
7. Liner Adhesive: As recommended by insulation manufacturer or self-adhesive type
and complying with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.
a. Adhesive shall have a VOC content of 80 g/L or less.
8. Duct Liner Installation shall be factory applied in controlled environment and comply
with
a. SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible
b. ASTM C1710 Standard Guide for Installation of Flexible Closed Cell
Preformed Insulation in Tube and Sheet Form,
c. Manufacturer’s recommendations and guidelines
d. Seal longitudinal seams and joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
Cement to avoid openings in lining that will allow passage of air to the
duct/plenum surface.
9. Duct Liner shall pass the test for:
a. Mold Growth as per UL181
b. Fungi Resistance as per ASTM G21/C1338
c. Bacterial Resistance as per ASTM G22
10. Liner hot surface performance shall shows no evidence of cracking, flaming,
glowing, smoldering, delamination, melting or insulation collapse when tested
according to ASTM C 411 at 220°F (105°C)

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
2.3 SEALANT MATERIALS
A. Joint and Seam Sealants, General: The term "sealant" is not limited to materials of adhesive
or mastic nature but includes tapes and combinations of open-weave fabric strips and
mastics.
B. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning characteristics for sealants and
gaskets shall be a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed
index of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL.
1. Joint and Seam Tape: 50 mm wide; glass-fiber fabric reinforced.

2. Tape Sealing System: Woven-fiber tape impregnated with a gypsum mineral
compound and a modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape
to form a hard, durable, airtight seal.
3. Joint and Seam Sealant: One-part, nonsag, solvent-release-curing, polymerized butyl
sealant, formulated with a minimum of 75 percent solids.
4. Flanged Joint Mastics: One-part, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric joint sealants,
complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O.
A. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel

fasteners appropriate for building materials.
1. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or

for slabs more than 100 mm thick.
2. Exception: Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate
concretes or for slabs less than 100 mm thick.
B. Hanger Materials: Galvanized, sheet steel or round, all-threaded steel rod.
1. Hangers Installed in Corrosive Atmospheres: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rod.

2. Straps and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards--Metal and Flexible" for sheet steel width and thickness and for steel rod
diameters.
C. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws;
compatible with duct materials.
D. Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M.
1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel shapes and plates.

2. Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel support materials.
3. Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum support materials, unless materials are
electrolytically separated from ductwork.
2.5 RECTANGULAR DUCT FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate ducts, elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, and other
construction with galvanized, sheet steel, according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible." Comply with requirements for metal
thickness, reinforcing types and intervals, tie-rod applications, and joint types and intervals.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
1. Lengths: Fabricate rectangular ducts in lengths appropriate to reinforcement and

rigidity class required for pressure classification.
2. Materials: Free from visual imperfections such as pitting, seam marks, roller marks,
stains, and discolorations.
B. Fabricate grease hood exhaust ducts with not less than 1.52-mm thick, carbon-steel sheet for
concealed ducts and not less than 1.21-mm thick stainless steel for exposed ducts.
Continuous weld seams and joints. Comply with NFPA 96.
C. Fabricate dishwasher hood exhaust ducts with 1.3-mm thick stainless steel. Continuous
weld seams and joints.
D. Fabricate locker room shower exhaust ducts with 1.3-mm thick aluminum. Continuous
weld seams and joints.
E. Indoor swimming pools, Spa, sauna, steam rooms and Acid-Resistant Ducts: PVC-coated
galvanized steel.
F. Static-Pressure Classifications: Unless otherwise indicated, construct ducts to the

following:
1. Supply Ducts, Constant Volume and Upstream of Terminal Units: 1500 Pa (6-inch
wg).
2. Supply Ducts, Downstream of Terminal Units: 500 Pa (2-inch wg).
3. Return Ducts: 500 Pa (2-inch wg), negative pressure.
4. Exhaust Ducts: 500 Pa (2-inch wg), negative pressure.
G. Cross Breaking or Cross Beading: Cross break or cross bead duct sides 480 mm and larger
and 0.9 mm thick or less, with more than 0.93 sq. m of unbraced panel area, unless ducts are
lined.
H. Smoke Extract Ducts: shall be constructed of galvanized steel or black steel sheet with 1.6
mm thickness, welded longitudinal joints, flanged sectional joints, reinforced with girders,
and sealed with fire rated sealants.
I. Smoke Extract Ducts and other ducts crossing fire rated walls without fire dampers shall be
fire proofed ducts. Contractor shall submit clear method statement for the constructing of
fire/ smoke rated ducts for approval, such as applying fire resistant coating, which reacts in
contact with fire by forming an insulating barrier to separates two contiguous areas, or by
other proven and approved methods. Smoke extract ducts should be two hours fire rated at
400 deg. C.
2.6 SHOP APPLICATION OF LINER IN RECTANGULAR DUCTS
A. Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with 90 percent coverage of
adhesive at liner contact surface area. Multiple layers of insulation to achieve indicated
thickness are prohibited.
B. Apply adhesive to liner facing in direction of airflow not receiving metal nosing.
C. Butt transverse joints without gaps and coat joint with adhesive.
D. Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure butted-edge
overlapping.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
E. Do not apply liners in rectangular ducts with longitudinal joints, except at corners of ducts,
unless duct size and standard liner product dimensions make longitudinal joints necessary.
F. Apply adhesive coating on longitudinal seams in ducts with air velocity of 12.7 m/s (2500
fpm).
G. Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 100 mm from corners and at intervals not exceeding
300 mm transversely around perimeter; at 75 mm from transverse joints and at intervals not
exceeding 450 mm longitudinally.
H. Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings that have
either channel or "Z" profile or are integrally formed from duct wall. Fabricate edge facings
at the following locations:
1. Fan discharge.
2. Intervals of lined duct preceding unlined duct.
3. Upstream edges of transverse joints in ducts.
I. Secure insulation liner with perforated sheet metal liner of same metal thickness as specified
for duct, secured to ducts with mechanical fasteners that maintain metal liner distance from
duct without compressing insulation.
1. Sheet Metal Liner Perforations: 2.4-mm diameter, with an overall open area of 23
percent.
J. Terminate liner with duct buildouts installed in ducts to attach dampers, turning vane
assemblies, and other devices. Fabricated buildouts (metal hat sections) or other buildout
means are optional; when used, secure buildouts to duct wall with bolts, screws, rivets, or
welds. Terminate liner at fire dampers at connection to fire-damper sleeve.
2.7 ROUND AND FLAT-OVAL DUCT FABRICATION
A. General: Diameter as applied to flat-oval ducts in this Article is the diameter of the size of
round duct that has a circumference equal to perimeter of a given size of flat-oval duct.
B. Round Ducts: Fabricate supply ducts of spiral seam, galvanized steel according to
SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."
C. Flat-Oval Ducts: Fabricate supply ducts with standard spiral lock seams or with butt-
welded longitudinal seams according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--
Metal and Flexible."
D. Double-Wall (Insulated) Ducts: Fabricate double-wall (insulated) ducts with spiral seam
outer shell and an inner liner. Dimensions indicated on internally insulated ducts are inside
dimensions.
1. Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.037 at 24 deg C (0.26 at 75 deg F) mean

temperature.
2. Outer Shell: Base outer-shell metal thickness on actual outer-shell dimensions.
Fabricate outer-shell lengths 50 mm longer than inner shell and insulation, and in
metal thickness specified for single-wall duct.
3. Insulation: 25-mm thick fibrous-glass insulation, unless otherwise indicated.
Terminate insulation where internally insulated duct connects to single-wall duct or

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
uninsulated components. Terminate insulation and reduce outer duct diameter to

inner liner diameter.
4. Solid Inner Liner: Fabricate round and flat-oval inner liners with solid sheet metal of
thickness listed below:
5. Perforated Inner Liner: Fabricate round and flat-oval inner liners with sheet metal
having 2.4-mm diameter perforations, with an overall open area of 23 percent. Use
the following sheet metal thicknesses and seam construction:
a. Ducts 75 to 200 mm in Diameter: 0.5 mm with standard spiral seam

construction.
b. Ducts 225 to 1070 mm in Diameter: 0.5 mm with single-rib spiral seam
construction.
c. Ducts 1120 to 1525 mm in Diameter: 0.55 mm with single-rib spiral seam
construction.
d. Ducts 1575 to 2235 mm in Diameter: 0.85 mm with standard spiral seam
construction.
6. Maintain concentricity of liner to outer shell by mechanical means. Retain insulation

from dislocation by mechanical means.
2.8 ROUND AND FLAT-OVAL SUPPLY AND EXHAUST FITTING FABRICATION
A. 90-Degree Tees and Laterals and Conical Tees: Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's
"HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible," with metal thicknesses specified
for longitudinal seam straight duct.
B. Diverging-Flow Fittings: Fabricate with a reduced entrance to branch taps with no excess
material projecting from body onto branch tap entrance.
C. Elbows: Fabricate in die-formed, gored, pleated, or mitered construction. Fabricate bend

radius of die-formed, gored, and pleated elbows one and one-half times elbow diameter.
Unless elbow construction type is indicated, fabricate elbows as follows:
1. Mitered-Elbow Radius and Number of Pieces: Welded construction complying with

SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible," unless
2. Round Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with the following metal thickness for
pressure classes from minus 500 to plus 500 Pa (minus 2- to plus 2-inch wg):
a. Ducts 75 to 660 mm in Diameter: 0.7 mm.

b. Ducts 685 to 915 mm in Diameter: 0.85 mm.
c. Ducts 940 to 1270 mm in Diameter: 1.0 mm.
d. Ducts 1320 to 1525 mm in Diameter: 1.3 mm.
e. Ducts 1575 to 2130 mm in Diameter: 1.6 mm.
3. Round Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with the following metal thickness for
pressure classes from 500 to 2490 Pa (2- to 10-inch wg):

d. Ducts 1320 to 1525 mm in Diameter: 1.3 mm.
e. Ducts 1575 to 2130 mm in Diameter: 1.6 mm.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
4. Flat-Oval Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with same metal thickness as

longitudinal seam flat-oval duct.
5. 90-Degree, Two-Piece, Mitered Elbows: Use only for supply systems, or exhaust
systems for material-handling classes A and B; and only where space restrictions do
not permit using 1.5 bend radius elbows. Fabricate with single-thickness turning
vanes.
6. Round Elbows, 200 mm and Smaller: Fabricate die-formed elbows for 45- and 90-
degree elbows and pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60, and 90 degrees only. Fabricate
nonstandard bend-angle configuration or nonstandard diameter elbows with gored
construction.
7. Round Elbows, 225 through 355 mm: Fabricate gored or pleated elbows for 30, 45,
60, and 90 degrees, unless space restrictions require a mitered elbow. Fabricate
nonstandard bend-angle configuration or nonstandard diameter elbows with gored
construction.
8. Round Elbows, Larger Than 355 mm, and All Flat-Oval Elbows: Fabricate gored
elbows, unless space restrictions require a mitered elbow.
9. Die-Formed Elbows for Sizes through 200 mm and All Pressures: 1.0 mm thick with
two-piece welded construction.
10. Round Gored-Elbow Metal Thickness: Same as non-elbow fittings specified above.
11. Flat-Oval Elbow Metal Thickness: Same as longitudinal seam flat-oval duct
specified above.
12. Pleated Elbows for Sizes through 355 mm and Pressures through 2490 Pa (10-Inch
wg): 0.55 mm.
D. Double-Wall (Insulated) Fittings: Fabricate double-wall (insulated) fittings with an outer

shell and an inner liner. Dimensions indicated on internally insulated ducts are inside
dimensions.
1. Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.037 at 24 deg C (0.26 at 75 deg F) mean

temperature.
2. Outer Shell: Base outer-shell metal thickness on actual outer-shell dimensions.
Fabricate outer-shell lengths 50 mm longer than inner shell and insulation. Use the
same metal thicknesses for outer duct as for uninsulated fittings.
3. Insulation: 25-mm thick fibrous-glass insulation, unless otherwise indicated.
Terminate insulation where internally insulated duct connects to single-wall duct or
uninsulated components. Terminate insulation and reduce outer duct diameter to
nominal single-wall size.
4. Solid Inner Liner: Fabricate round and flat-oval inner liners with solid sheet metal of
thickness listed below:
5. Perforated Inner Liner: Fabricate round and flat-oval inner liners with sheet metal
having 2.4-mm diameter perforations, with an overall open area of 23 percent. Use
the following sheet metal thicknesses:

6. Maintain concentricity of liner to outer shell by mechanical means. Retain insulation

from dislocation by mechanical means.
E. PVC-Coated Elbows and Fittings: Fabricate elbows and fittings as follows:
1. Round Elbows 100 to 200 mm in Diameter: Two piece, die stamped, with
longitudinal seams spot welded, bonded, and painted with a PVC aerosol spray.
2. Round Elbows 230 to 660 mm in Diameter: Standing seam construction.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
3. Round Elbows 710 to 1525 mm in Diameter: Standard gore construction, riveted and
bonded.
4. Other Fittings: Riveted and bonded joints.
5. Couplings: Slip-joint construction with a minimum 50-mm insertion length.
2.9 FIRE STOPPING
A. Fire Resistant Sealant: Provide one part elastomeric sealant formulated for use in a through
penetration fire stop system for filling openings around duct penetrations through walls and
floors, having fire resistance ratings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories.
B. Construct and install each duct system for the specific duct pressure classification indicated.
C. Install round and flat-oval ducts in lengths not less than 3.7 m, unless interrupted by fittings.
D. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.
E. Install fabricated fittings for changes in directions, changes in size and shape, and
connections.
F. Install couplings tight to duct wall surface with a minimum of projections into duct.
G. Install ducts, unless otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally, parallel and
perpendicular to building lines; avoid diagonal runs.
H. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and
permanent enclosure elements of building.
I. Install ducts with a clearance of 25 mm, plus allowance for insulation thickness.
J. Conceal ducts from view in finished spaces. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid
partitions, unless specifically indicated.
K. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling, fire- and smoke-control dampers, lighting
layouts, and similar finished work.
L. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Route ductwork to avoid passing through transformer vaults
and electrical equipment spaces and enclosures.
M. Where ducts are exposed to view in machine rooms and in spaces without suspended
ceiling, cover with aluminum jacketing to protect against accidental damage.
N. Non-Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and
exterior walls, and are exposed to view, conceal space between construction opening and
duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as duct. Overlap
opening on four sides by at least 38 mm.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
O. Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior
walls, install appropriately rated fire damper, sleeve, and firestopping sealant, unless these
are fire rated ducts such as for smoke exhaust application. Fire and smoke dampers are
specified in Section "Air Duct Accessories." Firestopping materials and installation
methods are specified in Section "Penetration Firestopping."
3.2 PVC-COATED DUCT INSTALLATION
A. Install PVC-coated duct and fittings according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Seal all joints and seams. Apply sealer to male end connectors before insertion, and
afterward to cover entire joint and sheet metal screws.
C. Secure couplings with sheet metal screws. Install screws at an interval of 300 mm, with a
minimum of three screws in each coupling.
D. Repair damage to PVC coating with manufacturer's recommended materials.
3.3 UNDERSLAB DUCT INSTALLATIONS
A. Verify undamaged conditions of duct before enclosure with fill or encasement.
B. Install underslab ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--

Metal and Flexible" and as indicated.
C. Protect ducts from damage by equipment used in placing concrete on or around ducts.
D. Protect duct openings.
3.4 GREASE HOOD EXHAUST DUCT INSTALLATIONS
A. Install ducts to allow for thermal expansion of ductwork through 1100 deg C (2000 deg F)
temperature range.
B. Install ducts without dips or traps that may collect residues, unless traps have continuous or
automatic residue removal.
C. Slope duct upward in direction of flow and away from grease hood.
D. Install access openings at each change in direction and at 15-m intervals; locate on sides of
duct a minimum of 38 mm from bottom; and fit with grease-tight covers of same material as
duct.
E. Do not penetrate fire-rated assemblies.
F. In accessible shafts and in vertical direction, install access panels at every other floor and at
top of riser.
3.5 DISHWASHER EXHAUST DUCT INSTALLATIONS
A. Install dishwasher exhaust ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction

Standards--Metal and Flexible."

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
B. Slope duct upward in direction of flow and away from dishwasher.
3.6 LOCKER ROOM SHOWER EXHAUST DUCT INSTALLATIONS
A. Install locker room shower exhaust ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."
B. Slope duct upward in direction of flow and away from shower.
3.7 SEAM AND JOINT SEALING
A. General: Seal duct seams and joints according to the duct pressure class indicated and as
described in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."
B. Pressure Classification Less Than 500 Pa (2-Inch wg): Transverse joints.
C. Seal externally insulated ducts before insulation installation.
3.8 HANGING AND SUPPORTING
A. Install rigid round, rectangular, and flat-oval metal duct with support systems indicated in
SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."
B. Support horizontal ducts within 600 mm of each elbow and within 1200 mm of each branch
intersection.
C. Support vertical ducts at a maximum interval of 5 m and at each floor.
D. Install upper attachments to structures with an allowable load not exceeding one-fourth of
failure (proof-test) load.
E. Install concrete inserts before placing concrete.
F. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured.
Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes or for
slabs less than 100 mm thick.
3.9 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect equipment with flexible connectors according to Section "Air Duct Accessories."
B. For branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections, comply with SMACNA's
"HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."
A. Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems as required to accommodate leakage

testing and as required for compliance with test requirements.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
B. Conduct tests, in presence of Engineer, at static pressures equal to maximum design

pressure of system or section being tested. If pressure classifications are not indicated, test
entire system at maximum system design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above
maximum design operating pressure. Give seven days' advance notice for testing.
C. Maximum Allowable Leakage: Comply with requirements for Leakage Classification 3 for
round and flat-oval ducts, and Leakage Classification 6 for pressure classifications from 500
to 2490 Pa (2- to 10-inch wg).
D. Remake leaking joints and retest until leakage is less than maximum allowable.
E. Leakage Test: Perform tests according to SMACNA's "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test
Manual."
F. Perform leakage test on supply ducts constructed to pressure higher than 500 Pa (2-inch
wg).
3.11 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust volume-control dampers in ducts, outlets, and inlets to achieve design airflow.
B. Refer to Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for detailed procedures.
3.12 CLEANING
A. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect the
system. Vacuum ducts before final acceptance to remove dust and debris.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
SECTION 233130 - AIR DUCT CLEANING
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes cleaning HVAC air-distribution equipment, ducts, plenums, and system
components.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. ASCS: Air system cleaning specialist.
B. NADCA: National Air Duct Cleaners Association.
C. SMACNA: Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For ASCS.
B. Strategies and procedures plan.
C. Field quality-control test reports.
A. ASCS Qualifications: A member of a nationally recognized nonprofit industry organization

dedicated to the cleaning of HVAC systems.
1. Certification: Employ a staff of ASCSs certified by a nationally recognized

certification program.
2. Supervisor Qualifications: Certified by a nationally recognized program and
organization.
3. Experience: Submit records of experience in the field of HVAC systems cleaning.
4. Equipment, Materials, and Labor: Have equipment, materials, and labor required to
perform specified services.
B. Comply with current publisshed standards of NADCA.
AIR DUCT CLEANING 233130 - Page 1 of 5

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine systems to determine appropriate methods, tools, and equipment required for
performance of work.
B. Perform "Project Evaluation and Recommendation" according to NADCA ACR.
C. Prepare written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of work.
D. Proceed with work only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare a written plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures. At a minimum,
include the following:
1. Supervisor contact information.

2. Work schedule including location, times, and impact on occupied areas.
3. Methods and materials planned for each HVAC component type.
4. Required support from other trades.
5. Equipment and material storage requirements.
6. Exhaust equipment setup locations.
B. Use the existing service openings, as required for proper cleaning, at various points of the
HVAC system for physical and mechanical entry and for inspection.
C. Comply with NADCA ACR, "Guidelines for Constructing Service Openings in HVAC
Systems" Section.
3.3 CLEANING
A. Remove visible surface contaminants and deposits from within the HVAC system.
B. Engage a qualified ASCS to clean the following systems:
1. Air devices for supply and return air.

2. Air-terminal units.
3. Ductwork:
a. Supply-air ducts, including turning vanes and reheat coils, to the air-handling
unit.
b. Return-air ducts to the air-handling unit.
c. Exhaust-air ducts.
4. Air-Handling Units:
a. Interior surfaces of the unit casing.

b. Coil surfaces compartment.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
c. Condensate drain pans.

d. Fans, fan blades, and fan housings.
5. Filters and filter housings.
C. Perform cleaning before air balancing or mark position of dampers and air-directional
mechanical devices before cleaning.
D. Use duct-mounted access doors, as required, for physical and mechanical entry and for
inspection.
1. Install additional duct-mounting access doors to comply with duct cleaning

standards. Comply with requirements in Section "Air Duct Accessories" for
additional duct-mounting access doors.
2. Disconnect and reconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection.
Replace damaged and deteriorated flexible ducts. Comply with requirements in
Section "Air Duct Accessories" for flexible ducts.
3. Disconnect and reconnect flexible connectors as needed for cleaning and inspection.
Replace damaged and deteriorated flexible connectors. Comply with requirements in
Section "Air Duct Accessories" for flexible connectors.
4. Reseal rigid-fiberglass-duct systems according to NAIMA recommended practices.
5. Replace damaged fusible links on fire and smoke dampers. Replacement fusible links
shall be same rating as those being replaced. Comply with requirements in Section
"Air Duct Accessories" for fusible links.
6. Remove and reinstall ceiling components to gain access for duct cleaning. Clean
ceiling components after they have been removed and replaced.
E. Mark position of dampers and air-directional mechanical devices before cleaning, and
restore to their marked position on completion.
F. Collect debris removed during cleaning. Ensure that debris is not dispersed outside the
HVAC system during the cleaning process.
G. Particulate Collection and Odor Control:
1. Where venting vacuuming system inside building, use HEPA filtration with 99.97
percent collection efficiency for 0.3-micron (0.0076-mm) size (or greater) particles.
2. When venting vacuuming system outside building, use filtration to contain debris
removed from the HVAC system and locate exhaust down wind and away from air
intakes and other points of entry into building.
H. Clean the following metal-duct system components by removing visible surface

contaminants and deposits:
1. Air outlets and inlets (registers, grilles, and diffusers).

2. Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums (except ceiling
supply and return plenums), scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers, and
drive assemblies.
3. Air-handling-unit internal surfaces and components including mixing box, coil
section, air wash systems, spray eliminators, condensate drain pans, humidifiers and
dehumidifiers, filters and filter sections, and condensate collectors and drains.
4. Coils and related components.
5. Return-air ducts, dampers, and actuators, except in ceiling plenums and mechanical
room.
6. Supply-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
7. Dedicated exhaust and ventilation components.
I. Mechanical Cleaning Methodology:
1. Clean metal-duct systems using mechanical cleaning methods that extract

contaminants from within duct systems and remove contaminants from building.
2. Use vacuum-collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning.
Connect vacuum device to downstream end of ducts so areas being cleaned are under
negative pressure.
3. Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debris adhered to interior duct surfaces without
damaging integrity of metal ducts or duct liner.
4. Clean fibrous-glass duct liner with HEPA vacuuming equipment, and do not permit
duct liner to get wet. Replace fibrous-glass duct liner that is damaged, deteriorated,
or delaminated or that has friable material, mold, or fungus growth.
5. Clean coils and coil drain pans according to NADCA ACR. Keep drain pan
operational. Rinse coils with clean water to remove latent residues and cleaning
materials; comb and straighten fins.
6. Provide operative drainage system for washdown procedures.
7. Biocidal Agents and Coatings: Apply biocidal agents if fungus is present; use
according to manufacturer's written instructions after removal of surface deposits and
debris.
J. Cleanliness Verification:
1. Verify cleanliness after mechanical cleaning and before application of treatment,

including biocidal agents and protective coatings.
2. Visually inspect metal-duct systems for contaminants.
3. Where contaminants are discovered, reclean and reinspect duct systems.
3.4 RESTORATION
A. Restore and repair HVAC air-distribution equipment, ducts, plenums, and components
according to NADCA ACR, "Restoration and Repair of Mechanical Systems" Section.
B. Restore service openings capable of future reopening. Comply with requirements in

Section 233113 "Metal Ducts." Include location of service openings in Project closeout
report.
C. Replace fibrous-glass materials that cannot be restored by cleaning or resurfacing. Comply

with requirements in Section 233113 "Metal Ducts" and Section 233116 "Nonmetal Ducts."
D. Replace damaged insulation according to Section 230713 "Duct Insulation."
E. Ensure that closures do not hinder or alter airflow.
F. New closure materials, including insulation, shall match opened materials and shall have
removable closure panels fitted with gaskets and fasteners.
G. Reseal fibrous-glass ducts. Comply with requirements in Section 233116 "Nonmetal Ducts."

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
A. Gravimetric Analysis: Sections of metal-duct system, chosen randomly by Engineer, may

be tested for cleanliness according to NADCA ACR vacuum test gravimetric analysis.
1. If analysis determines that levels of debris are equal to or lower than suitable levels,
system shall have passed cleanliness verification.
2. If analysis determines that levels of debris exceed suitable levels, system cleanliness
verification will have failed and metal-duct system shall be recleaned and reverified.
B. Verification of Coil Cleaning: Cleaning shall restore coil pressure drop to within 10 percent
of pressure drop measured when coil was first installed. If original pressure drop is not
known, coil will be considered clean only if it is free of foreign matter and chemical residue,
based on thorough visual inspection.
C. Report results of tests in writing.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
SECTION 233300 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Backdraft and pressure relief dampers.

2. Barometric relief dampers.
3. Manual-volume dampers.
4. Motorized volume dampers.
5. High temperature volume dampers
6. Fire dampers.
7. Ceiling radiation dampers.
8. Smoke dampers.
9. Combination fire and smoke dampers.
10. Duct silencers.
11. Turning vanes.
12. Duct-mounted access doors and panels.
13. Flexible ducts.
14. Flexible connectors.
15. Duct accessory hardware.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data For each type of product.
1. For duct silencers, include pressure drop and dynamic insertion loss data. Include
breakout noise calculations for high transmission loss casings.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loadings,
required clearances, method of field assembly, components, location, and size of each field
connection. Detail the following:
1. Special fittings and manual- and automatic-volume-damper installations.

2. Fire- and smoke-damper installations, including sleeves and duct-mounted access
doors and panels.
3. Duct security bars.
4. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Product Certificates: Submit certified test data on dynamic insertion loss; self-noise power
levels; and airflow performance data, static-pressure loss, dimensions, and weights.
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - Page 1 of 12

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air duct accessories to include in operation and
maintenance manuals.
A. NFPA Compliance: Comply with the following NFPA standards:
1. NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."

2. NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."
B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for
acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise
indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains,
discolorations, and other imperfections.
C. Comply with AMCA 500-D "Laboratory Methods of Testing Dampers for Rating" for
dampers rating.
1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS
protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents.
1. Fusible Links: Furnish quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SHEET METAL MATERIALS
A. Galvanized, Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; ASTM A 653/A 653M, Z275 (G90) coating
designation; mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces of ducts exposed to view.
B. Carbon-Steel Sheets: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, cold-rolled sheets, commercial quality,

C. Aluminum Sheets: ASTM B 209M (ASTM B 209), Alloy 3003, Temper H14, sheet form;
with standard, one-side bright finish for ducts exposed to view and mill finish for concealed
ducts.
D. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221M (ASTM B 221), Alloy 6063, Temper T6.
E. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized steel reinforcement where installed on

galvanized, sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts.
F. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 6-mm minimum diameter for 900-mm length or less; 10-mm
minimum diameter for lengths longer than 900 mm.
2.2 BACKDRAFT AND PRESSURE RELIEF DAMPERS
A. Description: Gravity balanced, suitable for horizontal or vertical installations. Dampers

shall not produce noise while in operation.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
B. Frame: 1.3-mm thick, galvanized, sheet steel, with welded corners and mounting flange.
C. Frame: 1.6-mm thick extruded aluminum, with mounting flange.
D. Blades: Multiple single-piece blades, 1.2-mm thick aluminum sheet, maximum 150-mm
width, with sealed edges.
E. Blade Action: Parallel.
F. Blade Seals: Neoprene.
G. Blade Axles: Nonferrous for aluminum types.
H. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel for galvanized types.
I. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.
J. Return Spring: Adjustable tension.
K. Bearings: Galvanized steel ball.
L. Accessories:
1. Adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure.

2. Counterweights and spring-assist kits for vertical airflow installations.
3. Electric actuators.
4. Chain pulls.
5. Screen Mounting: Rear mounted.

6. Screen Material: Galvanized steel or Aluminum to suite duct material as per section
3.1.
7. Screen Type: Bird.
8. 90-degree stops.
2.3 BAROMETRIC RELIEF DAMPERS
A. Suitable for horizontal or vertical mounting.
B. Frame: Hat-shaped, 0.05-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.063-inch- (1.6-
mm-) thick extruded aluminum to suite duct material as per section 3.1, with welded corners
or mechanically attached and mounting flange.
C. Blades:
1. Multiple, 0.050-inch- (1.2-mm-) thick aluminum sheet.

2. Maximum Width: 6 inches (150 mm).
3. Action: Parallel.
4. Balance: Gravity.
5. Off-center pivoted.
D. Blade Seals: Neoprene.
E. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel or Nonferrous metal to suite duct material as per section 3.1.
F. Tie Bars and Brackets:

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
1. Material: Galvanized steel or Aluminum to suite duct material as per section 3.1.
2. Rattle free with 90-degree stop.
G. Return Spring: Adjustable tension.
H. Bearings: Bronze.
I. Accessories:
1. Flange on intake.
2. Adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressures.
2.4 MANUAL-VOLUME DAMPERS
A. General: Factory fabricated with required hardware and accessories. Stiffen damper blades
for stability. Include locking device to hold single-blade dampers in a fixed position
without vibration. Close duct penetrations for damper components to seal duct consistent
with pressure class.
1. Pressure Classifications of 500 Pa (2-Inch wg) or Higher: End bearings or other seals
for ducts with axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of
operating shaft.
B. Low-Leakage Volume Dampers: Multiple- or single-blade, parallel- or opposed-blade

design as indicated, low-leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream, and suitable for
horizontal or vertical applications.
1. Steel Frames: Hat-shaped, galvanized, sheet steel channels, minimum of 1.6 mm

thick, with mitered and welded corners; frames with flanges where indicated for
attaching to walls; and flangeless frames where indicated for installing in ducts.
2. Aluminum Frames: Hat-shaped, 1.6-mm thick, extruded-aluminum channels; frames
with flanges where indicated for attaching to walls; and flangeless frames where
indicated for installing in ducts.
3. Roll-Formed Steel Blades: 1.6-mm thick, galvanized, sheet steel to suite duct
material as per section 3.1.
4. Roll-Formed Aluminum Blades: 2.5-mm thick aluminum sheet to suite duct material
as per section 3.1.
5. Extruded-Aluminum Blades: 1.2-mm thick extruded aluminum.
6. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel to suite duct material as per section 3.1.
7. Blade Axles: Nonferrous to suite duct material as per section 3.1.
8. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel to suite duct material as per section 3.1.
9. Tie Bars and Brackets: Aluminum to suite duct material as per section 3.1.
C. Jackshaft: 25-mm diameter, galvanized steel pipe rotating within a pipe-bearing assembly
mounted on supports at each mullion and at each end of multiple-damper assemblies.
1. Length and Number of Mountings: Appropriate to connect linkage of each damper of

a multiple-damper assembly.
D. Damper Hardware: Zinc-plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 2.4-mm thick
zinc-plated steel, and a 19-mm hexagon locking nut. Include center hole to suit damper
operating-rod size. Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
2.5 MOTORIZED VOLUME DAMPERS
A. Dampers: AMCA-rated, parallel or opposed-blade design; 2.8 -mm minimum, galvanized-

steel frames with holes for duct mounting; damper blades shall not be less than 1.6 -mm
galvanized steel with maximum blade width of 200 mm, and with edge seals.
1. Dampers to be dynamic type upstream of VAV boxes and medium pressure

ductworks, and static type downstream of VAV boxes and low pressure ductwork.
2. Blades shall be secured to 13 -mm diameter, zinc-plated axles using zinc-plated
hardware, with nylon blade bearings, blade-linkage hardware of zinc-plated steel and
brass, ends sealed against spring-stainless-steel blade bearings, and thrust bearings at
each end of every blade.
3. Operating Temperature Range: From minus 40 to plus 93 deg. C (minus 40 to plus
200 deg F).
4. For standard applications, include optional closed-cell neoprene edging.
5. For low-leakage applications, use parallel- or opposed-blade design with inflatable
seal blade edging, or replaceable rubber seals, rated for leakage at less than 51 L/s per
sq. m (10 cfm per sq. ft.) of damper area, at differential pressure of 995 Pa (4 inches
wg) when damper is being held by torque of 5.6 N x m; when tested according to
AMCA 500D
6. Frame: Curtain type with blades in air stream only for non-ducted fire dampers.
7. Frame: Curtain type with blades outside air stream for all ducted fire dampers.
8. Mounting Sleeves: Factory installed sleeves shall only be allowed. Field installed
sleeves shall not be permitted.
2.6 HIGH TEMPERATURE VOLUME DAMPERS
A. General: high temperature low-leakage volume control damper used for balancing in smoke
management systems. Opposed blade design with blades’ drive positioned out of the
airstream. Temperature rating shall not be less than 400 ⁰C continuous operation.
B. Material: frame & blade from 1.2mm thick galvanized steel, 40mm flanged rectangular
casing.
C. 75mm interlocking 430 grade stainless steel aerodynamic blades, steel blade end bearings
and 300 grade stainless steel peripheral gasketting
D. Corrosion Tested to BS EN 60068-2-52, severity 2 conditions.
E. Vibration Tested to BS EN 60068- 2-6 (5Hz to 350Hz @ 2g).
F. Damper shall be rated for a pressure of 1500 Pa and duct velocities of 15m/s.
2.7 FIRE DAMPERS
A. General: Labeled to UL 555.
B. Fire Rating: One and one-half and three hours.
C. Frame: SMACNA Type A with blades in airstream; fabricated with roll-formed, 0.85-mm
thick galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking corners.
D. Frame: SMACNA Type B with blades out of airstream; fabricated with roll-formed, 0.85-
mm thick galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking corners.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
E. Mounting Sleeve: Factory- or field-installed galvanized, sheet steel.
1. Minimum Thickness: 1.3 mm or 3.5 mm thick as indicated, and length to suit

application.
2. Exceptions: Omit sleeve where damper frame width permits direct attachment of
perimeter mounting angles on each side of wall or floor, and thickness of damper
frame complies with sleeve requirements.
F. Mounting Orientation: Vertical or horizontal as indicated.
G. Blades: Roll-formed, interlocking, 0.85-mm thick, galvanized, sheet steel. In place of

interlocking blades, use full-length, 0.85-mm thick, galvanized steel blade connectors.
H. Vertical and Horizontal Dampers: Include a blade lock and stainless-steel negator closure
spring.
I. Closure springs: 301 stainless steel constant force or spring clip type
J. Fusible Link: Replaceable, 74 or 100 deg C (165 or 212 deg F) rated.
2.8 Fire Rating: 1 or 2 or 3 as per NFPA – 90A.CEILING RADIATION DAMPERS
A. General: Labeled to UL 555C; comply with construction details for tested floor- and roof-
ceiling assemblies as indicated in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory."
B. Frame: 1.0-mm thick, galvanized, sheet steel; round or rectangular; style to suit ceiling
construction.
C. Blades: 0.85-mm thick, galvanized, sheet steel with nonasbestos refractory insulation.
D. Fusible Link: Replaceable, 74 deg C (165 deg F) rated.
E. Fire Rating: 2 hours.
2.9 SMOKE DAMPERS
A. General: Labeled to UL 555S. Smoke dampers shall be labeled for one-and-one-half-hour

or three hours rating to UL 555 as per design requirements.
B. Smoke Detector: Integral, factory wired for single-point connection.
C. Frame and Blades: 1.6-mm thick, galvanized, sheet steel.
D. Mounting Sleeve: Factory-installed, 1.3-mm thick, galvanized, sheet steel; length to suit
wall or floor application.
E. Rated pressure and velocity to exceed design airflow conditions.
F. Damper Motors: Provide for modulating or two-position action.
1. Motor Sizes: large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service
factor range above 1.0.
2. Permanent-Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Motors: With oil-immersed and sealed
gear trains.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
3. Spring-Return Motors: Equip with an integral spiral-spring mechanism where

indicated. Enclose entire spring mechanism in a removable housing designed for
service or adjustments. Size for running torque rating of 17 N x m and breakaway
torque rating of 17 N x m.
4. Outdoor Motors and Motors in Outside-Air Intakes: Equip with O-ring gaskets
designed to make motors weatherproof. .
5. Nonspring-Return Motors: For dampers larger than 2.3 sq. m, size motor for running
torque rating of 17 N x m and breakaway torque rating of 34 N x m.
6. Two-Position Motor: 230 V, single phase, 50 Hz.
7. Two-Position Motor: 380 V, 3 phase, 50 Hz.
8. Modulating, Spring-Return Motor: 230 V, single phase, 50 Hz.
9. Modulating, Spring-Return Motor: 380 V, 3 phase, 50 Hz.
G. Accessories:
1. Auxiliary switches for signaling or position indication.

2. Test and reset switches, damper or remote mounted as practical.
2.10 COMBINATION FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS
A. Type: Dynamic; rated and labeled according to UL 555 and UL 555S.
B. Fire Rating: 1-1/2 and 3 hours.
C. Frame: Hat-shaped, 0.094-inch- (2.4-mm-) thick, galvanized sheet steel, with welded
corners and mounting flange.
D. Heat-Responsive Device: Replaceable, 165 deg F (74 deg C) rated, fusible links.
E. Smoke Detector: Integral, factory wired for single-point connection.
F. Blades: Roll-formed, horizontal, interlocking 1.6-mm-thick, galvanized sheet steel.
G. Leakage: Class I.
H. Rated pressure and velocity to exceed design airflow conditions.
I. Mounting Sleeve: Factory-installed, 1.3-mm- thick, galvanized sheet steel; length to suit
wall or floor application.
J. Master control panel for use in dynamic smoke-management systems.
K. Damper Motors: Modulating or two-position action.
L. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and
efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 230513 "Common Motor
Requirements for HVAC Equipment."
1. Motor Sizes: large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service
2. Permanent-Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Motors: With oil-immersed and sealed
gear trains.
3. Spring-Return Motors: Equip with an integral spiral-spring mechanism where
indicated. Enclose entire spring mechanism in a removable housing designed for

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
service or adjustments. Size for running torque rating of 150 in. x lbf (17 N x m) and
breakaway torque rating of 150 in. x lbf (17 N x m).
4. Outdoor Motors and Motors in Outdoor-Air Intakes: Equip with O-ring gaskets
designed to make motors weatherproof.
5. Nonspring-Return Motors: For dampers larger than 25 sq. ft. (2.3 sq. m), size motor
for running torque rating of 150 in. x lbf (17 N x m) and breakaway torque rating of
300 in. x lbf (34 N x m).
6. Electrical Connection: 230 V, single phase, 50 Hz.
M. Accessories:
1. Auxiliary switches for signaling or position indication.

2. Test and reset switches, damper or remote mounted as practicle.
N. Front access combination fire smoke dampers with integral accessories cabinet shall be used
for supply or return ducts with grille outlet and providing through-the-grille access to the
damper and heat-actuated components.
2.11 DUCT SILENCERS
A. General: Factory-fabricated and -tested, round or rectangular silencer with performance

characteristics and physical requirements as indicated.
B. Fire Performance: Adhesives, sealers, packing materials, and accessory materials shall have
fire ratings not exceeding 25 for flame spread and 50 for smoke developed when tested
according to ASTM E 84. For silencers used in Smoke extract ductwork systems carrying
smoke & hot gases should be up to 400C for durations up to 2h.
C. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements
in ASHRAE 62.1
D. Rectangular Units: Fabricate casings with a minimum of 0.85-mm thick, solid galvanized
sheet steel for outer casing and 0.55-mm thick, perforated galvanized sheet steel for inner
casing.
E. Round Units: Casings with galvanized sheet steel thicknesses for diameters listed below:
1. Up to 600 mm: 0.85 mm.

2. 650 through 1000 mm: 1.0 mm.
3. 1050 through 1300 mm: 1.3 mm.
4. 1350 through 1500 mm: 1.6 mm.
5. Casings fabricated of spiral lock-seam duct may be one size thinner than that
indicated.
6. Interior Partitions and Baffles: At least 0.85 mm and designed for minimum
aerodynamic losses.
F. Sheet Metal Perforations: 3-mm diameter for inner casing and baffle sheet metal.
G. Fibrous Acoustic-Fill Material: Inert and vermin-proof fibrous material, packed under not
less than 5 percent compression.
H. Fabricate silencers to form rigid units that will not pulsate, vibrate, rattle, or otherwise react
to system pressure variations.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
1. Do not use nuts, bolts, and sheet metal screws for unit assemblies.
2. Lock form and seal or continuously weld joints.
3. Suspended Units: Factory-installed suspension hooks or lugs attached to frame in
quantities and spaced to prevent deflection or distortion.
4. Reinforcement: Cross or trapeze angles for rigid suspension.
I. Source Quality Control: Perform the following factory tests:
1. Acoustic Performance: Test according to ASTM E 477, with airflow in both

directions through silencer.
2. Record acoustic ratings, including dynamic insertion loss and self-noise power levels,
for both forward flow (air and noise in same direction) and reverse flow (air and noise
in opposite directions) with an airflow of at least 10-m/s (2000-fpm) face velocity.
3. Leak Test: Test units for airtightness at 200 percent of associated fan static pressure
or 1500-Pa (6-inch wg) static pressure, whichever is greater.
2.12 TURNING VANES
A. Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and

Flexible."
B. Manufactured Turning Vanes: Fabricate of 38-mm wide, curved blades set 19 mm o.c.;
support with bars perpendicular to blades set 50 mm o.c.; and set into side strips suitable for
mounting in ducts.
C. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate of airfoil-shaped aluminum extrusions with perforated

faces and fibrous-glass fill.
2.13 DUCT-MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS
A. Door shall be rigid and airtight with neoprene gaskets and two or more chrome-plated
enamel painted steel hinges and quick fastening locking devices. Provide doors as large as
practical. Include vision panel where indicated. Include 25-by-25 mm butt or piano hinge
and cam latches. Access doors up to 300 X 300 mm shall have two cam locks, larger sizes
shall have four cam locks.
B. Mount doors, if possible, so that air pressure holds them closed. As an alternative,
removable access doors may be used.
C. Access doors shall be constructed from stamped sheet metal and consist of an inner and
outer door panel. Where insulated doors are needed, the inner door shall consist of two
panels spot-welded together which totally encapsulate insulation identical to corresponded
ductwork insulation. The inner and outer doors shall be joined by bolts and threaded
handles in such a configuration that the panels can be drawn together to secure the door to
the duct in a sandwich fashion.
D. The handles shall be high impact plastic with threaded metal inserts. Conical springs shall
be used between the door panels to facilitate installation and removal of the door. Fireproof
neoprene gasket shall be used around the outside edge of the inner or outer panel, but not
both, to seal the door.
E. This type of door is approved for use on rectangular, round and flat-oval ductwork.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
F. Insulation: 25-mm thick, fibrous-glass or polystyrene-foam board.
2.14 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A. General: Flame-retarded or noncombustible fabrics, coatings, and adhesives complying

with UL 181, Class 1.
B. Standard Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a strip of fabric 89 mm wide

attached to two strips of 70-mm wide, 0.7-mm thick, galvanized, sheet steel or 0.8-mm
aluminum sheets. Select metal compatible with connected ducts.
C. Extra-Wide Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a strip of fabric 146 mm

wide attached to two strips of 70-mm wide, 0.7-mm thick, galvanized, sheet steel or 0.8-mm
D. Transverse Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a strip of fabric 89 mm wide

attached to two strips of 111-mm wide, 0.7-mm thick, galvanized, sheet steel or 0.8-mm
E. Conventional, Indoor System Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with
polychloroprene.
1. Minimum Weight: 880 g/sq. m.

2. Tensile Strength: 84 N/mm in the warp, and 63 N/mm in the filling.
F. Conventional, Outdoor System Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with
a synthetic-rubber, weatherproof coating resistant to the sun's ultraviolet rays and ozone
environment.
1. Minimum Weight: 880 g/sq. m.

2. Tensile Strength: 93 N/mm in the warp, and 77 N/mm in the filling.
G. High-Temperature System Flexible Connectors: Glass fabric coated with silicone rubber
and having a minimum weight of 542 g/sq. m and tensile strength of 50 N/mm in the warp,
and 32 N/mm in the filling.
2.15 FLEXIBLE DUCTS
A. General: Comply with UL 181, Class 1.
B. Flexible Ducts, Uninsulated: Spiral-wound steel spring with flameproof vinyl sheathing.
C. Flexible Ducts, Uninsulated: Corrugated aluminum.
D. Flexible Ducts, Insulated: Factory-fabricated, insulated, round duct, with an outer jacket
enclosing 38-mm thick, glass-fiber insulation around a continuous inner liner.
1. Reinforcement: Steel-wire helix encapsulated in inner liner.

2. Outer Jacket: Glass-reinforced, silver Mylar with a continuous hanging tab, integral
fibrous-glass tape, and nylon hanging cord.
3. Inner Liner: Polyethylene film.
E. Pressure Rating: 1500 Pa (6-inch wg) positive, 125 Pa (1/2-inch wg) negative.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
F. Maximum Air Velocity: 20 m/s (4000 fpm).
2.16 ACCESSORY HARDWARE
A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw
cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments, and
length to suit duct insulation thickness.
B. Splitter Damper Accessories: Zinc-plated damper blade bracket; 6-mm, zinc-plated

operating rod; and a duct-mounted, ball-joint bracket with flat rubber gasket and square-
head set screw.
C. Flexible Duct Clamps: Stainless-steel band with cadmium-plated hex screw to tighten band
with a worm-gear action, in sizes 75 to 450 mm to suit duct size.
D. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to
gasoline and grease.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details shown in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and NAIMA's "Fibrous Glass
Duct Construction Standards" for fibrous-glass ducts.
B. Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel

accessories in galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories in
stainless-steel ducts, and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts.
C. Install backdraft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts nearest to outside and where
indicated.
D. Install volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches
extend from larger ducts. Where dampers are installed in ducts having duct liner, install
dampers with hat channels of same depth as liner, and terminate liner with nosing at hat
channel.
E. Install volume dampers in lined duct; avoid damage to and erosion of duct liner.
F. Provide test holes at fan inlet and outlet and elsewhere as indicated.
G. Install fire and smoke dampers according to manufacturer's UL-approved written

instructions.
1. Install fusible links in fire dampers.
H. Install duct silencers rigidly to ducts.
I. Install duct access panels for access to both sides of duct coils. Install duct access panels
downstream from volume dampers, fire dampers, turning vanes, and equipment.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
1. Install duct access panels to allow access to interior of ducts for cleaning, inspecting,
adjusting, and maintaining accessories and terminal units.
2. Install access panels on side of duct where adequate clearance is available.
3. Install access panels adjacent to and close enough to fire or smoke dampers, to reset
or reinstall fusible links. Access doors for access to fire or smoke dampers having
fusible links shall be pressure relief access doors and shall be outward operation for
access doors installed upstream from dampers and inward operation for access doors
installed downstream from dampers.
J. Install access doors with swing against duct static pressure.
K. Access Door Sizes:
1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches (200 by 125 mm).

2. Two-Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches (300 by 150 mm).
3. Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches (460 by 250 mm).
4. Head and Shoulders Access: 21 by 14 inches (530 by 355 mm).
5. Body Access: 25 by 14 inches (635 by 355 mm).
6. Body plus Ladder Access: 25 by 17 inches (635 by 430 mm).
L. Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment.
M. Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to low pressure ducts directly or with maximum
1500-mm (60-inch) lengths of flexible duct clamped or strapped in place.
N. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with adhesive plus sheet metal screws.
O. Label access doors according to Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
P. Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes.
A. Tests and Inspections:
1. Operate dampers to verify full range of movement.

2. Inspect locations of access doors and verify that purpose of access door can be
performed.
3. Operate fire, smoke, and combination fire and smoke dampers to verify full range of
movement and verify that proper heat-response device is installed.
4. Inspect turning vanes for proper and secure installation.
5. Operate remote damper operators to verify full range of movement of operator and
damper.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
SECTION 233413 - AXIAL HVAC FANS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Tubeaxial fans.
2. Vaneaxial fans.
3. Car park jet fans.
A. Project Altitude: Base air ratings on actual site elevations.
B. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.
C. Fan Unit Schedule: Performance requirements and data are described in equipment
schedule(s) on the Drawings.
D. All fan bearings, where applicable, shall be of heavy duty type suitable for continuous
operation.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data including rated capacities of each unit, weights (shipping, installed, and
operating), furnished specialties, accessories, and the following:
1. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated.

2. Certified fan sound power ratings.
3. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics plus motor and electrical accessories.
4. Material gages and finishes, including color charts.
5. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.
B. Shop Drawings from manufacturer detailing equipment assemblies and indicating

dimensions, weights, loadings, required clearances, method of field assembly, components,
and location and size of each field connection.
C. Coordination Drawings, including floor plans and sections drawn accurately to scale.
Submit with Shop Drawings. Show fan room layout and relationships between components
and adjacent structural and mechanical elements. Show support locations, type of support,
and weight on each support. Indicate and certify field measurements.
AXIAL HVAC FANS 233413 - Page 1 of 10

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A4-ME-01 REV 1
D. Wiring diagrams detailing wiring for power and control systems and differentiating clearly
between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
E. Field Test and Commissioning Reports: As specified in "Field Quality Control" and
"Commissioning" Articles in Part 3 of this Section. Indicate and interpret test results for
compliance with performance requirements.
F. Maintenance data for fan units to include in the operation and maintenance manual specified
in Division 1.
1. Include: Lists of parts and troubleshooting maintenance data.
G. Warranties: Warranties specified in this Section.
A. Electrical Component Standard: Provide components that comply with NFPA 70 and that
are listed and labeled by UL where available.
B. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated fixtures specified in this Section that are
listed and labeled.
1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in NFPA 70, Article 100.
C. AMCA Compliance: Provide products that meet performance requirements and are licensed
to use the AMCA Seal.
D. NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA standards.
E. Local Certification: Fans should be certified by local authorities as applicable.
A. Deliver fans as factory-assembled units, to the extent allowable by shipping limitations, with
protective crating and covering.
B. Lift and support units with the manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions by field measurements. Verify clearances.
B. Do not operate fans until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings are lubricated, and
fans have been commissioned.
1.8 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate the size and location of concrete housekeeping pads. Cast anchor-bolt inserts
into pad. Concrete reinforcement and formwork requirements are specified in Section
"Cast-in-Place Concrete."

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A4-ME-01 REV 1
B. Coordinate the installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. Roof
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish one set of belts for each belt-driven fan that match products installed, are packaged
with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels clearly describing
contents.
1.10 WARRANTY

repair or replace components of the axial HVAC fans that fail in materials or workmanship

weathering and use.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 TUBEAXIAL FANS
A. Description: Fan wheel and housing, factory-mounted motor with belt or direct drive, an
inlet cone section, and accessories.
B. Housings: Galvanized steel with flanged inlet and outlet connections.
C. Wheel Assemblies: Cast aluminum, machined and fitted to shaft.
D. Belt Drives:
1. Factory mounted, with adjustable alignment and belt tensioning.

2. Service Factor Based on Fan Motor Size: 1.2
3. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel designed to operate at no more than 70
percent of first critical speed at top of fan's speed range.
4. Fan Pulleys: Cast iron with split, tapered bushing; dynamically balanced at factory.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A4-ME-01 REV 1
5. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch. Select pulley so pitch adjustment is at the middle of
adjustment range at fan design conditions.
6. Belts: Oil resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic; matched sets for multiple belt drives.
7. Belt Guards: Fabricate of steel for motors mounted on outside of fan cabinet.
8. Motor Mount: Adjustable base.
9. Shaft Bearings: Radial, self-aligning bearings.
a. Ball-Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 9, L10 of 50,000 hours

b. Extend lubrication lines to outside of casing and terminate with grease fittings.
E. Accessories:
1. Companion Flanges: Rolled flanges of same material as housing.

2. Inspection Door: Bolted door allowing limited access to internal parts of fan, of same
material as housing.
3. Propeller Access Section Door: Short duct section bolted to fan inlet and outlet
allowing access to internal parts of fan for inspection and cleaning, of same material
as housing.
4. Swingout Construction: Assembly allowing entire fan section to swing out from duct
for cleaning and servicing, of same material as housing.
5. Mounting Clips: Horizontal ceiling clips welded to fan housing, of same material as
housing.
6. Horizontal Support: Pair of supports bolted to fan housing, of same material as
housing.
7. Vertical Support: Short duct section with welded brackets bolted to fan housing, of
same material as housing.
8. Inlet Screen: Wire-mesh screen on fans not connected to ductwork, of same material
as housing.
9. Outlet Screen: Wire-mesh screen on fans not connected to ductwork, of same material
as housing.
10. Backdraft Dampers: Butterfly style, for bolting to the discharge of fan or outlet cone,
of same material as housing.
11. Shaft Seal: Elastomeric seal and Teflon wear plate, suitable for up to 300 deg F (149
deg C).
12. Motor Cover: Cover with side vents to dissipate motor heat, of same material as
housing.
13. Inlet Vanes: Adjustable; with peripheral control linkage operated from outside of
airstream, bronze sleeve bearings on each end of vane support, and provision for
manual or automatic operation of same material as housing.
14. Inlet Bell: Curved inlet for when fan is not attached to duct, of same material as
housing.
15. Inlet Cone: Round-to-round transition of same material as housing.
16. Outlet Cone: Round-to-round transition, of same material as housing.
17. Stack Cap: Vertical discharge assembly with backdraft dampers, of same material as
housing.
18. Direct-Driven Units: Encase motor in housing outside of airstream, factory wired to
disconnect switch located on outside of fan housing. Extend lubrication lines to
outside of casing and terminate with grease fittings.
F. Factory Finishes:
1. Sheet Metal Parts: Prime coat before final assembly.

2. Exterior Surfaces: Baked-enamel finish coat after assembly.
3. Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A4-ME-01 REV 1
a. Apply to finished housings.

b. Apply to fan wheels.
2.2 VANEAXIAL FANS
A. Description: Vaneaxial fans consisting of fan wheel and housing, straightening vane
section, factory-mounted motor, an inlet cone section, and accessories. Variable features
indicated in equipment schedule include belt driven or direct drive as indicated, and variable
or adjustable pitch.
1. Variable-Pitch Fans: Internally mounted pneumatic actuator, externally mounted

positive positioner, and mechanical-blade-pitch indicator for variable-volume
operation.
B. Housings: Galvanized steel with inlet bell and diffuser sections.
1. Inlet and Outlet Connections: Outer mounting frame and companion flanges; inlet
cone shall be welded to the fan raceway.
2. Guide Vane Section: Integral guide vanes downstream from the fan wheel designed
to straighten the airflow.
3. Sound-Trap Housing: Housing incorporating perforated steel inner liner, 2 inch (50
mm) fiberglass duct liner sandwiched between the inner and outer shell, and steel
bands sealing the insulated cavity.
C. Wheels Assemblies: Cast-aluminum hub assembly, machined and fitted with threaded
bearing wells to receive blade-bearing assemblies with replaceable, cast-aluminum blades;
factory mounted and balanced.
D. Belt Drives: Factory mounted, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after
installation.
1. Service Factor Based on Fan Motor Size: 1.2

2. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel designed to operate at no more than 70
percent of first critical speed at top of fan's speed range.
3. Fan Pulleys: Cast iron with split, tapered bushing; dynamically balanced at factory.
4. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch Select pulley so pitch adjustment is at the middle of
7. Motor Mount: Adjustable base.
8. Shaft Bearings: Radial, self-aligning bearings.
a. Ball-Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 9, L10 of 100,000 hours.

b. Extend lubrication lines to outside of casing and terminate with grease fittings.
E. Accessories:
1. Companion Flanges: Rolled flanges of same material as housing.

2. Inspection Door: Bolted door allowing limited access to internal parts of fan, of same
material as housing.
3. Propeller Access Section Door: Short duct section bolted to fan inlet and outlet
allowing access to internal parts of fan for inspection and cleaning, of same material
as housing.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A4-ME-01 REV 1
4. Swingout Construction: Assembly allowing entire fan section to swing out from duct
for cleaning and servicing, of same material as housing.
5. Mounting Clips: Horizontal ceiling clips welded to fan housing, of same material as
housing.
6. Horizontal Support: Pair of supports bolted to fan housing, of same material as
housing.
7. Vertical Support: Short duct section with welded brackets bolted to fan housing, of
same material as housing.
8. Inlet Screen: Wire-mesh screen on fans not connected to ductwork, of same material
as housing.
9. Outlet Screen: Wire-mesh screen on fans not connected to ductwork, of same material
as housing.
10. Backdraft Dampers: Butterfly style, for mounting with flexible connection to the
discharge of fan or direct mounted to the discharge diffuser section, of same material
as housing.
(For parking ventilation axial fans: In case Motorized smoke damper/Motorized
damper provided as per design drawings, Backdraft damper to be cancelled)
11. Stall Alarm Probe: Sensing probe capable of detecting fan operation in stall and
signaling control devices.
12. Flow Measurement Port: Pressure measurement taps installed in the inlet of fan to
detect and signal airflow readings to temperature-control systems. Control devices
and sequence of operation are specified in Section 230923.14 "Flow Instruments" and
Section 230993.11 "Sequence of Operations for HVAC DDC."
13. Shaft Seal: Elastomeric seal and Teflon wear plate, suitable for up to 300 deg F (148
deg C).
14. Motor Cover: Cover with side vents to dissipate motor heat, of same material as
housing.
15. Inlet Vanes: Adjustable; with peripheral control linkage operated from outside of
airstream, bronze sleeve bearings on each end of vane support, and provision for
manual or automatic operation, of same material as housing.
16. Inlet Bell: Curved inlet for when fan is not attached to duct, of same material as
housing.
17. Inlet Cone: Round-to-round transition, of same material as housing.
18. Outlet Cone: Round-to-round transition, of same material as housing.
19. Stack Cap: Vertical discharge assembly with backdraft dampers, of same material as
housing.
20. Direct-Driven Units: Encase motor in housing outside of airstream, factory wired to
disconnect switch located on outside of fan housing. Extend lubrication lines to
outside of casing and terminate with grease fittings.
F. Factory Finishes:
1. Sheet Metal Parts: Prime coat before final assembly.

2. Exterior Surfaces: Baked-enamel finish coat after assembly.
3. Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized.
a. Apply to finished housings.

b. Apply to fan wheels.
2.3 CAR PARK JET FANS
A. Description: Fans shall be axial flow, jet impulse type, especially designed for ventilation of
car parks, unidirectional, two speed, and silent operation.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A4-ME-01 REV 1
B. Housing: Consist of inner and outer tube, motor flange and guide blade assembly. Fan
housing is to be manufactured from mild steel to ISO 3574, grade HR 14 or equivalent. The
housing assembly is to be hot dip galvanized in accordance with ISO 1461.
C. Performance – Independently tested and certified in accordance with EN 12101-3, ISO

13350, ISO 5801, fans and silencers should be rated at 300 degree °C for two hours.
D. Impeller: Shall be statically and dynamically balanced on a balancing machine in

accordance with the requirements of ISO 1940.The entire jet fan assembly, when operating
at full speed shall vibrate at less than 4.5 mm/s. Balance class: G 2.5 measured according to
ISO 1940 standard.
E. Blades and Hub: Cast from aluminum.
F. Silencers: Tubular directly mounted on inlet and outlet of fan, of steel inner casing with
galvanized steel outer casing welded to hot dip galvanized ends and bell mouths, fitted with
stainless steel perforated line and galvanized steel aerodynamic pod, and solid and
galvanized steel wire mesh at inlet / deflector vanes at outlet.
Sound Pressure Level: Select to give sound levels NC 55 inside parking measured on the A-
scale of a standard sound level meter at 3 m from the open fan inlet. The unit shall be
designed inlet and outlet attenuators which, along with the fan unit, are encased in a
Galvanized steel acoustic enclosure
G. Motor: Squirrel type reversible single speed, 50 Hz rating, pad mounted, with self-
lubricating ball bearings of L10 life, continuously air stream rated and complying fully with
IEC 60034-1, Class F insulation. The motor shall be suitable for handling smoke laden air at
300 deg. C for 2 hours.
H. Suspension: Anti-vibration compression spring type fixed to tunnel roof by means of

stainless steel studding/nut system. Studding is to be screwed into stainless steel sockets and
locked by means of heavy duty "LOCTITE" or approved equal. Bolts are to be painted after
installation with two coats epoxy anti-corrosion paint.
I. Finish: The complete fan is to be painted after degreasing, with one coat of mordant wash
followed by one coat of epoxy prime and one coat of epoxy thick layer and finish paint
Polyurethane to give a total mean dry film thickness of 70-180 microns. Color to be agreed
by the Engineer.
J. The contractor shall perform CFD modelling for the design based on the actual approved
equipment, layouts, and installation to confirm that the system performance meet design
intent and authority have jurisdiction.
2.4 MOTORS
A. Refer to Section "Common Motors Requirements for HVAC Equipment" for general
requirements for factory-installed motors.
B. Motor Construction: NEMA MG 1, general purpose, continuous duty, Design B.
C. Enclosure Type: The following features are required as indicated:
1. Open dripproof motors where satisfactorily housed or remotely located during

operation.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A4-ME-01 REV 1
2. Guarded dripproof motors where exposed to contact by employees or building

occupants.
2.5 FACTORY FINISHES
A. Sheet Metal Parts: Prime coat before final assembly.
B. Exterior Surfaces: Baked-enamel finish coat after assembly.
2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Requirements: The following factory tests are required as indicated:
1. Sound Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating
Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Test fans according to AMCA 300,
"Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA
Seal.
2. Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of
rotation, and efficiency by factory tests and ratings according to AMCA 210,
"Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Certified Aerodynamic Performance
Rating."
B. Fans used for smoke extract shall be UL listed and shall be suitable for high temperature
application as per design requirements.
C. Noise level of fans shall not exceed noise level specified for location of installation. The
overall efficiency shall be minimum 60%.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances
and other conditions affecting performance of the fans. Do not proceed with installation
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install fans according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Support units using the vibration-control devices indicated. Vibration-control devices are
specified in Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
C. Suspend units from structure using threaded steel rods, vibration isolation springs and
seismic restraints. Vibration-control devices are specified in Section "Vibration and
Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
D. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.
E. Label fans according to requirements specified in Section "Identification for HVAC Piping
and Equipment."

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A4-ME-01 REV 1
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Sections. Drawings
indicate the general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct connections
with flexible connector.
B. Electrical: Conform to applicable requirements in Division 26 Sections.
C. Grounding: Ground equipment. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including

grounding connections, according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values.
Where manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A -
486B.
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

supervise the field assembly of components and installation of fans, including duct and
electrical connections, and to report results in writing.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.
B. Adjust belt tension.
C. Lubricate bearings.
3.6 CLEANING
A. After completing installation, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction
debris, and repair damaged finishes including chips, scratches, and abrasions.
B. Clean fan interiors to remove foreign material and construction debris. Vacuum clean fan
wheel and cabinet.
3.7 COMMISSIONING
A. Final Checks before Startup: Perform the following operations and checks before startup,
and report results in writing:
1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.

2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections
for piping, ducts, and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper
thermal-overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnects.
3. Perform cleaning and adjusting specified in this Section.
4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify
fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearings operation. Reconnect fan drive system,
align and adjust belts, and install belt guards.
5. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts.
6. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in
connected ductwork systems are in the fully open position.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A4-ME-01 REV 1
B. Starting procedures for fans are as follows:
1. Energize motor; verify proper operation of motor, drive system, and fan wheel.
Adjust fan to indicated RPM.
2. Measure and record motor voltage and amperage.
C. Refer to Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for procedures for air-
handling-system testing, adjusting, and balancing.
D. Replace or adjust fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design conditions. Fix in
final position after balancing is achieved.
3.8 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Employer's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain axial fan units.
Refer to Division 1.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A4-ME-01 REV 1
SECTION 233416 - CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes centrifugal fans for indoor installations.
B. Kitchen ecology units
C. Performance Criteria:
1. The fan schedule shows liter per second (l/s) or cubic feet per minute (CFM) and
design static pressure.
2. Provide fans and motors capable of stable operation at design conditions and at ll0
percent pressure but not to exceed 185 Pa (3/4-inch) additional pressure.
3. Lower than design pressure drop of approved individual components may allow use
of a smaller fan motor and still provide the safety factor. When submitted as a
deviation a smaller motor may be approved in the interest of energy conservation.
4. Select fan operating point as follows:
a. Forward curved and axial fans: Right hand side of peak pressure point.
b. Airfoil, backward inclined or tubular: Near the peak of static efficiency.
D. Safety Criteria: Provide manufacturer's standard screen on fan inlet and discharge exposed
to operating and maintenance personnel.
E. Noise level shall not exceed level allowed for place of installation. Noise level for all ceiling
mounted equipment shall not exceed NC35.
F. Overall efficiency shall be minimum 60 percent.
G. All fan bearings, where applicable, shall be of heavy duty type suitable for continuous
operation.
CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS 233416 - Page 1 of 13

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A6-ME-01 REV 1
1.4 SUBMITTALS


C. Coordination Drawings, including floor plans and sections drawn accurately to scale.
Submit with Shop Drawings. Show fan room layout and relationships between components
and adjacent structural and mechanical elements. Show support locations, type of support,
and weight on each support. Indicate and certify field measurements.
F. Maintenance data for fans to include in the operation and maintenance manual specified in
Division 1.
listed and labeled.
D. NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA standards.
E. Local Certification: Fans should be certified by local authorities as applicable.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A6-ME-01 REV 1
A. Deliver fans as factory-assembled units, to the extent allowable by shipping limitations, with
protective crating and covering.
B. Disassemble and reassemble units as required for movement to the final location following
manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Lift and support units with the manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points.
into pad. Concrete reinforcement and formwork requirements are specified in "Cast-in-
Place Concrete" Section.
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
contents.
1.10 WARRANTY

repair or replace components of the centrifugal HVAC fans that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period.

weathering and use.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A6-ME-01 REV 1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL FAN REQUIREMENTS
A. General
1. Performance data for all fans and spare parts shall be determined in accordance with
the provisions of ASHRAE 51.
2. Sound pressure level ratings of ducted fans shall comply with AMCA 301 and shall
be the result of tests made in accordance with AMCA 300.
3. Sound pressure level ratings of non-ducted fans shall comply with AMCA 301 and
shall be the result of tests made in accordance with AMCA 300. Application of
sound pressure level ratings shall conform to AMCA 302. Unit construction shall
conform to applicable standards contained in AMCA 99 and to requirements
specified.
4. Safety provisions for power transmission equipment and non-ducted inlets and outlets
shall include guards and screens, unless other provisions are required, and shall be
constructed in accordance with applicable provisions of ANSI B11.19. Installation
shall be such that fan vibration-isolation provisions are not negated.
5. Fan wheels shall be statically and dynamically balanced at the factory.
B. Corrosion Protection: All steel shall be mill-galvanized, or phosphatized and coated with
minimum two coats, corrosion resistant enamel paint. Manufacturers paint and paint system
shall meet the minimum specifications of: ASTM D 1735 water fog; ASTM B 117 salt
spray; ASTM D 3359 adhesion; and ASTM G 152 / ASTM G 153 weathermeter.
C. Air-Handling System Balancing Provisions: All necessary facilities shall be provided for
the adjustment of fan speed for each air-handling system during air-quantity balancing
operations. Facilities provided shall be one of the following:
1. A variable-pitch drive with variable range to produce the fan speed necessary for
proper air balance.
2. A continuously variable drive or power unit to produce the fan speed necessary for
proper air balance.
3. A series of fixed-pitch pulleys that can be interchanged until the proper fan speed has
been determined.
2.2 FAN UNITS
A. Factory fabricated and assembled, factory tested, and factory finished, with indicated
capacities and characteristics.
B. Description: Belt-driven centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft, bearings,
motor and disconnect switch, drive assembly, and support structure.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A6-ME-01 REV 1
2.3 HOUSINGS
A. Materials and Fabrication: Formed- and reinforced-steel panels to make curved scroll
housings with shaped cutoff, spun-metal inlet bell, and doors or panels to allow access to
internal parts and components. Use galvanized steel to fabricate fans downstream from
humidifiers.
1. Panel Bracing: Steel angle- or channel-iron member supports for mounting and
supporting fan scroll, wheel, motor, and accessories.
2. Fabrication Class: AMCA 99 Class I, Class II, or Class III.
3. Horizontal Flanged Split Housing: Bolted construction.
4. Plug Fans: Fabricate without fan scroll and volute housing, with steel cabinet.
5. Tubular Centrifugal Fans: Fabricate tubular housing from formed- and reinforced-
steel panels with welded seams and the following:
a. Outlet guide vanes.

b. Motor disconnect switch.
c. Spun inlet cone with flange.
d. Outlet flange.
e. Brackets suitable for horizontal or vertical mounting.
2.4 WHEELS
A. Backward Inclined: Steel or aluminum construction with curved inlet flange, back plate,
backwardly inclined blades welded or riveted to flange and back plate; cast-iron or cast-steel
hub riveted to back plate and fastened to shaft with set screws.
B. Forward Curved: Black-enameled or galvanized steel construction with inlet flange, back
plate, shallow blades with inlet and tip curved forward in direction of airflow, mechanically
secured to flange and back plate; cast-steel hub swaged to back plate and fastened to shaft
with set screws.
C. Airfoil Wheel: Steel construction with smooth curved inlet flange; heavy back plate; hollow
die-formed airfoil-shaped blades continuously welded at tip flange and back plate; cast-iron
or cast-steel hub riveted to back plate and fastened to shaft with set screws.
2.5 SHAFTS
A. Statically and dynamically balanced and selected for continuous operation at the maximum
rated fan speed and motor horsepower (HP), with final alignment and belt adjustment made
after installation.
B. Turned, ground, and polished hot-rolled steel with keyway. Ship with a protective coating
of lubricating oil.
C. Designed to operate at no more than 70 percent of the first critical speed at the top of the
fan's speed range.
2.6 BEARINGS
A. Prelubricated and Sealed Shaft Bearings: Self-aligning, pillow- block-type ball bearings.
1. Ball-Bearing Rated Life: AFBMA 9, L-10 of 120,000 hours.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A6-ME-01 REV 1
B. Grease-Lubricated Shaft Bearings: Self-aligning, pillow-block type; tapered roller bearings

with double-locking collars and 2-piece, cast-iron housing.
1. Roller-Bearing Rated Life: AFBMA 11, L-10 of 50,000 hours.
C. Grease-Lubricated Shaft Bearings: Self-aligning, pillow-block type; ball or roller bearings

with adapter mount and 2-piece, cast-iron housing.
1. Ball-Bearing Rated Life: AFBMA 9, L-10 of 120,000 hours.
2. Roller-Bearing Rated Life: AFBMA 11, L-10 of 120,000 hours.
2.7 BELT DRIVES
A. Description: Factory mounted, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after
installation.
1. Service Factor Based on Fan Motor: 1.2.
B. Drives:
1. Fan drives shall be V-belt type.

2. V-belt drive application shall conform to the manufacturer's published
recommendations.
3. Horsepower (Wattage) rating of drive shall be based on maximum pitch diameter of
sheave.
4. Drives with motors up to and including 10 horsepower (7500 watt) shall be standard
belt section, variable sheave type, with a service factor of not less than 1.2.
5. Drives with motors over 10 horsepower (7500 watt) and up to and including 40
horsepower (30 kilowatt of power) shall be standard section, fixed-sheave or
variable-sheave type, with a service factor of not less than 1.2.
6. Drives with motors over 40 horsepower (30 kilowatt of power) shall be fixed-sheave,
high-capacity, supertype, with a service factor of not less than 1.2.
7. Belt drives shall be located outboard of bearings. Drive and driven shafts shall be
aligned by the four-point method.
8. Belt tension shall be adjusted in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
9. Alignment and final belt tensioning shall be performed in the presence of the
Engineer.
C. Fan Pulleys: Cast iron or cast steel with split, tapered bushing, dynamically balanced at
factory.
D. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch. Select pulley so pitch adjustment is at the middle of the
E. Belts: Oil resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic; matched sets for multiple belt drives.
1. Belt Guards: Fabricate to comply with SMACNA requirements; 2.7-mm thick, 20-
mm diamond-mesh wire screen welded to steel angle frame or equivalent, prime
coated. Secure to fan or fan supports without short circuiting vibration isolation.
Include provision for adjustment of belt tension, lubrication, and use of tachometer
with guard in place.
F. Motor Mount: Adjustable for belt tensioning.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A6-ME-01 REV 1
2.8 ACCESSORIES
A. Scroll Access Doors: Shaped to conform to scroll, with quick-opening latches and gaskets.
B. Companion Flanges: Galvanized steel, for duct connections.
C. Fixed Inlet Vanes: Steel, with fixed cantilevered vanes welded to inlet bell.
D. Variable Inlet Vanes: Steel, with blades supported at both ends with 2 permanently
lubricated bearings. Variable mechanism terminating in single control lever with control
shaft for double-width fans.
E. Adjustable Inlet Vanes: Steel, with blades cantilevered with 2 permanently lubricated
bearings. Variable mechanism out of air stream terminating in single control lever with
control shaft for double-width fans.
1. Double-Width Fan Inlet Vanes: Connected for single operator.
F. Discharge Dampers: Heavy-duty steel assembly with blades constructed of 2 plates formed
around and welded to shaft, channel frame, sealed ball bearings, with blades linked out of
air stream to single control lever.
1. Configuration: Parallel blade.

2. Configuration: Opposed blade.
G. Inlet Screens: Galvanized steel welded grid screen, mounted inside shaft bearings.
H. Scroll Drain Connection: DN25 (1-inch) steel pipe coupling welded to low point of fan
scroll.
I. Shaft Cooler: Metal disk between bearings and fan wheel, designed to dissipate heat from
shaft.
J. Spark-Resistant Construction: AMCA 99 construction, as indicated.
K. Shaft Seals: Airtight seals installed around shaft on drive side of single-width fans.
L. Weather Cover: Heavy-gage steel sheet with ventilation slots, bolted to housing.
2.9 MOTORS
A. Refer to Section "Motors" for general requirements for factory-installed motors.

operation.
occupants.
3. Totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC).
D. Motor Bases: Motor shall be provided with adjustable motor bases, except as otherwise
specified. Motors over 7-1/2 horsepower (5600 watt of power) with fixed-sheave standard

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A6-ME-01 REV 1
belt section drives shall be provided with adjustable, pivoted motor bases wherever
equipment configuration permits proper installation.
2.10 SMOKE EXHAUST FAN
A. General Description: Belt-driven mixed flow, dual speed, fully weatherproofed and
constructed of corrosion resistant materials. Structural steel support components to be zinc
plated and suitable for smoke exhaust. Fans to be UL listed for smoke removal with
operation temperature of 260C for a minimum of four hours continuous operation, or shall
be classified F300 (300C for 2 hours) as per EN 12101-3.
B. Fan Housing: Heavy gauge steel hot dip galvanized after fabrication, designed to provide
easy access from roof level to all moving parts including motor, without dismantling unit.
C. Fan wheels: Heavy gauge steel, multi-blade, mixed flow, non-overloading, non-stall type,
fully balanced at factory.
D. Motor: Type Class H insulation, continuously rated, provided with permanently lubricated
sealed ball bearings not requiring lubrication for 25000 hours of operation and in-built
thermal overload protection.
E. Sound Pressure Level: Select to give sound levels less than 50 db measured on the A-scale
of a standard sound level meter at 3 m from the open fan inlet.
F. Accessories: Fan to be complete with the following: fusible link damper lifter to provide
heat and smoke relief in the event of an electrical power fail are factory wired safety
disconnect switch mounted inside housing, flexible conduit to receive field wiring, all
around expanded aluminum bird and protection screen, neoprene foam sealing strip for air
seal between base and curb and fixings to roof curb.
G. Fusible Link Lifter: Fusible link damper lifter automatically opens the butterfly dampers
when air temperature below the damper blades exceeds 74 deg. C to provide smoke and heat
relief with no electrical power required.
2.11 KITCHEN FUME ROOF EXTRACT FAN
A. Fan: Dual speed belt-driven motor, Upblast discharge, centrifugal, vertical discharge, fully
weatherproofed, all durable rust-free aluminum construction and corrosion-resistant
protection. Fan shall be spark-resistant. Fans shall be spark resistant, UL and cUL listed for
grease removal and high static pressures operation and listed for commercial cocking
equipment exhaust applications.
B. Sound Power Level: Select to give sound levels less than 60 dB measured on the A-scale of
a standard sound level meter at 3 m from the open fan inlet.
C. Fan Housing: heavy gauge durable rust-free steel with lock formed seams permitting no air
leakage . Fan housing to be designed for easy access from roof level to internal parts
including motor, V-belt drives and magnetic shutter.
D. Fan Impeller: Steel with backward inclined blades with non-overloading characteristics,
spark proof and non corroding, keyed and locked to drive and shaft, with the whole rotating
element precision balanced at the factory.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A6-ME-01 REV 1
E. Shaft to be stainless steel mounted on two heavy duty self-aligning, permanently lubricated
and sealed pillow block ball bearing.
F. Motor: Squirrel cage, induction type with permanently lubricated ball bearings and in-built
thermal overload protection. The motor is to be protected and isolated from the air-stream
and to be forced cooled by uncontaminated air which is drawn into the motor housing
through breath tubes. Motor is to be mounted on vibration dampeners on a slotted base for
belt tension adjustment. Sheave is to be adjustable to allow field changes in fan speed.
Motor is to be class F insulation.
G. Motor to incorporate an under voltage relay complete with timer.
H. Accessories: Fan is to be complete with magnetic shutters, factory wired safety disconnect
switch mounted inside housing, automatic shutters to prevent air recirculation through
stand-by fan, flexible tubing to receive field wiring, hinged access door, 25 mm drain
connection and weatherhood.
I. Automatic Change Over Panel: sheet steel painted grey, houses two contactors, over load
relay, selector switch, two indicator lights and reset buttons.
2.12 KITCHEN HOODS EXHAUST FANS (ECOLOGY UNIT)
A. Fan Unit: A package consisting of a backward inclined exhaust fan with heavy duty
bearings, fan isolators, sound attenuation, two grease sheaves, filter and odor reducing
sections.
B. Ecology unit shall be UL or ETL listed for kitchen grease exhaust and comply with NFPA –
96.
C. Ecology unit shall conform to ANSI/UL STD867 & UL STD 710 where applicable or
approved equal.
D. Pre-filter Section: The pre filter section shall include 2 inch deep steel washable permanent
filters according to ASHRAE 52-76 filters. Filter frames shall be constructed of steel.. All
filters shall be removable without the use of tools through side access doors with lift and
turn latches. Filters are to be cleanable with a water hose and soapy water.
E. Second stage filtration: 525 mm bag filter 90% ASHRAE 52-76 filters arranged in a v-bank
configuration to increase filter area and reduce static pressure.
F. Third stage filtration: Absolute HEPA filter 305 mm DOP filter 99.97% ASHRAE 52-76
filters.
G. Fan: Single width, single inlet, airfoil centrifugal fan statically and dynamically balanced.
H. Fan Shaft: The fan shall be mounted on a heavy duty turned ground and polished steel shaft
internally isolated. Pre-lubricated heavy duty bearings.
I. Motor: Squirrel cage, induction type with in-built thermal overload protection. Motor is to
be class F insulation for motors outside air stream and class H insulation for motors inside
airstream.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A6-ME-01 REV 1
J. Odor Control Module: Odor control section shall be one of the following;
1. Pellets: The section consists of metal cells filled with activated alumna pellets
impregnated with potassium permanganate. The odor is controlled through a
combination of sorption and a chemical modification of the gaseous contaminates.
The odour media is non-toxic and non-flammable. The pellets are contained in
perforated cells located in a separate odour reduction section normally located
between the filter box and the tan box. All of the exhaust air is drawn over the pellets
whenever the fan is operating. The cells are removed through a side access door on
the odor section.
2. UV module: Self-cleaning inner surface. High output lamps designed to run for
13,000 hrs at optimum capacity. Ozone regulation technology shall control ozone
production in line with cooking activity. Allows increases in air speed without
significant effect on performance.
3. Rigid, bonded, activated carbon panels shall be furnished to remove both base and
acid odor molecules. Carbon mass shall be applied at a minimum of 100 lbs. per
1,000 cfm (45.2 kg. per 472 l/s) of exhaust air volume. Panels shall be held in place
by gasketed, extruded aluminum tracks arranged in a v-bank configuration.
K. Fan and Filter box Casing: 16 gauge steel, primed and painted suitably reinforced to ensure
rigidity. An access door is provided to the exhaust fan motor and drive section. The casing is
wrapped with 25mm sound attenuation insulation. The exhaust fan section shall be
internally /externally spring isolated.
L. Control panel in stainless steel comprising on-off, PLC control, system status display, alarm
buzzer, silencing button, control relays, and terminal strip for field wiring.
A. Sheet Metal Parts: Enamel or prime coat before assembly. Do not prime coat aluminum
parts.
B. Factory Finish for Fans Downstream from Humidifiers: Enamel or prime coat before
assembly with 2 coats of paint. Prime coating on aluminum parts is not required.
Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Test fans according to AMCA 300,
Seal.
"Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Certified Aerodynamic Performance Rating

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A6-ME-01 REV 1
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
and other conditions affecting performance of the fans. Do not proceed with installation
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install fans according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Support floor-mounted units on concrete housekeeping bases using neoprene pads or

housed spring isolators as indicated . Secure units to anchor bolts installed in
concrete housekeeping base.
C. Suspend units from structural steel support frame using threaded steel rods, vibration
isolation springs and seismic restraints. Vibration-control devices are specified in Section
"Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
D. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.
E. Label fans according to requirements specified in Section "Identification for HVAC Piping
and Equipment."
3.3 HOUSEKEEPING BASES
A. Construct concrete housekeeping pads as follows:
1. Coordinate size of housekeeping bases with actual unit sizes provided. Construct
base 100 mm larger, in both directions, than the overall dimensions of the supported
unit.
2. Form concrete pads with steel channels conforming to ASTM A 36/A 36M, size and
location as indicated. Miter and weld corner and provide cross bracing. Anchor or
key to floor slab.
3. Install reinforcing bars, tied to frame, and place anchor bolts and sleeves to facilitate
securing units.
4. Place concrete and allow to cure before installing units. Use portland cement
conforming to ASTM C 150/C 150M, 27 MPa compressive strength, and normal-
weight aggregate.
5. Clean exposed steel form according to SSPC Surface Preparation Specifications SP 2
or SP 3 and apply 2 coats of rust-preventive metal primer and paint.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
with flexible connectors.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A6-ME-01 REV 1

486B.

electrical connections, alignment of fan shaft and motor shaft, alignment of pulleys, belt
adjustments, and lubrication, and to report results in writing.
3.6 ADJUSTING
3.7 CLEANING
wheel and cabinet.
3.8 COMMISSIONING

fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearings operation. Reconnect fan drive system,
5. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A6-ME-01 REV 1
C. Refer to "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" Section for procedures for air-
D. Replace or adjust fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design conditions. Fix in
3.9 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Employer's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain centrifugal fan
units. Refer to Division 1.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A6-ME-01 REV 1
SECTION 233423 - HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Utility set fans.

2. Centrifugal roof ventilators.
3. Axial roof ventilators.
4. Upblast propeller roof exhaust fans.
5. Centrifugal wall ventilators.
6. In-line ventilators.
7. In-line centrifugal fans.
8. Propeller fans.
B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include roof curbs for roof-mounted
exhaust fans.
C. Fan Unit Schedule: Performance requirements and data are described in equipment
schedule(s) on the Drawings.
D. Performance Criteria:
1. The fan schedule shows cubic feet per minute (CFM) and design static pressure.
2. Provide fans and motors capable of stable operation at design conditions and at ll0
percent pressure but not to exceed 185 Pa (3/4-inch) additional pressure.
3. Lower than design pressure drop of approved individual components may allow use
of a smaller fan motor and still provide the safety factor. When submitted as a
deviation a smaller motor may be approved in the interest of energy conservation.
4. Select fan operating point as follows:
a. Forward curved and axial fans: Right hand side of peak pressure point.
b. Airfoil, backward inclined or tubular: Near the peak of static efficiency.
E. Safety Criteria: Provide manufacturer's standard screen on fan inlet and discharge exposed
to operating and maintenance personnel.
HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 233423 - Page 1 of 12

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A4-ME-01 REV 1
F. All fan bearings, where applicable, shall be of heavy duty type suitable for continuous
operation.
1.4 SUBMITTALS


C. Coordination Drawings for roof penetration requirements and for reflected ceiling plans
drawn accurately to scale and coordinating penetrations and units mounted above ceiling.
Submit with Shop Drawings. Show the following:
1. Roof framing and support members relative to duct penetrations.

3. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.
4. Ceiling-mounted items including light fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers,
access panels, and special moldings.
F. Maintenance data for power ventilators to include in the operation and maintenance manual
specified in Division 1.
listed and labeled.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A4-ME-01 REV 1
D. NEMA Compliance: Provide components required as part of fans that comply with
applicable NEMA standards.
E. UL Standard: Provide power ventilators that comply with UL 705.
F. Local Certification: Fans should be certified by local authorities as applicable.
into pad. Concrete reinforcement and formwork requirements are specified in Section
B. Coordinate the size and location of structural steel support members.
C. Coordinate the installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. Roof
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
contents.
1.9 WARRANTY

repair or replace components of the HVAC power ventilators that fail in materials or

weathering and use.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A4-ME-01 REV 1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL FAN REQUIREMENTS
A. General
1. Performance data for all fans and spare parts shall be determined in accordance with
the provisions of ASHRAE 51.
2. Sound pressure level ratings of ducted fans shall comply with AMCA 301 and shall
be the result of tests made in accordance with AMCA 300.
3. Sound pressure level ratings of non-ducted fans shall comply with AMCA 301 and
shall be the result of tests made in accordance with AMCA 300. Application of
sound pressure level ratings shall conform to AMCA 302. Unit construction shall
conform to applicable standards contained in AMCA 99 and to requirements
specified.
4. Safety provisions for power transmission equipment and non-ducted inlets and outlets
shall include guards and screens, unless other provisions are required, and shall be
constructed in accordance with applicable provisions of ANSI B11.19. Installation
shall be such that fan vibration-isolation provisions are not negated.
5. Fan wheels shall be statically and dynamically balanced at the factory.
B. Corrosion Protection: All steel shall be mill-galvanized, or phosphatized and coated with
minimum two coats, corrosion resistant enamel paint. Manufacturers paint and paint system
shall meet the minimum specifications of: ASTM D 1735 water fog; ASTM B 117 salt
spray; ASTM D 3359 adhesion; and ASTM G 152 / ASTM G 153 weathermeter.
C. Bearings
1. Bearings shall be antifriction ball or roller type, unless otherwise specified, with
provisions for self-alignment and thrust-load requirements that may be imposed by
the service.
2. Bearings shall be constructed of vacuum degassed or processed steel alloys and shall
have a certified ABMA 9, L-10 minimum life expectancy rating of 200,000 hours.
Bearings shall have dusttight seals suitable for lubricant pressures encountered.
Housings shall be cast iron unless otherwise specified or approved.
3. Bearings shall be grease lubricated. Lubrication provisions shall preclude
overheating due to excess lubricant. Grease supply fittings shall be surface ball check
type. Where necessary, manual or automatic grease pressure relief fittings shall be
provided. Bearing and seal construction permitting, relief fittings shall be located on
the side opposite the supply fitting. Relief fittings shall be visible from normal
maintenance locations. Lubrication provisions shall include extension tubes where
necessary.
4. Bearings shall be dowelled in place with AISI 18-8 corrosion-resistant steel spiral
wrapped or split pins, unless otherwise specified or approved. Taper pins are not
acceptable.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A4-ME-01 REV 1
5. Factory sealed antifriction bearings which conform to above specified materials and
ABMA 9, L-10 life expectancy requirements shall be provided for fans driven by
motors with a power rating of smaller than 1/2 horsepower (375 watt)
D. Drives:
1. Fan drives shall be V-belt type.

2. V-belt drive application shall conform to the manufacturer's published
recommendations.
3. Horsepower (Wattage) rating of drive shall be based on maximum pitch diameter of
sheave.
4. Drives with motors up to and including 10 horsepower (7500 watt) shall be standard
belt section, variable sheave type, with a service factor of not less than 1.2.
5. Drives with motors over 10 horsepower (7500 watt) and up to and including 40
horsepower (30 kilowatt of power) shall be standard section, fixed-sheave or
variable-sheave type, with a service factor of not less than 1.2.
6. Drives with motors over 40 horsepower (30 kilowatt of power) shall be fixed-sheave,
high-capacity, supertype, with a service factor of not less than 1.2.
7. Belt drives shall be located outboard of bearings. Drive and driven shafts shall be
aligned by the four-point method.
8. Belt tension shall be adjusted in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
9. Alignment and final belt tensioning shall be performed in the presence of the
Engineer.
E. Belts:
1. Belts shall be endless, of Dacron-reinforced elastomer construction, with cross

section to suit sheave grooves.
2. Belts shall be matched and measured on a belt-matching machine at the factory.
Selection by code numbers, sag numbers, or match numbers is not acceptable. Each
belt set shall be bound with wire and tagged with equipment identification.
2.2 UTILITY SET FANS
A. Description: Belt-driven centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft, bearings,
motor, drive assembly, and accessories.
B. Housings: Fabricated of steel with side sheets fastened with a deep lock seam or welded to
scroll sheets.
1. Housings Discharge Arrangement: Adjustable to 8 standard positions.
C. Fan Wheels: Single width, single inlet, welded to cast-iron or cast-steel hub and spun-steel
inlet cone, with hub keyed to shaft.
1. Blade Materials: Steel.

2. Blade Type: Die formed, backward inclined or forward curved, as scheduled.
3. Spark-Resistant Construction: AMCA 99.
D. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel keyed to wheel hub.
E. Shaft Bearings: Prelubricated and sealed, self-aligning, pillow-block-type ball bearings with
AFBMA 9, L-50 of 200,000 hours.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A4-ME-01 REV 1
F. Belt Drives: Factory mounted, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after
installation.
1. Service Factor Based on Fan Motor: 1.2.

2. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch. Select pulley so pitch adjustment is at the middle
of the adjustment range at fan design conditions.
4. Belt Guards: Fabricate of steel for motors mounted on the outside of the fan cabinet.
G. Accessories: The following accessories are required as indicated:
1. Backdraft Dampers: Gravity actuated with counterweight and interlocking aluminum

blades and felt edges in steel frame installed on fan discharge.
2. Access Doors: Gasketed doors with latch-type handles.
3. Scroll Dampers: Single-blade damper installed at fan scroll top with adjustable
linkage.
4. Spark-Resistant Construction: AMCA 99 construction, as indicated.
5. Inlet Screens: Removable wire mesh.
6. Drain Connections: DN20 (3/4-inch) threaded coupling drain connection installed at
lowest point of housing.
7. Weather Hoods: Weather resistant with stamped vents over motor and drive
compartment.
2.3 CENTRIFUGAL ROOF VENTILATORS
A. Description: Belt-driven or direct-drive centrifugal fans, as indicated, consisting of housing,

wheel, fan shaft, bearings, motor and disconnect switch, drive assembly, curb base, and
accessories.
B. Housing: Removable, spun-aluminum, dome top and outlet baffle; square, one-piece,
aluminum base with venturi inlet cone.
C. Housing: Removable, galvanized steel, mushroom-domed top; square, one-piece, hinged,

aluminum base with venturi inlet cone.
D. Fan Wheels: Aluminum hub and wheel with backward-inclined blades.
E. Belt-Driven Drive Assembly: Resiliently mounted to the housing, with the following
features:
1. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel drive shaft keyed to wheel hub.
2. Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self-aligning ball
bearings.
3. Pulleys: Cast-iron, adjustable-pitch motor pulley.
4. Fan and motor isolated from exhaust air stream.
F. Accessories: The following items are required as indicated:
1. Variable-Speed Controller: Solid-state control to reduce speed from 100 percent to

less than 50 percent.
2. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal-overload protection mounted
inside fan housing, factory wired through an internal aluminum conduit.
3. Bird Screens: Removable 13-mm mesh, aluminum or brass wire.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A4-ME-01 REV 1
4. Dampers: Counterbalanced, parallel-blade, backdraft dampers mounted in curb base;

factory set to close when fan stops.
5. Roof Curbs: Galvanized steel; mitered and welded corners; 50-mm thick, rigid,
fiberglass insulation adhered to inside walls; and 50-mm wood nailer. Size as
required to suit roof opening and fan base.
a. Configuration: Self-flashing without a cant strip, with mounting flange.

b. Configuration: Built-in cant and mounting flange.
c. Configuration: Built-in raised cant and mounting flange.
d. Overall Height: 200 mm.
e. Overall Height: 300 mm.
f. Overall Height: 450 mm.
2.4 AXIAL ROOF VENTILATORS
A. Description: Belt-driven or direct-drive axial fans, as indicated, consisting of housing,

wheel, fan shaft, bearings, motor and disconnect switch, drive assembly, curb base, and
accessories.
B. Housing: Heavy-gage, removable, spun-aluminum, dome top and outlet baffle; square, one-
piece, hinged, aluminum base.
C. Fan Wheel: Aluminum hub and blades.
D. Fan Wheel: Steel hub and blades.
E. Belt-Driven Drive Assembly: Resiliently mounted to the housing, with the following
features:
1. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel drive shaft keyed to wheel hub.
bearings.
3. Pulleys: Cast-iron, adjustable-pitch motor pulley.
F. Accessories: The following items are required as indicated:

2. Bird Screens: Removable, 13-mm mesh, aluminum or brass wire.
3. Dampers: Counterbalanced, parallel-blade, backdraft dampers mounted in curb base;
factory set to close when fan stops.
4. Roof Curbs: Galvanized steel; mitered and welded corners; 50-mm thick, rigid,
fiberglass insulation adhered to inside walls; and 50-mm wood nailer. Size as
required to suit roof opening and fan base.
a. Configuration: Self-flashing without a cant strip, with mounting flange.

b. Configuration: Built-in cant and mounting flange.
c. Configuration: Built-in raised cant and mounting flange.
d. Overall Height: 200 mm.
e. Overall Height: 300 mm.
f. Overall Height: 450 mm.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A4-ME-01 REV 1
2.5 IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL FANS
A. Description: In-line, belt-driven or direct-drive centrifugal fans, as indicated, consisting of

housing, wheel, outlet guide vanes, fan shaft, bearings, drive assembly, motor and
disconnect switch, mounting brackets, and accessories.
B. Housing: Split, spun-aluminum housing, with aluminum straightening vanes; inlet and
outlet flanges; and support bracket adaptable to floor, side wall, or ceiling mounting.
C. Direct-Drive Units: Motor encased in housing out of air stream, factory wired to disconnect
located on outside of fan housing.
D. Belt-Driven Units: Motor mounted on adjustable base, with adjustable sheaves, enclosure
around belts within fan housing, and lubricating tubes from fan bearings extended to outside
of fan housing.
E. Fan Wheels: Aluminum, airfoil blades welded to aluminum hub.
F. Accessories: The following accessories are required as indicated:
1. Volume-Control Damper: Manually operated with quadrant lock, located in fan

outlet.
2. Companion Flanges: For inlet and outlet duct connections.
3. Fan Guards: Expanded metal in removable frame. Provide belt guards for units not
connected to ductwork.
2.6 PROPELLER FANS
A. Description: Belt-driven or direct-drive propeller fans, as indicated, consisting of fan

blades, hub, housing, orifice ring, motor, drive, and accessories.
B. Housings: Galvanized steel sheet with flanged edges and integral orifice ring with baked-
enamel finish coat after assembly.
C. Steel Fan Wheels: Formed-steel blades riveted to heavy-gage steel spider bolted to cast-iron
hub.
D. Fan Wheel: Replaceable, cast or extruded-aluminum, airfoil blades fastened to cast-

aluminum hub; factory set pitch angle of blades.
E. Fan Drive: Motor mounted in airstream, factory wired to disconnect switch located on
outside of fan housing.
F. Fan Drive:
1. Resiliently mounted to housing.

2. Statically and dynamically balanced.
3. Selected for continuous operation at maximum rated fan speed and motor
horsepower, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after installation.
4. Extend grease fitting to accessible location outside of unit.
5. Service Factor Based on Fan Motor Size: 1.4.
6. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel; keyed to wheel hub.
bearings.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A4-ME-01 REV 1
a. Ball-Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 9, L10 of 100,000 hours .
8. Pulleys: Cast iron with split, tapered bushing; dynamically balanced at factory.
9. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with motors through 5 hp; fixed pitch for use
with larger motors. Select pulley so pitch adjustment is at the middle of adjustment
range at fan design conditions.
G. Accessories: The following accessories are required as indicated:
1. Gravity Shutters: Aluminum blades in aluminum frame, interlocked blades with

nylon bearings.
2. Motor-Side Back Guard: Galvanized steel, conforming to OSHA specifications,
removable for maintenance.
3. Wall Sleeve: Galvanized steel to match fan and accessory size.
4. Weathershield Hood: Galvanized steel to match fan and accessory size.
5. Weathershield Front Guard: Galvanized steel with expanded metal screen.
6. Variable-Speed Controller: Solid-state control to reduce speed from 100 percent to
less than 50 percent.
2.7 MOTORS
A. Refer to Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment" for general

operation.
occupants.
A. Sheet Metal Parts: Prime coat before final assembly.
B. Exterior Surfaces: Baked-enamel finish coat after assembly.
C. Aluminum Parts: No finish required.
Fan Sound Ratings From Laboratory Test Data." Test fans according to AMCA 300,
Seal.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A4-ME-01 REV 1
"Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Certified Aerodynamic Performance
Rating."
B. Fans used for smoke extract shall be UL listed and suitable for high smoke temperature of
260 deg. C (500 deg. F) for a minimum of three hours continuous operation ..
C. Noise level of fans shall not exceed noise level specified for location of installation. The
overall efficiency shall be minimum 60%.
D. Fans utilized for kitchen extract shall be spark-resistant and suitable for kitchen operation.
Fans shall be UL and cUL listed for grease removal, tested under high temperature exhaust
of 190 deg. C (375 deg. F). Fans shall be tested in accordance with relevant NFPA
standard. Fan coating shall be as directed by the Engineer. Units shall include the
following:
1. Bolted access door.

2. Drain connection.
3. Aluminum grease trap.
4. Weatherhood.
5. Upblast discharge.
6. Windband discharge cap with gravity damper.
7. Outlet guard where fan discharge is accessible.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements of installation tolerances
and other conditions affecting performance of the power ventilators. Do not proceed with
installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install power ventilators according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Support utility set fans on concrete housekeeping bases or roof supports using housed
spring isolators. Secure units to anchor bolts installed in housekeeping base.
2. Secure roof-mounted fans to roof curbs with cadmium-plated hardware.
a. Installation of roof curbs is specified in Division 7 Sections.
3. Suspend units from structural steel support frame using threaded steel rods, vibration
isolation springs, and seismic restraints.
4. Ceiling Units: Suspend units from structure using threaded rods or metal straps, and
neoprene washers.
C. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A4-ME-01 REV 1
D. Label units according to requirements specified in Section "Identification for HVAC Piping
and Equipment."
A. Construct concrete housekeeping pads as follows:
1. Coordinate size of housekeeping bases with actual unit sizes provided. Construct
base 100 mm larger, in both directions, than the overall dimensions of the supported
unit.
2. Form concrete pads with steel channels conforming to ASTM A 36/A 36M, size and
location as indicated. Miter and weld corner and provide cross bracing. Anchor or
key to floor slab.
3. Install reinforcing bars, tied to frame, and place anchor bolts and sleeves to facilitate
securing units.
4. Place concrete and allow to cure before installing units. Use portland cement
conforming to ASTM C 150/C 150M, 27-MPa compressive strength, and normal-
weight aggregate.
5. Clean exposed steel form according to SSPC Surface Preparation Specifications SP 2
or SP 3 and apply 2 coats of rust-preventive metal primer and paint.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
with flexible connectors.

486B.

electrical connections, and to report results in writing.
3.6 ADJUSTING

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A4-ME-01 REV 1
3.7 CLEANING
wheel and cabinet.
3.8 COMMISSIONING

fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system,
5. Lubricate bearings, pulleys, belts, and other moving parts with factory-recommended
lubricants.
7. Disable automatic temperature-control operators.
C. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature-control operators.
D. Refer to Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for procedures for air-
E. Replace or adjust fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design conditions. Fix in
3.9 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Employer's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain power ventilator
units. Refer to Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training part of Closeout
Procedures."

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A4-ME-01 REV 1
SECTION 233433 - AIR CURTAINS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes air curtains.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished
specialties; and accessories for each unit.
1. Sample Warranty: Copy of manufacturer's proposed warranty, stating obligations,

remedies, limitations, and exclusions.
B. Shop Drawings: Signed by a qualified professional engineer.
1. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and

seismic restraints.
2. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work.
3. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Differentiate between
C. Coordination Drawings: Plans and details drawn to scale and coordinating penetrations of
exterior walls.
D. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors
available for units with factory-applied color finishes.
E. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of
same thickness and material indicated for the Work.
F. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to
any other information specified or required by Engineer.
G. Field Test Reports: As specified in "Field Quality Control" Article in Part 3 of this Section.
H. Maintenance Data: For air curtains to include in maintenance manuals specified in

Division 1.
I. Warranties: Warranties specified in this Section.
AIR CURTAINS 233433 - Page 1 of 6

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
A. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to

practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing
engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those
performed for installations of air curtains that are similar to those indicated for this Project
in material, design, and extent.
B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of air
curtains and are based on the specific product selected. Other manufacturers' products
complying with requirements may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product
Requirements."
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, Article 100.
D. Comply with AMCA 220, "Laboratory Methods of Testing Air Curtain Units for
Aerodynamic Performance Rating," for airflow, outlet velocity, and power consumption.
E. Comply with AHRI 410, "Forced-Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-Heating Coils," for
components, construction, and rating.
1. Certify coils according to AHRI 410.
F. Comply with NSF 37, "Air Curtains for Entranceways For Food and Food Service
Establishments."
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of air curtains and suspension system components with
other construction, including light fixtures, fire-suppression-system components, and
partition assemblies.
B. Coordinate installation of wall penetrations and louvers. These items are specified in
Division 8, Section "Fixed Louvers" and section "Wall Vents."
1.6 WARRANTY

repair or replace components of air curtains that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.

weathering and use.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below, before construction begins, that match products
installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with
labels describing contents.
1. Furnish one set of filters and fan belts for each unit.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Housing Materials: Galvanized steel with electrostatically applied epoxy enamel finish over
powdered mirror.
B. Housing Materials: One-piece, molded, high-impact, white polymer material.
C. Housing Materials: Heavy-gage, electroplated-zinc steel with welded construction and

polyester coated finish.
D. Housing Materials: Heavy-gage, aluminum construction.
1. Anodized Finish: Match finish and color of adjacent architectural metals. Comply
with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
2. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the
Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.
a. Class II, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A31 (Mechanical Finish:

nonspecular as fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic
Coating: architectural Class II, clear coating 0.010 mm or thicker) complying
with AAMA 611.
b. Class II, Color Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A32/A34 (Mechanical Finish:
nonspecular as fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic
Coating: architectural Class II, integrally colored or electrolytically deposited
color coating 0.010 mm or thicker).
3. Mounting Brackets: Steel, for [wall] [ceiling] mounting.
E. Intake Louvers: Integral part of the housing, mechanically field adjustable and capable of
reducing air-outlet velocity by 60 percent with louver in totally closed position.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
F. Discharge Nozzle: Integral part of the housing, wedge shaped, containing adjustable air-
directional vanes with 40-degree sweep front to back.
2.3 FANS
A. Fans: Aluminum, Centrifugal, forward curved, double width, double inlet; statically and
dynamically balanced.
B. Fan Drives: Direct or Belt, equipped with belt guards and adjustable sheaves and pulleys
for adjusting air-outlet velocity.
2.4 MOTORS
A. Motor Type: Two speed, resiliently mounted, continuous duty, totally enclosed, air over]
[totally enclosed, fan cooled] [open, dripproof] [explosion proof], with integral thermal-
overload protection.
B. Comply with requirements of specification Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements

for HVAC Equipment."
C. Motor Sizes: Large enough so driven loads will not require motor to operate in service
D. Motor shall be resiliently mounted and of continuous duty, with integral thermal-overload
protection.
E. Bearings: Permanently sealed, life-time, prelubricated, ball bearings.
F. Disconnect: Internal power cord with plug and receptacle.
2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Automatic Door Switch: Remotely installed in door area to activate air curtain when door
opens and to deactivate air curtain when door closes.
B. Start-Stop, Push-Button Switch: Manually activates and deactivates air curtain.
C. Time-Delay Relay: Factory installed and adjustable to allow air curtain to operate from 1 to
300 seconds after door closes.
D. Motor-Control Panel: Complete with motor starter, 220-V ac transformer with primary and
secondary fuses, terminal strip, and NEMA 250, Type [1] [12] enclosure.
E. Mounting Brackets: Adjustable mounting brackets for drum-type roll-up doors.
F. Discharge Extension Neck: For ceiling-recessed installation.
A. Source Quality Control: Test to 300 psig (2070 kPa) and to 200 psig (1380 kPa) underwater.
B. Testing: Test and inspect steam coils according to ASHRAE 33.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
C. Steam coils will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions where air curtains will be installed for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install air curtains with clearance for equipment service and maintenance.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Ground equipment.

A. Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing, and report results in writing:
1. After installing air curtains completely, perform visual and mechanical check of
individual components.
2. After electrical circuitry has been energized, start unit to confirm motor rotation and
unit operation. Certify compliance with test parameters.
B. Repair or replace malfunctioning units. Retest units until satisfactory results are achieved.
Operate electric element through each stage and verify proper operation of electrical
connection.
C. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust belt tension.
B. Adjust motor and fan speed to achieve specified airflow.
C. Adjust discharge louver and dampers to regulate airflow.
D. Adjust air-directional vanes.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
3.6 DEMONSTRATION

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain air curtains. Refer to Division 1 Section
"Demonstration and Training part of Closeout Procedures."

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
SECTION 233600 - AIR TERMINAL UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Single-duct air terminals.

2. Dual-duct air terminals.
3. Fan-powered air terminals.
4. Mechanical air terminals.
5. System-powered air terminals.
6. Diffuser air terminals.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
specialties; and accessories for each model indicated. Include a schedule showing drawing
designation, room location, number furnished, model number, size, and accessories
furnished.
field connection.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control systems and
differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans drawn to scale and coordinating air outlets
with other items installed in ceilings.
D. Maintenance Data: List of parts for each type of air terminal and troubleshooting
maintenance guide to include in the maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
E. Warranties: Warranties specified in this Section.
A. Product Options: Drawings and schedules indicate requirements of air terminals and are
based on specific systems selected. Other manufacturers' systems with equal performance
characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements."
AIR TERMINAL UNITS 233600 - Page 1 of 8

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
B. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated air terminals specified in this Section
that are listed and labeled.
C. NFPA Compliance: Install air terminals according to NFPA 90A, "Standard for the
Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."
D. Comply with listed and labeled as defined in latest and relevant IEC standard, by a testing
agency acceptable to the Engineer.
E. The maximum noise level for any ceiling mounted item shall not exceed NC 35. Units shall
meet the airborne and radiated sound-power level (PWL) requirements scheduled, to attain
the specified NC levels. An 18-dB space attenuation shall be assumed in all octave bands or
as recommended by the manufacturer with consideration given to downstream duct
construction and configuration in determining airborne NC levels. Sound levels shall be
tested in accordance with ANSI/ASA S12.23
1.5 WARRANTY

repair or replace components of the air terminal units that fail in materials or workmanship

weathering and use.
D. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SINGLE-DUCT AIR TERMINALS
A. Configuration: Factory built and calibrated with controls mounted on unit, pressure
independent, factory set and field adjustable volume-damper assembly, suitable for single
duct applications.
1. Each unit shall have factory set air volumes and numbered corresponding to contract
drawings.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
2. Control components shall be factory mounted by air terminal manufacturer inside a

protective metal enclosure. All power control wiring shall be wired to factory
mounted terminal box.
B. Rating and Performance Certification: AHRI Industry Standards 880 I-P or 881 SI.
1. Maximum pressure drop: As shown on the drawings.

2. The inlet pressure should not be less than 374 Pa (1-1/2 inches water gage), unless
shown otherwise on drawings. Provide terminal sound attenuators where necessary to
comply with the noise criteria.
C. Casings: Steel or aluminum sheet metal of the following minimum thicknesses:
1. Upstream Pressure Side: 0.6-mm steel.

2. Downstream Pressure Side: 0.45-mm steel.
3. Upstream Pressure Side: 0.8-mm aluminum.
4. Downstream Pressure Side: 0.63-mm aluminum.
D. Casing Lining: Minimum of 13-mm thick, neoprene- or vinyl-coated, fibrous-glass

insulation; 24-kg/cu. m density, complying with NFPA 90A requirements and UL 181
erosion requirements. Secure lining to prevent delamination, sagging, or settling.
1. Coat liner surfaces and edges with erosion-resistant coating or cover with perforated
metal.
E. Plenum Air Inlets: Round stub connections or S-slip and drive connections for duct
attachment.
F. Plenum Air Outlets: S-slip and drive connections.
G. Access: Removable panels to permit access to dampers and other parts requiring service,
adjustment, or maintenance; with airtight gasket and quarter-turn latches.
H. Volume Damper: Construct of galvanized steel with peripheral gasket and self-lubricating
bearings.
1. Maximum Damper Leakage: 2 percent of nominal airflow at 500-Pa (2-inch wg)

inlet static pressure.
2. Damper Position: Normally open.
3. Damper Position: Normally closed.
I. Single Duct Terminals: Provide manufacturer's standard cataloged.
1. Low Velocity Boxes: Inlet valve shall be self-seating, and leakage in full closed
position shall not exceed 2 percent of unit rated capacity against inlet pressure of 2
inch wg (500 pascal) with all outlets sealed shut and inlets fully open.
2. Variable Air Volume Units (VAV): DDC controlled, variable air volume, with field
adjustable maximum and minimum set points complete with the following:
a. Pressure independent electronic controls, reset to modulate airflow between

zero and maximum cataloged CFM.
b. Multi-point, center-averaging velocity sensor, with a minimum of four

measuring ports. Minimum differential pressure signal of 7.5 Pa (0.03 inch
water gage) at inlet velocity of 2.6 m/s (500 fpm). Control signal accuracy of

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
plus or minus 5 percent with the same inlet size at any inlet condition. Velocity
controller shall have a constant 2 degrees temperature reset span regardless of
the minimum and maximum airflow limit.
c. Reversible Actuator, 24-volts, directly connected, shaft mount type without

linkage, and equipped with magnetic clutch.
d. Class II, 24-volt transformer, and disconnect switch.
e. All controls shall be installed in approved NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure.
3. Constant volume single duct. Units shall contain within the casing a mechanical
constant-air volume control designed to operate by inlet air pressure without outside
power. Regulators shall be constructed of nonferrous parts and shall be guaranteed to
maintain delivered air volume at plus or minus 5 percent of unit specified airflow
subjected to inlet pressure up to 1500 pa (6 inches water gage).
J. Attenuator Section: 1000 mm long, lined with 50 mm thick, neoprene- or vinyl-coated,

fibrous-glass insulation.
K. Multi outlet Attenuator Section: With 150-mm diameter collars; each with locking butterfly
balancing damper.
L. Multi outlet Attenuator Section: With 200-mm diameter collars; each with locking butterfly
balancing damper.
M. Round Outlet: Discharge collar matching inlet size.
N. Electric Heating Coil: Slip-in type, open-coil design with integral control box factory wired
and installed. Include the following features:
1. Primary and secondary over temperature protection.

2. Minimum airflow switch.
3. Pneumatic-electric switches and relays.
4. Magnetic contactor for each step of control.
O. Controls: Damper operator, thermostat, and other devices compatible with temperature
controls specified in other Sections.
P. Controls: DDC type, microprocessor-based controls with integral airflow transducer and
room temperature sensor. DDC controller shall be furnished by VAC instrumentation and
controls manufacturer specified under other Sections, mounted and calibrated by the VAV
manufacturer to meet the design parameters and to provide control with the following
features:
1. Proportional plus integral control of room temperature.

2. Time-proportional reheat-coil control.
3. Occupied/unoccupied operating mode.
4. Remote reset of airflow or temperature set points.
5. Adjusting and monitoring with portable terminal.
6. Communication with temperature-control system specified in other Sections.
2.2 MECHANICAL AIR TERMINALS
A. Configuration: Volume-damper assembly and control components inside unit casing.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
B. Casings: Steel or aluminum sheet metal of the following minimum thicknesses:

C. Casing Lining: Minimum of 13-mm thick, neoprene- or vinyl-coated, fibrous-glass

metal.
D. Plenum Air Inlets: Round stub connections or S-slip and drive connections for duct
attachment.
E. Plenum Air Outlets: S-slip and drive connections.
F. Access: Removable panels to permit access to dampers and other parts requiring service,
adjustment, or maintenance; with airtight gasket and quarter-turn latches.
G. Volume Damper: Construct of galvanized steel with peripheral gasket and self-lubricating
bearings.
1. Maximum Damper Leakage: 2 percent of nominal airflow at 500-Pa (2-inch wg)

inlet static pressure.
2. Damper Position: Normally open.
3. Damper Position: Normally closed.
H. Regulator Assembly: Extruded-aluminum or 0.9-mm galvanized-steel components; key

damper blades into shaft with nylon-fitted pivot points located inside unit casing.
1. Automatic Flow-Control Assembly: Combine spring rates matched for each volume-
regulator size with machined dashpot for stable operation.
2. Factory calibrate assembly with shaft extension for connection to externally mounted
control actuator.
I. Multi outlet Attenuator Section: With 150-mm diameter collars; each with locking butterfly
balancing damper.
J. Multi outlet Attenuator Section: With 200-mm diameter collars; each with locking butterfly
balancing damper.
K. Electric Heating Coil: Slip-in type, open-coil design with integral control box factory wired
and installed. Include the following features:
1. Primary and secondary overtemperature protection.

2. Minimum airflow switch.
3. Pneumatic-electric switches and relays.
4. Magnetic contactor for each step of control.
L. Controls: Damper operator, thermostat, and other devices compatible with temperature
controls specified in other Sections.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
M. Electric Controls: 24-V damper actuator with wall-mounted electric thermostat and
appropriate mounting hardware.
2.3 SYSTEM-POWERED AIR TERMINALS
A. Configuration: Volume-damper and automatic flow-control assemblies inside unit casing.
B. Casings: Steel or aluminum sheet metal of the following minimum thicknesses:

C. Casing Lining: Minimum of 13-mm thick, neoprene- or vinyl-coated, fibrous-glass

metal.
D. Plenum Air Inlets: Round or oval stub connections for duct attachment.
E. Plenum Air Outlets: S-slip and drive connections.
F. Volume Damper: Construct of galvanized steel with peripheral gasket and self-lubricating
bearings.
G. Regulator Assembly: System-air-powered bellows section incorporating polypropylene

bellows for volume regulation and thermostatic control. Design bellows to operate at
temperatures of minus 18 to 60 deg C (0 to 140 deg F); to be impervious to moisture and
fungus; and to be suitable for 2500-Pa (10-inch wg) static pressure. Factory test for leaks.
H. Multioutlet Attenuator Section: With 150-mm diameter collars; each with locking butterfly
balancing damper.
I. Multioutlet Attenuator Section: With 200-mm diameter collars; each with locking butterfly
balancing damper.
J. Control Panel Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 1, with access panel sealed from airflow and
mounted on side of unit.
1. Suitable for operation with duct pressures between 60- and 750-Pa (0.25- and 3.0-
inch wg) inlet static pressure.
2. Factory-mounted and -piped, 5-micron filter; velocity-resetting, adjustable, high-limit
control; and amplifying relay.
3. System-powered, wall-mounted thermostat.
A. Testing Requirements: Test and rate air terminals according to AHRI 880 I-P or AHRI 881
SI, "Performance Rating of Air Terminals."

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
B. Identification: Label each air terminal with plan number, nominal airflow, maximum and
minimum factory-set airflows, coil type, and AHRI certification seal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install air terminals level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written instructions,
rough-in drawings, original design, and referenced standards; and maintain sufficient
clearance for normal service and maintenance.
B. Connect ductwork to air terminals according to ductwork Sections.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Install piping adjacent to air terminals to allow service and maintenance.
B. Electrical: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 26 Sections.
C. Ground equipment.

torque-tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use
those specified in UL 486A - 486B.
A. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
3.4 CLEANING
A. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed
finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris, and repair damaged finishes.
3.5 COMMISSIONING
A. Verify that installation of each air terminal is according to the Contract Documents.
B. Check that inlet duct connections are as recommended by air terminal manufacturer to
achieve proper performance.
C. Check that controls and control enclosure are accessible.
D. Verify that control connections are complete.
E. Check that nameplate and identification tag are visible.
F. Verify that controls respond to inputs as specified.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
3.6 DEMONSTRATION

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain air terminals. Refer to Division 1 Section

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
SECTION 233713 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES (Iconic Tower)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes ceiling-, floor- and wall-mounted diffusers, registers, and grilles as
applicable to design requirements.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Diffuser: Circular, square, or rectangular air distribution outlet, generally located in the
ceiling and comprised of deflecting members discharging supply air in various directions
and planes and arranged to promote mixing of primary air with secondary room air.
B. Grille: A louvered or perforated covering for an opening in an air passage, which can be
located in a sidewall, ceiling, or floor.
C. Register: A combination grille and damper assembly over an air opening.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each model indicated, include the following:
1. Data Sheet: For each type of air outlet and inlet, and accessory furnished; indicate
construction, finish, and mounting details.
2. Performance Data: Include throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings for
each type of air outlet and inlet.
3. Schedule of diffusers, registers, and grilles indicating drawing designation, room
location, quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished.
4. Assembly Drawing: For each type of air outlet and inlet; indicate materials and
methods of assembly of components.
B. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans and wall elevations drawn to scale to show
locations and coordination of diffusers, registers, and grilles with other items installed in
ceilings and walls.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors
available for diffusers, registers, and grilles with factory-applied color finishes.
D. Samples for Verification: Of diffusers, registers, and grilles, in manufacturer's standard

sizes, showing the full range of colors. Prepare Samples from the same material to be used
for the Work.
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES (Iconic Tower) 233713 - Page 1 of 6

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
E. Source quality-control reports.
A. Product Options: Drawings and schedules indicate specific requirements of diffusers,

registers, and grilles and are based on the specific requirements of the systems selected.
Other manufacturers' products with equal performance characteristics may be considered.
Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements."
B. NFPA Compliance: Install diffusers, registers, and grilles according to NFPA 90A,
"Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 AIR-DIFFUSION DEVICE CONSTRUCTION
A. Air-diffusion device construction and mounting shall preclude flutter, rattle, or vibration.
Devices shall have the modifications and accessories necessary for mounting in indicated
surface construction.
B. Color selection shall be as directed by the Engineer.
C. Supply diffusers shall be provided with combination damper and equalizing grid. Dampers
shall be extracting-splitter type, except as otherwise indicated.
D. Supply diffusers shall be selected to give required throw to nearest wall. Terminal velocity
is not to exceed 0.5 m/s specified air quantity. Velometer velocities through diffuser are not
to exceed 3.0 m/s. Supply diffusers are to be able to deliver air for cooling at 15 deg. C
below room temperature without causing objectionable conditions.
E. Air-diffusion device volume and pattern adjustments shall be made from the face of the
device. Volume adjustments shall be made by [removable key] [tamper-deterring device].
F. Gaskets shall be provided for supply-terminal air devices mounted in finished surfaces.
G. Exterior and exposed edges shall be rolled, or otherwise stiffened and rounded.
H. For ductwork of pressure classes 1000 to 2500 Pa (4 to 10 inch water gage), provide
sponge-rubber gasket between flanges and wall or ceiling.
I. Size air outlets for minimum noise levels, not to exceed 30 db at specified air quantity, as
measured on the A-scale of a standard noise level meter, unless specified otherwise.
2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Diffusers, registers, and grilles are scheduled at the end of this Section.
B. Diffusers, registers, and grilles are scheduled on Drawings.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
A. Testing: Test performance according to ASHRAE 70, "Method of Testing the Performance
of Air Outlets and Air Inlets."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas where diffusers, registers, and grilles are to be installed for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of
equipment. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written
instructions, Coordination Drawings, original design, and referenced standards.
B. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts,

fittings, and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design
requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make
final locations where indicated, as much as practicable. For units installed in lay-in ceiling
panels, locate units in the center of the panel. Where architectural features or other items
conflict with installation, notify Engineer for a determination of final location.
C. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connection to ducts and to allow service
and maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as
directed, before starting air balancing.
3.4 CLEANING
A. After installation of diffusers, registers, and grilles, inspect exposed finish. Clean exposed
surfaces to remove burrs, dirt, and smudges. Replace diffusers, registers, and grilles that
have damaged finishes.
3.5 CEILING DIFFUSERS SCHEDULE
A. Round Ceiling Diffuser, SRCD, RRCD:
1. Devices shall be specifically designed for variable-air-volume flows.

2. Material: Aluminum.
3. Finish: Baked enamel, color selected by ID.
4. Face Style: Four cone.
5. Mounting: Duct connection.
6. Pattern: Fully adjustable.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
7. Dampers: Combination damper and grid.

8. Accessories:
a. Equalizing grid.
b. Plaster ring.
c. Safety chain.
d. Wire guard.
e. Sectorizing baffles.
f. Operating rod extension.
B. Square Ceiling Diffusers, SCD, RCD, ECD:

4. Face Size: 24 by 24 inches (600 by 600 mm), 20 by 20 inches (400 by 400 mm) and
12 by 12 inches (300 by 300 mm).
6. Mounting: Surface and Mounting panel.
7. Pattern: Adjustable.
9. Accessories:
a. Equalizing grid.
b. Plaster ring.
c. Safety chain.
d. Wire guard.
3.6 CEILING LINEAR SLOT OUTLETS SCHEDULE
A. Linear Bar Diffuser:

4. Narrow Core Spacing Arrangement: 1/8-inch- (3-mm-) thick blades spaced 1/4 inch
(6 mm) apart, zero-degree deflection.
5. Two-Way Deflection Vanes: Extruded construction fixed louvers with removable
core.
6. Frame: 3/16 inch (5 mm) wide.
7. Mounting Frame: Filter.
8. Mounting: Concealed bracket.
9. Damper Type: Adjustable opposed-blade assembly.
10. Accessories: [Plaster frame] [Directional vanes] [Alignment pins] [Core clips]
[Blank-off strips].
B. Linear Slot Diffuser, SSLD, RSLD:

2. Material - Shell: Aluminum, insulated.
3. Material - Pattern Controller and Tees: Aluminum.
4. Finish - Face and Shell: Baked enamel, black.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
5. Finish - Pattern Controller: Baked enamel, black.

6. Finish - Tees: Baked enamel, color selected by Engineer.
7. Slot Width: as per design requirement or shown on drawings.
8. Number of Slots: as per design requirement or shown on drawings.
9. Length: as per design requirement or shown on drawings.
10. Accessories: [Plaster frame] [T-bar slot] [Center notch] [T-bar on inlet side] [T-bar on
both sides] [T-bar clip on one side] [T-bar clips on both sides].
C. Ceiling-Integral Continuous Diffuser:

2. Section Length: as per design requirement or shown on drawings .
3. Straight and curved sections as required to accommodate layout.
4. Mitered tees and corners.
5. Pattern Controllers: 24 inches (600 mm) o.c.
6. Material: Aluminum, extruded, heavy wall.
7. Finishes:
a. Exterior: color as selected by Engineer.

b. Interior: color as selected by Engineer.
8. Throw: Standard.
9. Mounting: as per drawings and schedule.
10. Plenum: Insulated.
11. Other Features:
a. Painted interior.
b. Blank-offs.
3.7 JET NOZZLES SCHEDULE
A. Jet Nozzle:
1. Airflow Principle: Extended distance for high airflow rates.

3. Finish: Baked enamel, color as selected by Engineer.
4. Duct Connection: Round.
5. Duct Connection Size: As shown on drawings.
6. Face Size: as per design requirement or shown on drawings.
7. Maximum Noise-Criterion Rating: NC35.
8. Face Style: Round.
9. Air pattern: Adjustable, swivel deflection within +/- 30 degrees.
10. Mounting: Front mounting flange.
11. Accessories: Insulated supply air plenums.
3.8 REGISTERS AND GRILLES SCHEDULE
A. Adjustable Bar Register, SR, RR, ER:
2. Finish: Baked enamel, color selected by Engineer.
3. Face Blade Arrangement: Horizontal3/4 inch (19 mm) apart.
4. Core Construction: Removable.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
5. Frame: 1 inch (25 mm) wide.

7. Mounting: Concealed.
8. Damper Type: Adjustable opposed blade.
B. Adjustable Bar Grille:
1. Material: Aluminum].
3. Face Blade Arrangement: Horizontal spaced 3/4 inch (19 mm) apart.
C. Fixed Face Register:
3. Face Arrangement: 1/2-by-1/2-by-1/2-inch (13-by-13-by-13-mm) grid core.
D. Fixed Face Grille:
E. Linear Bar Grille
4. Distribution plenum.
a. Internal insulation.
b. Inlet damper.


E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
SECTION 233713 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES (Office Towers)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 DEFINITIONS
1.4 SUBMITTALS
ceilings and walls.

for the Work.
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES (Office Towers) 233713 - Page 1 of 8

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION

3.3 ADJUSTING
3.4 CLEANING
A. Round Ceiling Diffuser:


E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1

8. Accessories:
a. Equalizing grid.
b. Plaster ring.
c. Safety chain.
d. Wire guard.
B. Rectangular and Square Ceiling Diffusers:

4. Face Size: 24 by 24 inches (600 by 600 mm), 20 by 20 inches (400 by 400 mm) and
12 by 12 inches (300 by 300 mm).
9. Accessories:
a. Equalizing grid.
b. Plaster ring.
c. Safety chain.
d. Wire guard.
C. Perforated Diffuser:

2. Material: Steel backpan and pattern controllers, with steel or aluminum face.
4. Face Size: [12 by 12 inches (300 by 300 mm)], [24 by 24 inches (600 by 600 mm)] .
5. Duct Inlet: Round.
6. Face Style: Flush.
7. Mounting: Surface or Mounting panel.
8. Pattern Controller: Adjustable with louvered pattern modules at inlet.
10. Accessories:
a. Equalizing grid.
b. Plaster ring.
c. Safety chain.
d. Wire guard.
D. Louver Face Diffuser:

3. Finish: Baked enamel, color selected by ID

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1

5. Mounting: Surface, Surface with beveled frame or Mounting panel.
6. Pattern: Adjustable core style.
8. Accessories:
a. Square to round neck adaptor.

b. Adjustable pattern vanes.
c. Throw reducing vanes.
d. Equalizing grid.
e. Plaster ring.
f. Safety chain.
g. Wire guard.
h. Sectorizing baffles.
i. Operating rod extension.
A. Linear Bar Diffuser:

4. Narrow Core Spacing Arrangement: 1/8-inch- (3-mm-) thick blades spaced 1/4 inch
(6 mm) apart, zero-degree deflection.
5. Two-Way Deflection Vanes: Extruded construction fixed louvers with removable
core.
6. Frame: 3/16 inch (5 mm) wide.
8. Mounting: Concealed bracket.
9. Damper Type: Adjustable opposed-blade assembly.
10. Accessories: [Plaster frame] [Directional vanes] [Alignment pins] [Core clips]
[Blank-off strips].
B. Linear Slot Diffuser:

C. Ceiling-Integral Continuous Diffuser:


E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1

7. Finishes:

8. Throw: Standard.
11. Other Features:
b. Blank-offs.
3.7 UNDERFLOOR AIR DISTRIBUTION DIFFUSERS SCHEDULE
A. Round Induction Diffusers:
1. Airflow Principle: Swirl-pattern induction.

2. Material: Plastic, high impact, and resistant to cart and foot traffic.
3. Color: as selected by Engineer.
4. Components:
a. Diffuser core.
b. Flow regulator.
c. Dirt and liquid catch pan.
d. Spacer flange.
e. Gasketed, underfloor compression ring.
B. Linear Floor Diffuser Plenums:
1. Material: Steel.
2. Finish: as selected by Engineer.
3. Deflection: Zero degrees.
4. Components:
a. Aluminum diffuser core.

b. Diffuser frame.
c. Plenum, 0.034-inch (0.85-mm) steel.
3.8 HIGH-CAPACITY DIFFUSERS SCHEDULE
A. Drum Louver:

2. Material: Aluminum, heavy gage extruded.
3. Finish: as selected by Engineer.
4. Border: 1-1/4-inch (32-mm) width with countersunk screw holes.
5. Gasket between drum and border.
6. Body: Drum shaped; adjustable vertically.
7. Blades: Individually adjustable horizontally.
8. Mounting: Surface to duct or wall.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
9. Inlet Width: as per design requirement or shown on drawings.

10. Inlet Length: as per design requirement or shown on drawings.
11. Accessories:
a. Opposed-blade steel damper.

b. Duct-mounting collars with countersunk screw holes.
3.9 JET NOZZLES SCHEDULE
A. Jet Nozzle:

3. Finish: Baked enamel, color as selected by Engineer.
4. Duct Connection: Round.
5. Duct Connection Size: As shown on drawings.
7. Maximum Noise-Criterion Rating: NC35.
8. Face Style: Round.
9. Air pattern: Adjustable, swivel deflection within +/- 30 degrees.
10. Mounting: Front mounting flange.
11. Accessories: Insulated supply air plenums.
A. Adjustable Bar Register :

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
E. Linear Bar Grille <Insert drawing designation>:
4. Distribution plenum.
a. Internal insulation.
b. Inlet damper.


E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
SECTION 233713 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES (Residential Towers)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1.3 DEFINITIONS
1.4 SUBMITTALS
ceilings and walls.

for the Work.
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES (Residential Towers) 233713 - Page 1 of 5

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION

3.3 ADJUSTING
3.4 CLEANING
A. Round Ceiling Diffuser, SRCD, RRCD:


E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1

8. Accessories:
a. Equalizing grid.
b. Plaster ring.
c. Safety chain.
d. Wire guard.
B. Square Ceiling Diffusers, SCD, RCD, ECD:

4. Face Size: 24 by 24 inches (600 by 600 mm).
9. Accessories:
a. Equalizing grid.
b. Plaster ring.
c. Safety chain.
d. Wire guard.
A. Linear Slot Diffuser, SSLD, RSLD:

B. Ceiling-Integral Continuous Diffuser:

7. Finishes:

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1

8. Throw: Standard.
11. Other Features:
b. Blank-offs.
A. Adjustable Bar Register, SR, RR, ER:

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
SECTION 233813 - COMMERCIAL-KITCHEN HOODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes Type I and Type II commercial kitchen hoods.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Listed Hood: A hood, factory fabricated and tested for compliance with UL 710 by a testing
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Type I Hood: A hood designed for grease exhaust applications.
C. Type II Hood: A hood designed for heat and steam removal and for other nongrease
applications.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Standard hoods.
2. Filters/baffles.
3. Fire-suppression systems.
4. Lighting fixtures.
B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.
1. Shop Drawing Scale: 1/4 inch = 1 foot (1:50)

2. Show plan view, elevation view, sections, roughing-in dimensions, service
requirements, duct connection sizes, and attachments to other work.
3. Show cooking equipment plan and elevation to confirm minimum code-required
overhang.
4. Indicate performance, exhaust and makeup air airflow, and pressure loss at actual
Project-site elevation.
5. Show water-supply and drain piping connections.
6. Show control cabinets.
7. Show fire-protection cylinders, piping, actuation devices, and manual control devices.
8. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection.
9. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
10. Piping Diagrams: Detail fire-suppression piping and components and differentiate
between manufacturer-installed and field-installed piping. Include roughing-in
COMMERCIAL-KITCHEN HOODS 233813 - Page 1 of 10

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-ME-01 REV 1
requirements for drain connections. Show cooking equipment plan and elevation to
illustrate fire-suppression nozzle locations.
a. Piping Diagram Scale: 1/4 inch = 1 foot (1:50).
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following
items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items
involved:
1. Coordination Drawing Scale: 1/4 inch = 1 foot (1:50)

2. Suspended ceiling assembly components.
3. Structural members to which equipment will be attached.
4. Roof framing and support members for duct penetrations.
5. Items penetrating finished ceiling, including the following:
a. Lighting fixtures.
b. Air outlets and inlets.
c. Speakers.
d. Sprinklers.
e. Access panels.
f. Moldings on hoods and accessory equipment.
B. Welding certificates.
1. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and

locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
2. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is
based and their installation requirements.
C. Field quality-control test reports.
A. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings and comprehensive engineering

analysis by a qualified professional engineer.
B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D 1.1M, "Structural
Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports; and AWS D9.1/D9.1M, "Sheet Metal
Welding Code," for joint and seam welding.

NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and
marked for intended use.
D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements

in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate equipment layout and installation with adjacent Work, including lighting
fixtures, HVAC equipment, plumbing, and fire-suppression system components.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-ME-01 REV 1
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
1. Furnish onecomplete set(s) of grease filters/baffles.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 HOOD MATERIALS
A. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304.
1. Minimum Thickness: 0.050 inch (1.3 mm)

2. Finish: Comply with SSINA's "Finishes for Stainless Steel" for recommendations for
applying and designating finishes.
a. Finish shall be free from tool and die marks and stretch lines and shall have
uniform, directionally textured, polished finish indicated, free of cross
scratches. Grain shall run with long dimension of each piece.
3. Concealed Stainless-Steel Surfaces: ASTM A 480/A 480M, No. 2B finish (bright,

cold-rolled, unpolished finish).
4. Exposed Surfaces: ASTM A 480/A 480M, No. 4 finish (directional satin).
5. OR Exposed Surfaces: ASTM A 480/A 480M, No. 6 finish (dull satin).
6. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded
foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.
B. Carbon-Steel Sheets: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, cold-rolled sheets; commercial quality;

1. Minimum Thickness: 0.0478 inch (1.2 mm)NSF does not approve zinc-coated steel
for exposed surfaces.
C. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: Lock-forming quality; ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating
designation.
1. Minimum Thickness: 0.052 inch (1.32 mm)
D. Zinc-Coated Steel Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated according to

ASTM A 123/A 123M requirements.
E. Sealant: ASTM C 920; Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT. Elastomeric sealant shall be
NSF certified for commercial kitchen hood application. Sealants, when cured and washed,
shall comply with requirements in 21 CFR, Section 177.2600, for use in areas that come in
contact with food.
1. Color: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range.

2. Backer Rod: Closed-cell polyethylene, in diameter larger than joint width.
F. Sound Dampening: NSF-certified, nonabsorbent, hard-drying, sound-deadening compound

for permanent adhesion to metal in minimum 1/8-inch (3-mm) thickness that does not chip,
flake, or blister.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-ME-01 REV 1
G. Gaskets: NSF certified for end-use application indicated; of resilient rubber, neoprene, or
PVC that is nontoxic, stable, odorless, nonabsorbent, and unaffected by exposure to foods
and cleaning compounds, and that passes testing according to UL 710.
2.2 GENERAL HOOD FABRICATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Welding: Use welding rod of same composition as metal being welded. Use methods that
minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metal. Make
ductile welds free of mechanical imperfections such as gas holes, pits, or cracks.
1. Welded Butt Joints: Full-penetration welds for full-joint length. Make joints flat,
continuous, and homogenous with sheet metal without relying on straps under seams,
filling in with solder, or spot welding.
2. Grind exposed welded joints flush with adjoining material and polish to match
adjoining surfaces.
3. Where fasteners are welded to underside of equipment, finish reverse side of weld
smooth and flush.
4. Coat concealed stainless-steel welded joints with metallic-based paint to prevent
corrosion.
5. After zinc-coated steel is welded, clean welds and abraded areas and apply SSPC-
Paint 20, high-zinc-dust-content, galvanizing repair paint to comply with
ASTM A 780/A 780M.
B. For metal butt joints, comply with SMACNA's "Kitchen Ventilation Systems & Food
Service Equipment Guidelines."
C. Where stainless steel is joined to a dissimilar metal, use stainless-steel welding material or
fastening devices.
D. Form metal with break bends that are not flaky, scaly, or cracked in appearance; where
breaks mar uniform surface appearance of material, remove marks by grinding, polishing,
and finishing.
E. Sheared Metal Edges: Finish free of burrs, fins, and irregular projections.
F. In food zones, as defined in NSF, fabricate surfaces free from exposed fasteners.
G. Cap exposed fastener threads, including those inside cabinets, with stainless-steel lock
washers and stainless-steel cap (acorn) nuts.
H. Fabricate pipe slots on equipment with turned-up edges sized to accommodate service and
utility lines and mechanical connections.
I. Fabricate enclosures, including panels, housings, and skirts, to conceal service lines,
operating components, and mechanical and electrical devices including those inside
cabinets, unless otherwise indicated.
J. Fabricate equipment edges and backsplashes according to SMACNA's "Kitchen Ventilation

Systems & Food Service Equipment Guidelines."
K. Fabricate enclosure panels to ceiling and wall as follows:
1. Fabricate panels on [one] [two] [three] [four] [all exposed] side(s) with same material
as hood, and extend from ceiling to top of hood canopy and from canopy to wall.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-ME-01 REV 1
2. Wall Offset Spacer: Minimum of 3 inches (75 mm).

3. Wall Shelves and Overshelves: Fabricate according to SMACNA's "Kitchen
Ventilation Systems & Food Service Equipment Guidelines," with minimum 0.0625-
inch- (1.58-mm-) thick, stainless-steel shelf tops.
2.3 TYPE I EXHAUST HOOD FABRICATION
A. Weld all joints exposed to grease with continuous welds, and make filters/baffles or grease
extractors and makeup air diffusers easily accessible for cleaning.
1. Fabricate hoods according to NSF 2, "Food Equipment."

2. Hoods shall be listed and labeled, according to UL 710, by a testing agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Include access panels as required for access to fire dampers and fusible links.
4. Duct Collars: Minimum 0.0598-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick steel at least 3 inches (75 mm)
long, continuously welded to top of hood and at corners.[ Fabricate a collar with a
0.5-inch- (13-mm-) wide duct flange.]
5. Duct-Collar Fire Dampers: Collar and damper shall comply with UL 710 testing and
listing required for the entire hood.
a. Collar: Minimum 0.0598-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick stainless steel, at least 3

inches (75 mm) long, continuously welded to top of hood and at
corners.[ Fabricate a collar with a minimum 0.5-inch- (13-mm-) wide duct
flange.]
b. Blades: Minimum 0.1046-inch- (2.7-mm-) thick stainless steel,
counterbalanced to remain closed after actuation.
c. Blade Pivot and Spring: Stainless steel.
d. Fusible Link: Replaceable, 212 deg F (100 deg C) rated.
6. Makeup Air Fire Dampers: Labeled, according to UL 555, by a testing agency

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
a. Fire Rating: 1-1/2 hours.

b. Frame: SMACNA Type A or Type B, with blades in airstream; fabricated with
roll-formed, galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking corners.
c. Blades: Roll-formed, interlocking or folded, minimum 0.034-inch- (0.86-mm-)
thick, galvanized-steel sheet.
d. Horizontal Dampers: Include a blade lock and stainless-steel closure spring.
e. Fusible Link: Replaceable, 165 deg F (74 deg C)rated.
B. Hood Configuration: Exhaust only or/exhaust makeup air as per food service equipment
specifications
1. Makeup air shall be introduced by combination of induction and diffusion inside

canopy. If makeup air is not heated, insulate interior of makeup air plenum with
high-density insulation having maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes
of 25 and 50, respectively.
2. Makeup air shall be introduced through bottom of canopy through supply-air registers
with adjustable guide vanes.
C. Hood Style: Wall-mounted canopy or Single-island canopy or Double-island canopy as per

design drawings

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-ME-01 REV 1
D. Filters/Baffles: Removable, stainless-steel or aluminum, with spring-loaded fastening.

Fabricate stainless steel for filter frame and removable collection cup and pitched trough.
Exposed surfaces shall be pitched to drain to collection cup. Filters/baffles shall be tested
according to UL 1046, "Grease Filters for Exhaust Ducts," by an NRTL acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
E. Removable Water-Wash Grease Extractor: Stainless steel, tested with hood according to
UL 710.
F. Stationary Water-Wash Grease Extractor: Integral, automatically self-cleaning, spraying

hot water and detergent over the entire length of exhaust plenum. Fabricate to supply 140
deg F (60 deg C) water at 1.25 gpm/ft. (0.26 L/s per m) of hood length, at 40- to 60-psig
(276- to 414-kPa) inlet pressure.
1. Water Piping: ASTM A 270, Type 304 stainless steel.

2. Fabricate to drain water and detergent to a collection trough having stainless-steel
drain fittings.
3. Single, hood mounting control panel with a solid-state, programmable controller shall
control all hoods on Project. Wash cycle shall be factory set to operate for 10
minutes after fans stop.
4. Detergent shall be supplied by an adjustable-flow, 120-V ac injection pump from a
reservoir with a minimum capacity of 2.5 gal. (9.5 L).
G. Water-mist option shall supply a maximum of 0.1 gpm/ft. (0.02 L/s per m) of hood length
through stainless-steel piping and nozzles.
1. Water Piping: ASTM A 270, Type 304 stainless steel.
H. Lighting Fixtures: fixture type as per food service drawings and specifications with lenses
sealed vaportight. Wiring shall be installed in conduit on hood exterior. Number and
location of fixtures shall provide a minimum of 70 fc (753 lx) at 30 inches (762 mm) above
finished floor.
1. Light switches shall be mounted as per supplier recommendation

2. Lighting Fixtures: Fluorescent or Incandescent complying with UL 1598.
I. Comply with requirements in Sections "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC" and
"Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls" for hood controls.
1. Exhaust Fan: On-off switches shall start and stop the exhaust fan. Interlock exhaust
fan with makeup air supply fan to operate simultaneously. Interlock exhaust fan with
fire-suppression system to operate fan(s) during fire-suppression-agent release and to
remain in operation until manually stopped. Include red pilot light to indicate fan
operation. Motor starters shall comply with Section "Enclosed Controllers."
2. Exhaust Fan Interlock: Factory wire the exhaust fan starters in a single control
cabinet for adjacent hoods to operate together.
3. Photocell and Temperature Control: Vary speed of makeup air and exhaust-air fans
with variable-frequency controllers, based on temperature at hood discharge and
opacity of smoke in hood. Interlock fan control with fire-suppression system to
operate at high speed during fire-suppression-agent release and to remain in high-
speed operation until manually stopped. Provide air-purge fan and conduit to
photocell and reflector to avoid grease accumulation that will negatively affect
performance of system. Controller shall limit exhaust-duct velocity. Controller shall
limit supply quantity to be modulated by contractor for proper operation of makeup
air unit.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-ME-01 REV 1
4. High-Temperature Control: Alarm shall sound and cooking equipment shall shut
down before hood discharge temperature rises to actuation temperature of fire-
suppression system.
5. Water-Wash Timer: 24-hour clock, 365-day, programmable timer shall control
sequential wash of multiple hood sections.
6. Water Mist: Solenoid valve interlocked with exhaust fan to open with hood
operation.
J. Capacities and Characteristics:
2.4 Refer to project design drawings, schedule of equipment and food service equipment
drawings and specifications TYPE II EXHAUST HOOD FABRICATION
A. Fabricate hoods according to NSF 2, "Food Equipment."
B. Fabricate hoods to comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards: Metal
and Flexible."
C. Hood Configuration: Exhaust only
1. Makeup air shall be introduced by combination of induction and diffusion inside

canopy. If makeup air is not heated, insulate interior of makeup air plenum with
high-density insulation having maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes
of 25 and 50, respectively.
2. Makeup air shall be introduced through [front] [front and bottom] [bottom] of canopy
through supply-air registers.
D. Hood Type: Heat and vapor/ Condensate removal.
E. Hood Style: Wall-mounted canopy or Single-island canopy or Double-island canopy as per

design drawings
F. Condensate Hood Baffles: Removable, stainless-steel baffles to drain into a hood drain
trough, and stainless-steel drain piping.
G. Lighting Fixtures: as per supplier recommendation fixtures and lamps with lenses sealed
vaportight. Wiring shall be installed in stainless-steel conduit on hood exterior. Number
and location of fixtures shall provide a minimum of 70 fc (753 lx) at 30 inches (762 mm)
above finished floor.
1. Light switches shall be mounted [on front panel of hood canopy] [on wall adjacent to
hood] [in hood control panel].
2. Lighting Fixtures: [Fluorescent] [Incandescent] complying with UL 1598.
H. Capacities and Characteristics:
2.5 Refer to project design drawings, schedule of equipment and food service equipment
drawings and specificationsWET-CHEMICAL FIRE-SUPPRESSION SYSTEM
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following or approved equal:
1. Ansul Incorporated; a Tyco International Ltd. Company.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-ME-01 REV 1
2. Badger Fire Protection.

3. Kidde Fire Systems.
4. Pyro Chem.
B. Description: Engineered distribution piping designed for automatic detection and release or
manual release of fire-suppression agent by hood operator. Fire-suppression system shall be
listed and labeled for complying with NFPA 17A, "Wet Chemical Extinguishing Systems,"
by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Steel Pipe, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type S, Grade A,
Schedule 40, plain ends.
2. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Classes 150 and 300.
3. Piping, fusible links and release mechanism, tank containing the suppression agent,
and controls shall be factory installed. Controls shall be in stainless-steel control
cabinet mounted on [hood] [or] [wall]. Furnish manual pull station for wall
mounting. Exposed piping shall be covered with chrome-plated aluminum tubing.
Exposed fittings shall be chrome plated.
4. Liquid Extinguishing Agent: Noncorrosive, low-pH liquid.
5. Furnish electric-operated gas shutoff valveFurnish electric-operated gas shutoff valve
with clearly marked open and closed indicator for field installation.
6. Fire-suppression system controls shall be integrated with controls for fans, lights, and
fuel supply and located in a single cabinet for each group of hoods immediately
adjacent.
7. Wiring shall have color-coded, numbered terminal blocks and grounding bar. Spare
terminals for fire alarm, optional wiring to start fan with fire alarm, red pilot light to
indicate fan operation, and control switches shall all be factory wired in control
cabinet with relays or starters. Include spare terminals for fire alarm, and wiring to
start fan with fire alarm.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements
for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine roughing-in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections
before equipment installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Complete field assembly of hoods where required.
1. Make closed butt and contact joints that do not require filler.
2. Grind field welds on stainless-steel equipment smooth, and polish to match adjacent
finish. Comply with welding requirements in Part 2 "General Hood Fabrication
Requirements" Article.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-ME-01 REV 1
B. Install hoods and associated services with clearances and access for maintaining, cleaning,
and servicing hoods, filters/baffles, grease extractor, and fire-suppression systems according
to manufacturer's written instructions and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Make cutouts in hoods where required to run service lines and to make final connections,
and seal openings according to UL 1978.
D. Securely anchor and attach items and accessories to walls, floors, or bases with stainless-
steel fasteners, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Install hoods to operate free from vibration.
F. Install trim strips and similar items requiring fasteners in a bed of sealant. Fasten with
stainless-steel fasteners at 48 inches (1200 mm) o.c. maximum.
G. Install sealant in joints between equipment and abutting surfaces with continuous joint
backing, unless otherwise indicated. Provide airtight, watertight, vermin-proof, sanitary
joints.
H. Install lamps, with maximum recommended wattage, in equipment with integral lighting.
I. Set initial temperatures, and calibrate sensors.
J. Set field-adjustable switches.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
B. Install piping with clearance to allow service and maintenance.
C. Install reduced-pressure backflow preventer on washer-water supply. Backflow preventer is

specified in Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties."
D. Install washer-water drain piping full size of hood connection to an adjacent floor drain or
floor sink.
E. Makeup Water Connection: Comply with applicable requirements in Section "Domestic

Water Piping Specialties" for valves and accessories on piping connections to water-cooled
units.
F. Connect ducts according to requirements in Section "Air Duct Accessories." Install flexible
connectors on makeup air supply duct. Weld exhaust-duct connections with continuous
liquidtight joint.
G. Install fire-suppression piping for remote-mounted suppression systems according to

NFPA 17A, "Wet Chemical Extinguishing Systems."
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and
prepare test reports.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-ME-01 REV 1
B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect,

test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
Report results in writing.
C. Perform tests and inspections.
1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections,
and to assist in testing.
D. Tests and Inspections:
1. Test each equipment item for proper operation. Repair or replace equipment that is
defective, including units that operate below required capacity or that operate with
excessive noise or vibration.
2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls
and equipment.
3. Test water, drain, gas, and liquid-carrying components for leaks. Repair or replace
leaking components.
4. Perform hood performance tests required by authorities having jurisdiction.
5. Perform fire-suppression system performance tests required by authorities having
jurisdiction.
E. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain commercial kitchen hoods. Refer to Division 01
Section "Demonstration and Training."

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-ME-01 REV 1
SECTION 235100 - BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Type B gas vents.

2. Steel, positive-pressure, double-wall vents.
3. Fabricated metal breechings and chimneys.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities; shipping,
installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties; and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for breechings, chimneys, and
stacks. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work. Detail
assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field
assembly, components, hangers and seismic restraints, and location and size of each field
connection.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Detail power, signal, and control systems and differentiate
C. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel.
D. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
any other information required by Engineer.
E. Engineering Report: Certifying that stacks meet the design wind and seismic loads.
F. Maintenance Data: For vent fans to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing refractory-lined stacks

similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service
performance.
BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS 235100 - Page 1 of 6

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
B. Source Limitations: Obtain Type B vent system components through one source from a
single manufacturer.
C. Welding Standards: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M,

"Structural Welding Code--Steel," for hangers and supports, and AWS D9.1/D9.1M, "Sheet
Metal Welding Code," for duct joint and seam welding.
D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to Engineer.
E. Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for welder qualifications, welding details, and
workmanship standards.
F. Comply with SMACNA's "Guide for Steel Stack Construction."
G. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible" for
fabricated breechings.
H. Certified Sizing Calculations: Manufacturer shall certify venting system sizing calculations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 TYPE B GAS VENTS
A. Description: Double-wall gas vents rated for 248 deg C (480 deg F) continuously, with
neutral or negative flue pressure complying with NFPA 211, Type B suitable for use with
for certified gas appliances. Inner pipe of sheet aluminum, outer pipe of galvanized-steel
sheet, each with the following minimum thicknesses:
1. Round, 150-mm and Smaller ID: 0.30-mm inner pipe, 0.5-mm outer pipe.
2. Round, 175- to 450-mm ID: 0.35-mm inner pipe, 0.5-mm outer pipe.
3. Round, 500- to 600-mm ID: 0.45-mm inner pipe, 0.55-mm outer pipe.
4. Oval, 100-mm and Smaller Size: 0.30-mm inner pipe, 0.5-mm outer pipe.
5. Oval, 125- to 150-mm Size: 0.35-mm inner pipe, 0.5-mm outer pipe.
B. Accessories: Tees, elbows, increasers, draft hood connectors, metal cap with bird barrier,
adjustable roof flashing, storm collar, support assembly, thimbles, firestop spacers, and
fasteners; fabricated of similar materials and designs as vent-pipe straight sections.
2.2 STEEL, POSITIVE-PRESSURE, DOUBLE-WALL VENTS
A. Description: Double-wall metal stacks rated for 300 deg C (570 deg F) continuously, or 926
deg C (1700 deg F) for 10 minutes, complying with NFPA 211, suitable for use with
building heating equipment burning gas, solid, or liquid fuels.
B. Construction: Inner and outer metal shells separated by at least 13-mm airspace, with
positive sealing joints.
C. Inner Shell: ASTM A 666, Type 304 stainless steel of the following minimum thicknesses:
1. 150- to 900-mm Size: 0.90 mm thick.


E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
D. Outer Jacket: Aluminum-coated steel of the following minimum thicknesses:

E. Accessories: Tees, elbows, increasers, draft hood connectors, termination, adjustable roof
flashing, storm collar, support assembly, thimbles, firestop spacers, and fasteners; fabricated
of similar materials and designs as vent-pipe straight sections.
1. Termination: Stack cap designed to exclude 90 percent of rainfall.

2. Termination: Round chimney top designed to exclude 98 percent of rainfall.
3. Termination: Exit cone with drain section incorporated into riser.
2.3 FABRICATED METAL BREECHINGS AND CHIMNEYS
A. Fabricate breechings and chimneys from ASTM A 1011/A 1011M hot-rolled steel with
continuously welded joints, complying with NFPA 211 for minimum metal thickness.
1. Equal to or Less Than 0.099 Sq. m (1.069 Sq. Ft.) or 356 mm (14 Inches) in
Diameter: 1.35 mm (0.053 inch).
2. Up to 0.129 Sq. m (1.396 Sq. Ft.) or 406 mm (16 Inches) in Diameter: 1.7 mm (0.067
inch).
3. Up to 0.164 Sq. m (1.764 Sq. Ft.) () or 457 mm (18 Inches) in Diameter: 2.36 mm
(0.093 inch).
4. Larger Than Above: 3.12 mm (0.123 inch).
B. Fabricate chimneys and vent connectors from galvanized steel, complying with NFPA 211
for minimum metal thickness.
1. Equal to or Less Than 152 mm (6 Inches) in Diameter: 0.48 mm (0.019 inch).

2. Up to 254 mm (10 Inches) in Diameter: 0.61 mm (0.024 inch).
3. Up to 406 mm (16 Inches) in Diameter: 0.74 mm (0.029 inch).
4. Larger Than Above: 1.42 mm (0.056 inch).
C. Fabricate chimneys and vent connectors from ASTM B 209M (ASTM B 209), Type 1100 or
3003, aluminum or stainless steel, complying with NFPA 211 for the following minimum
metal thicknesses:
1. Aluminum: 0.69 mm (0.027 inch).

2. Stainless Steel: 0.31 mm (0.012 inch).
D. Fabricate cleanout doors from compatible material, same thickness as breeching, bolted and
gasketed.
2.4 GUYING AND BRACING MATERIALS
A. Cable: Galvanized, stranded wire of the following minimum thickness:

1. For ID Sizes Up to 600 mm: 9.5 mm in diameter.
B. Pipe: 32-mm diameter, galvanized steel.
C. Angle Iron: Galvanized steel 380 by 380 by 5 mm.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
and other conditions affecting performance of work.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 APPLICATION
A. Type B gas Vents: Vents for certified gas appliances.
B. Steel, positive-pressure, double-wall vents: Vents for building heating equipment burning
gas, solid, or liquid fuels.
C. Field-Fabricated Metal Breechings and Chimneys: Dual-fuel boilers, oven vents, water
heaters, exhaust for engines, fireplaces, and other solid-fuel-burning appliances.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF MANUFACTURED BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS
A. Install according to manufacturer's written instructions. Locate to comply with minimum

clearances from combustibles.
B. Install, support, and restrain according to requirements of seismic zone.
C. Seal between sections of positive-pressure vents according to manufacturer's written

installation instructions, using sealants recommended by manufacturer.
D. Support vents at intervals recommended by the manufacturer to support weight of vent and
all accessories, without exceeding loading of appliances.
1. Where maximum unsupported lengths of stack are exceeded, support chimneys as

follows:
a. Guy wires.
b. Rigid pipe braces.
c. Rigid angle-iron braces.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED BREECHINGS
A. Install concrete inserts in formwork to support breeching independent of its appliance

connection.
B. Assemble and erect fabricated breechings according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible."
C. Install, support, and restrain according to requirements of seismic zone.
D. Align breechings at connections, with smooth internal surface and 3-mm misalignment
tolerance.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
E. Slope breechings down to appliance, with condensate drain connection at lowest point piped
to nearest drain.
F. Install accessories, dampers, fans, equipment, controls, and other supports.
G. Anchor breechings to building structure with bolts, concrete inserts, steel expansion
anchors, welded studs, C-clamps, or special beam clamps.
H. Support vertical stacks at 3.6-m intervals by attaching to adjacent vertical structural surfaces
or by direct bearing at floor penetrations and similar locations.
1. 600 mm and Smaller: Use straps or formed angles 38 by 1.6 mm.

2. Larger Than 600 mm: Use steel angle brackets 38 by 3 mm.
I. Support horizontal round breechings with girth strap and strap hanger (of same size). Install
pair of strap hangers bolted to opposite sides of angle reinforcing rings or flanged joints.
Support breechings at 3000-mm intervals with hangers as follows for corresponding
diameters:
1. 750 mm and Smaller Diameter: Strap hangers 25 by 1.6 mm.

2. 775- to 1200-mm Diameter: Strap hangers 38 by 1.6 mm.
3. 1225- to 2100-mm Diameter: Pairs of strap hangers 38 by 1.6 mm.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF DAMPERS
A. Install barometric and thermostatically operated dampers according to manufacturer's

written instructions. Locate as close to draft hood collar as possible.
3.6 CLEANING
A. After completing system installation, including terminals, inspect exposed finishes.

Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finish to match
original finish.
B. Clean breechings internally, during and on completion of installation, to remove dust and
debris. Clean external surfaces to remove welding slag and mill film. Grind welds smooth.
C. Provide temporary closures at ends of breechings and chimneys that are not completed or
connected to equipment.
3.7 COMMISSIONING
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service for fans.
B. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions,

and confirm fan interlocks.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
3.8 DEMONSTRATION

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain fans. Refer to Division 1.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
SECTION 235239 - FIRE-TUBE BOILERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes packaged, factory-assembled and -tested, fuel-fired, fire-tube boilers
and accessories used for heating hot-water systems.
B. This Section includes packaged, factory-assembled and -tested, fuel-fired, fire-tube boilers
and accessories used for steam generation.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
specialties; and accessories for each model indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, required clearances,
method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.
C. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that fire-tube boiler,

accessories, and components relevant to the life safety system will withstand seismic forces
defined in "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment" Section when
anchored to a concrete base. Include the following:
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual

test of assembled components or on calculation.
a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation
of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."

D. Source Quality Control Tests and Inspection Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for
compliance with performance requirements before shipping.
FIRE-TUBE BOILERS 235239 - Page 1 of 8

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
E. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
F. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include in the operation and maintenance manuals
specified in Division 1. Include parts list, maintenance guide, and wiring diagrams for each
boiler.
A. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated components specified in this Section
1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the NFPA 70, Article 100.
B. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label boilers to comply with the ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code: Section IV, "Heating Boilers."
C. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 Compliance: Boilers shall have minimum efficiency according to

"Gas and Oil Fired Boilers - Minimum Efficiency Requirements."
D. FM Compliance: Control devices and control sequences according to requirements of FM.
E. I=B=R Compliance: Boilers tested and rated according to the Hydronics Institute's "Rating
Procedure for Heating Boilers" and "Testing Standard for Commercial Boilers," with I=B=R
emblem on a nameplate affixed to the boiler.
F. IRI Compliance: Control devices and control sequences according to requirements of IRI.
G. Comply with NFPA 70 for electrical components and installation.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork
requirements are specified in Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide a written warranty, signed by the manufacturer for the
heat exchanger.
1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
2.2 HORIZONTAL FIRE-TUBE BOILERS
A. Description: Packaged, horizontal fire-tube boilers, multipass, dry-back or wet-back type,

factory-fabricated, -assembled, -tested and wired to require only supply, return, fuel, blow-
down, electrical, and vent connections.
1. Type: Dry-back type.
B. Minimum heat-exchanger surface of 2.1 sq. m/10 kW (5 sq. ft./bhp).
C. Mount boiler on heavy-steel base frame, complete with integral forced-draft burner, burner
controls, boiler trim, and refractory.
D. Lifting Lugs: 2, permanently attached to top of boiler.
E. Access: Manufacturer's standard number of handholes in boiler shell, and manhole on

boilers over 1200 mm in diameter.
F. Front and Rear Doors: Hinged or davited, sealed with heat-resistant gaskets, and fastened
with lugs and cap screws. Designed so tube sheets and flues are fully accessible for
inspection and for cleaning when doors are open. Include observation ports at both ends of
boiler for inspection of flame conditions.
G. Refractory: Refractory and insulation in-door construction, accessible for inspection and
maintenance.
H. Exhaust-Gas Vent: On boiler top, complete with exhaust-gas thermometer.
I. Insulation and Jacket: Minimum of 50-mm thick, glass fiber or mineral-wool-blanket

insulation on boiler shell, covered with galvanized sheet-metal jacket.
J. Painting: Factory-applied, enamel finish on boiler, base frame, and components' assembly.
2.3 HOT-WATER BOILER TRIM
A. Safety-Relief Valves: ASME rated, factory set to protect boiler and piping.
B. Water Connections: Internal thermal circulation to mix return water with water in boiler.
C. Drain Valves: At low points.
D. Dip Tube: Integral part of the water outlet and air-vent tapping in boiler shell for removing
entrained air.
E. Low-Water Cutoff: Mounted on side of boiler; factory wired into burner control circuit to
prevent burner operation if boiler water falls below a safe level.
F. Low-Water Cutoff: Probe type, factory wired into burner control circuit to prevent burner
operation if boiler water falls below a safe level.
G. Pressure Gages: Mounted on boiler, 100 mm (4 inches) in diameter, with range to suit
operating pressure.
H. Temperature Gages: Mounted on boiler, with temperature-sensing element located adjacent

to water outlet.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
I. Temperature Controls: Temperature-sensing elements mounted adjacent to water outlet to

regulate burner operation.
J. Safety Controls: High-pressure limit control.
2.4 COMBINATION GAS/OIL BURNERS
A. Fuel: Natural gas.
B. Fuel: No. 2 fuel oil.
C. Combination burner, pressure-atomizing type for oil and high-radiant, multiport type for
gas. Burner integral with front head of boiler and approved for operation with commercial
No. 2 fuel oil and natural, manufactured, or mixed gas.
D. Changeover selector switch, with combustion control relay, provides proper ignition timing
for fuel being burned. Changing fuels requires no changes in linkage, burner position, or
mechanical adjustment.
E. Gas Pilot: Premix type with automatic electric ignition, with electronic detector to monitor
pilot. Primary fuel valve cannot open until pilot flame has been established.
F. Burner Operation and Combustion-Air Control: Full-modulation principle, 4-to-1 turndown

ratio. Motor-operated combustion-air damper and cam-operated, butterfly gas-metering
valve, operated by a single damper-control motor. Regulate fire according to load demand.
Operate damper motor by potentiometer positioning controls. Return burner to low-fire
position for ignition.
G. Forced-Draft Burner Blower: On front of boiler, cast-aluminum blower wheel and radial
blades directly connected to flanged-type motor.
H. Gas-Piping Train: Integrally mounted, with lubricated plug cock located upstream from
primary valve for manual shutoff, plugged leakage test cock, second lubricated plug cock,
and the following:
1. Primary gas shutoff valve, motor operated with spring return, starts and stops gas
burner, and closes automatically in the event of power failure, flame failure, or low-
water condition.
2. Proof-of-closure switch on primary valve, and high- and low-gas-pressure switches.
3. Second motorized, safety shutoff valve and additional plugged leakage test cock, with
proof-of-closure switch and manual reset.
4. Vent valve located between safety shutoff valves.
I. Separate atomizing air-compressor module mounted on boiler base rail.
J. Oil Pilot: Atomizing type for automatic electric ignition with electronic detector to monitor
pilot. Primary oil valve cannot open until pilot flame has been established.
K. Oil Pump: Integral with burner, delivers twice the capacity of maximum burning rate.
L. Oil-Piping Train: Integrally mounted, including oil-pressure-regulating devices, oil-

metering controls, solenoid shutoff valves, pressure gages, and fuel oil strainer.
M. Emission Controls: Guarantee nitrous-oxide performance at 30 ppm, dry volume corrected

to 3 percent oxygen.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
2.5 BOILER MANAGEMENT CONTROL SYSTEM
A. Computer-based controller with nonvolatile memory and solid-state sensors providing

burner sequencing; flame supervision; and indication of system status, faults, and
diagnostics.
B. Controller consists of chassis, program module, keyboard display, and flame signal
amplifier, with fixed operating sequence including standby, prepurge, pilot, main fuel
ignition and run, and postpurge periods.
C. Liquid-crystal display and keyboard to adjust control settings, with display of fault
messages, diagnostic messages, status messages, history of messages, and operating
pressures and temperatures.
1. Status indicates system ready, demand, fuel-valve open, low water, and safety
shutdown alarms.
D. Sensor inputs include gas pressure, oil pressure, temperature, and burner control.
E. Communications: Integral modem provides remote control for up to 6 boilers with

microcomputer interface.
2.6 CONTROL PANEL
A. Motor controllers, relays, and control switches factory assembled in NEMA 250, Type 1A
enclosure, mounted on front of boiler. Panel shall be able to communicate with Building
Management System as described in Section 230900. Communications shall include status
and control. Include the following options:
1. Plug-in fuel modules.

2. Indicating lights for low water level, flame failure, fuel-valve open, and load demand.
3. Programming relay controls ignition timing and starting and stopping boiler through
precombustion and postcombustion purge.
4. Flame scanner shuts down boiler if ignition, pilot, or main flame fails.
5. Gas/oil selector switch.
6. Manual/automatic selector switch and damper motor-positioning switch permit
automatic firing according to load demand, or manual control of firing rate at any
desired point between low fire and maximum rating.
7. Oil-, heat-, and moisture-resistant wire.
2.7 MOTORS
A. Refer to "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment" Section for factory-
installed motors.
C. Enclosure Type: Open dripproof motors where satisfactorily housed or remotely located
during operation.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
A. Test and inspect boilers according to the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,
Section IV for low-pressure boilers and Section I for high-pressure boilers.
B. Burner and Hydrostatic Test: Factory adjust burner to eliminate excess oxygen, carbon
dioxide, oxides of nitrogen emissions, and carbon monoxide in flue gas and to achieve
combustion efficiency; perform hydrostatic test.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine area to receive boiler for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances
and other conditions affecting boiler performance. Do not proceed with installation until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install boilers level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written instructions and
referenced standards.
B. Install gas-fired boilers according to NFPA 54.
C. Support boilers on minimum 100-mm thick reinforced concrete base, 100 mm larger on
each side than base of unit. Dowel base to floor on 450-mm centers along perimeter of
base. Cast anchor-bolt inserts through base into floor.
D. Assemble boiler trim according to manufacturer's written installation instructions.
E. Install electrical devices furnished with boiler, but not specified to be factory mounted.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect gas piping full size to boiler gas-train inlet with union.
B. Connect oil piping full size to burner inlet with shutoff valve and union.
C. Connect hot-water piping to supply- and return-boiler tappings with shutoff valve and union
or flange at each connection.
D. Install piping from safety-relief valves to nearest floor drain.
E. Connect breeching to boiler outlet, full size of outlet.
F. Electrical: Comply with to applicable requirements in Division 26 Sections.
G. Ground equipment.


E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1

supervise the field assembly of components and installation of boilers, including piping and
electrical connections. Report results in writing.
and equipment.
B. Hydrostatically test assembled boiler and piping, according to applicable sections of the
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Flush and clean boilers on completion of installation, according to manufacturer's written

instructions.
B. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed
finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finishes including
chips, scratches, and abrasions with manufacturer's touchup paint.
3.6 COMMISSIONING
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to provide startup service.
B. Verify that installation is as indicated and specified.
1. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's submittal and
installation requirements in Division 26 Sections. Do not proceed with boiler startup
until wiring installation is acceptable to equipment Installer.
C. Complete manufacturer's installation and startup checklist and verify the following:
1. Boiler is level on concrete base.

2. Flue and chimney are installed without visible damage.
3. No damage is visible to boiler jacket, refractory, or combustion chamber.
4. Pressure-reducing valves are checked for correct operation and specified relief
pressure. Adjust as required.
5. Clearances have been provided and piping is flanged for easy removal and servicing.
6. Heating circuit pipes have been connected to correct ports.
7. Labels are clearly visible.
8. Boiler, burner, and flue are clean and free of construction debris.
9. Burner blower rotates in correct direction.
10. Pressure and temperature gages are installed.
11. Control installations are completed.
D. Ensure pumps operate properly.
E. Check operation of pressure-reducing valve on gas train, including venting.
F. Check that fluid-level, flow-switch, and high-temperature interlocks are in place.
G. Start pumps and boilers, and adjust burners for maximum operating efficiency.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
1. Fill out startup checklist and attach copy with Contractor Startup Report.
2. Check and record performance of factory-provided boiler protection devices and
firing sequences.
3. Check and record performance of boiler fluid-level, flow-switch, and high-
temperature interlocks.
4. Run-in boilers as recommended or required by manufacturer.
H. Perform the following tests for each firing rate for high/low burners and for 100, 66, and 33
percent load for modulating burners. Adjust boiler combustion efficiency at each firing rate.
Measure and record the following:
1. Gas pressure on manifold.

2. Combustion-air temperature at inlet to burner.
3. Flue-gas temperature at boiler discharge.
4. Flue-gas carbon-dioxide and oxygen concentration.
5. Natural flue draft.
I. Measure and record water flow rate, pressure drops, and temperature rise through each
boiler.
J. Inspect expansion tank, makeup water meter, tank pressure, pressure-reducing valve, water
level, and backflow preventer.
3.7 DEMONSTRATION

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain boilers. Refer to Division 1.
1. Schedule at least sixteen (16) hours of training.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
SECTION 235700 - HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes plate heat exchangers for HVAC applications.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. TEMA: Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
specialties; and accessories for each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads,
field connection.
1. Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments to structure

and to supported equipment.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Equipment room, drawn to scale, on which the following items are
shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:
1. Tube-removal space.
2. Structural members to which heat exchangers will be attached.
B. Source quality-control reports as per Quality Assurance clause requirements.
C. Commissioning Report: As specified in "Commissioning" Article in Part 3 of this Section.

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For heat exchangers to include in operation and
HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR HVAC 235700 - Page 1 of 5

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A4-ME-01 REV 1
A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, performance, and dimensional

requirements of heat exchangers and are based on the specific equipment selected. Other
manufacturers' products with equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to
Division 1 Section "Product Requirements."
B. ASME Compliance: Fabricate, test and label heat exchangers to comply with ASME Boiler
and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, "Pressure Vessels," Division 1.
C. Hydrostatically test heat exchangers to minimum of one and one-half times pressure rating
before shipment.
D. Prepare and submit test and inspection reports.
A. All components of PHE including frame support, fixed and movable end plates, tie rods &
gaskets shall be manufactured in the country of origin , boxed up & shipped as a one piece
ready for hook up
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or

replace components of domestic-water heat exchangers that fail in materials or

weathering and use.
8. Structural failures including heat exchanger, storage tank, and supports.
9. Faulty operation of controls.
D. Warranty Periods: From date of Substantial Completion.
a. Plate, Domestic-Water Heat Exchangers:
1) Plate-and-Frame Type: One year(s).

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A4-ME-01 REV 1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
2.2 GASKETED-PLATE HEAT EXCHANGERS
A. The vendor shall provide the following information and details:

1. Effective heat transfer area.
2. Total number of plates.
3. Heat transfer area per plate.
4. Technical calculations for overall heat transfer coefficient.
B. Thermal performance: manufacturer shall provide written confirmation that the plate heat
exchangers comply with AHRI 400-2001 “Liquid to Liquid Heat Exchangers” standard and
subsequent addendums. Data sheets according to AHRI 400 shall be included in the
submittals for verification.
C. Configuration: Freestanding assembly consisting of frame support, top and bottom carrying
and guide bars, fixed and movable end plates, tie rods, individually removable plates, and
one-piece gaskets.
D. Frame:
1. Capacity to accommodate 20 percent additional plates.

2. Painted carbon steel with provisions for anchoring to support.
E. Top and Bottom Carrying and Guide Bars: Painted carbon steel, aluminum, or stainless
steel.
1. Fabricate attachment of heat-exchanger carrying and guide bars with reinforcement

strong enough to resist heat-exchanger movement during seismic event when heat-
exchanger carrying and guide bars are anchored to building structure.
F. End-Plate Material: Painted carbon steel with stainless steel tie-rods and nuts.
G. Plate Material: ASTM A 666, Type 316 stainless-steel shell, 0.6mm minimum thickness.
H. Gasket Material: Nitrile rubber.
I. Gasket Material: EPDM.
J. Gasket Material: Butyl.
K. Gasket Material: Viton.
L. Piping Connections: Factory fabricated of materials compatible with heat-exchanger shell.

Attach tappings to shell before testing and labeling.
1. DN 50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: Threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1.

2. DN 65 (NPS 2-1/2) and Larger: Flanged ends according to ASME B16.5 for steel and
stainless-steel flanges and according to ASME B16.24 for copper and copper-alloy
flanges.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A4-ME-01 REV 1
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and for
structural rigidity, strength, anchors, and other conditions affecting performance of heat
exchangers.
B. Examine roughing-in for heat-exchanger piping to verify actual locations of piping

connections before equipment installation.
3.2 HEAT EXCHANGER INSTALLATION
A. Install heat exchangers according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install shell-and-tube heat exchangers on saddle supports with provisions to drain shell.
C. Heat exchangers shall be insulated. Comply with requirements of section 230716 “HVAC
Equipment Insulation”. Coordinate with manufacturer’s recommendations as necessary.
D. Provide factory fabricated aluminum removable and reusable insulation shroud for each heat
exchanger. The insulation shroud shall be designed for easy removal and replacement to
facilitate cleaning, inspection and maintenance of plates.
E. Provide insulated galvanized, drainable drip trays beneath each chilled water heat
exchanger. The drip tray consists of 0.75 mm hot galvanized steel plates, 50 mm
polyurethane foam, supports, and a draining valve.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
B. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances for service and maintenance. Install

piping connections to allow service and maintenance of heat exchangers.
C. Install piping with threaded or flanged connections at heat exchangers.
D. Install shutoff valves at heat exchanger inlet and outlet connections.
E. Install relief valves on heat exchanger heated-fluid connection.
F. Install vacuum breaker at heat exchanger steam inlet connection.
G. Install thermometer on heat-exchanger inlet and outlet piping, and install thermometer on
heating-fluid inlet and outlet piping. Comply with requirements for thermometers specified
in Section 230519 "Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping."
H. Install pressure gages on heat-exchanger and heating-fluid piping. Comply with

requirements for pressure gages specified in Section 230519 "Meters and Gages for HVAC
Piping."

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A4-ME-01 REV 1
3.4 CLEANING
A. After completing system installation, including outlet fitting and devices, inspect exposed
finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finishes.
3.5 COMMISSIONING
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service and report

results in writing.
B. Verify that heat exchangers are installed and connected according to the Contract
Documents.
C. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until
no leaks exist.
D. Adjust flows and controls to deliver specified performance.
E. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain heat exchangers. Refer to Division 1 Section
1. Schedule at least four (4) hours of training.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A4-ME-01 REV 1
SECTION 236313 - AIR-COOLED REFRIGERANT CONDENSERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes packaged, air-cooled condensing units that contain condenser coils
and fans housed in a weatherproof casing for outdoor installation.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities; operating characteristics, shipping, installed, and
operating weights; furnished specialties; and accessories for each model indicated.
required clearances, method of field assembly, components, location, and size of each field
connection.
C. Source Quality Control Reports: as specified in clause "Source Quality Control".
D. Field Test and Commissioning Reports: As specified in "Field Quality Control" and
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each air-cooled condenser to include in the operation
and maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
A. Listing and Labeling: Provide equipment and accessories specified in this Section that are
listed and labeled.
B. Fabricate and label refrigeration system according to ASHRAE 15 and 34 Package, "Safety
Standard for Refrigeration Systems."
AIR-COOLED REFRIGERANT CONDENSERS 236313 - Page 1 of 5

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
C. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1,

Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."
D. Comply with NFPA 70 for electrical power and control wiring.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete housekeeping bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into
pad. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Section "Cast-in-
Place Concrete."
B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. Roof
specialties are specified in Section "Roof Accessories."
C. Coordinate locations for refrigerant piping and electrical rough-ins.
1.7 WARRANTY

repair or replace components of the air-cooled refrigerant condensers that fail in materials or

use.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Description: Factory assembled and tested; consisting of casing, condenser coils, condenser
fans and motors, and unit controls.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
B. Refrigerant: R-407C or R-410A.
C. Condensing Coil: Seamless copper-tube, aluminum-fin coil; factory tested at 2930 kPa (425
psig). Circuit to match compressors.
D. Condenser Fans and Drives: Propeller fans for vertical or horizontal air discharge; directly
driven with permanently lubricated ball-bearing motors with integral current- and thermal-
1. Low Ambient Control: Factory-installed damper assembly, fan-speed control, or fan-

cycling control.
E. Operating and Safety Controls: Include condenser fan motor thermal and overload cutouts;
220-V control transformer, if required; magnetic contactors for condenser fan motors and an
unfused factory-mounted and -wired disconnect switch for single external electrical power
connection.
F. Unit Casings: Steel, galvanized or zinc coated, for exposed casing surfaces, treated and
finished with manufacturer's standard paint coating, designed for outdoor installation with
weather protection for components and controls, and with removable panels for access to
controls, condenser fans, motors, and drives.
2.2 MOTORS
A. Verification of Performance: Rate condensing units according to AHRI 210/240 for units
smaller than 135,000 BTUH (39 500 W).
B. Verification of Performance: Rate condensing units according to AHRI 340/360 for units
135,000 BTUH (39 500 W) and larger.
C. Testing Requirements: Factory test sound-power-level ratings according to AHRI 270 for
units smaller than 135,000 BTUH (39 500 W).
D. Testing Requirements: Factory test sound-power-level ratings according to AHRI 370 for
units 135,000 BTUH (39 500 W) and larger.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of air-
cooled refrigerant condensers.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
B. Examine roughing-in for refrigerant piping systems to verify actual locations of piping
connections before equipment installation.
C. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where air-cooled condensers will be
installed.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install air-cooled condensers according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install units level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written instructions, Shop
Drawings, original design, and referenced standards.
C. Install ground-mounted units on minimum 100-mm thick, reinforced concrete base, 100 mm
larger than condenser unit on each side. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork
requirements are specified in Division 3. Coordinate installation of anchoring devices.
D. Install roof-mounted units on equipment supports specified in Division 7. Anchor unit to

supports with removable fasteners.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.
B. Refrigerant Piping: Comply with applicable requirements of Section "Refrigerant Piping."

Connect piping to unit with pressure relief, service valve, filter dryer, and moisture indicator
on each refrigerant-circuit liquid line.
C. Electrical: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 26.

those specified in UL 486A - 486B.
A. Leak Test: After installation, charge systems with refrigerant and oil and test for leaks.
Repair leaks and replace lost refrigerant and oil.
B. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper
operation, product capability, and compliance with requirements.
and equipment.
C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units with new units and retest.
D. Report test results in writing.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
3.5 CLEANING
finish. Clean to remove burrs and construction debris and repair damaged finishes.
3.6 COMMISSIONING

results in writing.
B. Verify that units are installed and connected according to the Contract Documents.
C. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions

and do the following:
1. Inspect for physical damage to unit casing.

2. Verify that access doors move freely and are weathertight.
3. Clean units and inspect for construction debris.
4. Check that all bolts and screws are tight.
5. Adjust vibration isolation and flexible connections.
6. Verify that controls are connected and operational.
D. Lubricate bearings on fans.
E. Verify that fan wheel is rotating in the correct direction and is not vibrating or binding.
F. Adjust fan belts to proper alignment and tension.
G. Start unit according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Complete manufacturer's starting checklist.
H. Measure and record airflow over coils.
I. Check operation of low ambient control device.
J. Verify that vibration isolation and flexible connections properly dampen vibration
transmission to structure.
K. After startup and performance test, lubricate bearings and adjust belt tension.
3.7 DEMONSTRATION

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain air-cooled condenser units. Refer to Division 1
Section "Demonstration and Training part of Closeout Procedures."

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
SECTION 237200 - AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Heat wheels.
2. Fixed-plate heat exchangers.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 237313 “Modular Central-Station Air-Handling Units”.
A. Delegated Design: Design vibration isolation and seismic-restraint relevant to the life safety
system details, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional
engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.
B. Seismic Performance: Air-to-air energy recovery equipment relevant to the life safety
system shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ECP201
and ASCE/SEI 7.
1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any
parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will
be fully operational after the seismic event."
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data including rated capacities of selected models, operating characteristics,

weights (shipping, installed, and operating), furnished specialties, accessories, and
installation and startup instructions.

C. Wiring diagrams detailing wiring for power and control systems and differentiating between
D. Delegated-Design Submittal relevant to the life safety system: For air-to-air energy recovery
equipment indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria,
AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT 237200 - Page 1 of 6

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible
for their preparation.
1. Detail fabrication and assembly of air-to-air energy recovery equipment.

2. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and
attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include adjustable motor bases,
rails, and frames for equipment mounting.
seismic restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases.
E. Coordination Drawings: Plans, elevations, and other details, drawn to scale, on which the
following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from Installers of
the items involved:
1. Suspended ceiling components.

2. Structural members to which equipment or suspension systems will be attached.
F. Seismic Qualification Certificates relevant to the life safety system: For air-to-air energy
recovery equipment, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test
of assembled components or on calculation.
G. Field Commissioning Reports: As specified in "Commissioning" Article in Part 3 of this

Section. Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements.
H. Operation and Maintenance data for each energy recovery unit, control, and accessory to
include in the operation and maintenance manual specified in Division 1.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain air-to-air energy recovery units through one source from a single
manufacturer.
B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of air-to-
air energy recovery units and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1
Section "Product Requirements".
1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by architect, except with
Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive
explanatory data to Architect for review.
C. ARI Compliance:
1. Capacity ratings for air-to-air energy recovery equipment shall comply with
ARI 1060, "Performance Rating of Air-to-Air Heat Exchangers for Energy Recovery
Ventilation Equipment."
2. Capacity ratings for air coils shall comply with ARI 410, "Forced-Circulation Air-
Cooling and Air-Heating Coils."

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
D. ASHRAE Compliance:
1. Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment" and

Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."
2. Capacity ratings for air-to-air energy recovery equipment shall comply with
ASHRAE 84, "Method of Testing Air-to-Air Heat Exchangers."
E. NRCA Compliance: Provide roof curbs for roof-mounted equipment constructed according
to recommendations of NRCA.
F. UL Compliance:
1. Packaged heat recovery ventilators shall comply with requirements in UL 1812,

"Ducted Heat Recovery Ventilators"; or UL 1815, "Nonducted Heat Recovery
Ventilators."
2. Electric coils shall comply with requirements in UL 1995, "Heating and Cooling
Equipment."
G. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete housekeeping bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into
base. Concrete reinforcement and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3
Sections.
B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. Roof
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
B. Filters: Furnish one set of each type of filter specified.
C. Fan Belts: Furnish one set of belts for each belt-driven fan in energy recovery units.
D. Wheel Belts: Furnish one set of belts for each heat wheel.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 HEAT WHEELS
A. Casing: Steel with manufacturer's standard paint coating. Include the following:
1. Integral purge section.

2. Casing seals on periphery of rotor, on duct divider, and on purge section.
3. Support rotor on grease-lubricated ball bearings with extended grease fittings. Mount
horizontal wheels on tapered roller bearing.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
B. Rotor: Corrugated aluminum strengthened with radial spokes, with nontoxic, noncorrosive
silica-gel desiccant coating. Construct media for passing maximum 800 micron solids and
maximum 0.04 percent cross contamination by volume of exhaust air. Drive rotor with belt
around outside of rotor.
C. Drive: Constant-speed, fractional horsepower motor and gear reducer.
D. Drive: Variable-speed, fractional horsepower motor and gear reducer, with speed changed
from SCR (silicon-controlled rectifier) controller.
E. Controls: Starting relay, factory mounted and wired, and manual motor starter for field
wiring.
F. Controls: Panel, factory mounted and wired to motor with airstream thermostat and manual
motor starter for field wiring; with pilot-light indication of rotor rotation and provisions for
setting maximum and minimum speed.
G. Changeover Control: Electronic automatic summer changeover system for field mounting
of room and outdoor air temperature sensors, to provide maximum rotor speed when room
air temperature is less than outdoor air temperature.
H. Rotation Detection: Electronic control module, electromagnetic sensor, and iron shuttle
factory wired and mounted, with alarm bell for field wiring and mounting, and remote alarm
capability.
2.2 FIXED-PLATE HEAT EXCHANGERS
A. Casing: Aluminum with ends flanged for duct connections.
B. Casing: Galvanized steel with ends flanged for duct connections.
C. Casing: Enameled steel with ends flanged for duct connections.
1. Insulation: 13-mm thick, foil-faced glass fiber.
D. Plates: Construct with plates evenly spaced and sealed, arranged for counterflow airflow as
indicated.
1. Plate Material: Embossed aluminum.

2. Plate Material: Stainless steel.
3. Plate Material: Polypropylene copolymer (high-density plastic).
4. Plate Coating: Air-dried phenolic.
E. Bypass: Construct bypass plenum within casing with gasketed face and bypass dampers,
with rods extended outside casing for damper operator and linkage.
F. Water wash: Automatic system with spray manifold to individual spray tubes or traversing
type with stainless-steel screw and electric motor drive, activated by time clock, with
detergent injection.
G. Accessories:
1. Filter: 25 mm (1 inch) thick, disposable

2. Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1 insulated.
3. Humidistat: Wall mounted, adjustable.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
4. Weather hoods (wall caps) with 6-mm (1/4-inch) bird screen and insulated flexible
duct termination.
5. Sound muffler.
6. Electric duct heater as per design drawings and schedule of equipment
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas to receive energy recovery units for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of energy recovery units.
Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install energy recovery units as indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install heat wheels so supply and exhaust flow in opposite directions and rotation is from
exhaust side to purge section to supply side.
1. Provide access doors in both supply and exhaust ducts, both upstream and
downstream, for access to wheel surfaces, drive motor, and seals.
2. Provide removable panels or access doors between supply and exhaust ducts on
building side for bypass during startup.
C. Install fixed-plate heat exchangers so supply and exhaust flow in opposite directions.
1. Install duct access doors in both supply and exhaust ducts, both upstream and
downstream, for access to heat exchanger.
D. Install floor-mounted units on 100-mm high concrete housekeeping base.
E. Install new filters at completion of equipment installation and before testing, adjusting, and
balancing.
F. Install wind and seismic restraints relevant to the life safety system according to
manufacturers' written instructions. Wind and seismically restrained vibration isolation roof-
curb rails are specified in Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC."
G. Pipe drains from drain pans to nearest floor drain; use ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40 PVC
pipe and solvent-welded fittings, same size as condensate drain connection.
1. Requirements for Low-Emitting Materials:
a. PVC solvent cement shall have a VOC content of 510 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
b. Adhesive primer shall have a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Ducts and fan installation requirements are specified in other Sections. Drawings indicate
the general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Ground equipment.

those specified in ANSI/UL 486A-486B.
3.4 CLEANING
A. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect and clean
exposed finishes. Remove dirt and construction debris and repair damaged finishes.
3.5 COMMISSIONING
A. Startup Services: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to commission units as

specified below, and report results in writing.
1. Energize and verify correct rotation of heat wheels and fans.

2. Adjust seals and purge.
3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls
and equipment.
4. Set initial temperature and humidity set points.
5. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.
B. Air-to-air energy recovery equipment will be considered defective if it does not pass tests
and inspections.
C. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain air-to-air recovery units. Refer to Division 1.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
SECTION 237313 - MODULAR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes constant or variable -volume, central-station air-handling units with
coils for indoor or outdoor installations as applicable.
B. Provide fans and motors capable of stable operation at design conditions and at design cubic
meters per minute (cubic feet per minute) and 110 percent pressure as stated above.
C. Lower than design pressure drop of approved individual components may allow use of a
smaller fan motor and still provide the safety factor. When submitted as a deviation, a
smaller motor may be approved in the interest of energy conservation. Such a deviation
shall not qualify for any value engineering incentive claim or reward.
D. Select fan operating point to right hand side of peak static pressure point and near the peak
of static efficiency.
E. Operating Limits: AMCA 99.
A. Delegated Design: Design vibration isolation and seismic-restraint details relevant to the
life safety system, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified
professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.
B. Structural Performance: Casing panels shall be self-supporting and capable of

withstanding 133 percent of internal static pressures indicated, without panel joints
exceeding a deflection of L/200 where "L" is the unsupported span length within
completed casings.
C. Seismic Performance: Air-handling units relevant to the life safety system shall withstand
the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ECP201 and ASCE/SEI 7.
1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any
parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."
MODULAR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS 237313 - Page 1 of 16

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data for each central-station air-handling unit specified, including the following:
1. Submittals for AHUs shall include fans, drives, motors, coils, humidifiers, sound
attenuators, mixing box with outside/return air dampers, filter housings, and all other
related accessories.
2. The Contractor shall provide custom drawings showing total air-handling unit
assembly including dimensions, access sections, diffusion plates, flexible
connections, door swings, control penetrations, electrical disconnect, lights, duplex
outlets, switches, wiring, utility connection points, unit support system, vibration
isolators, drain pan, and rigging points. Submittal drawings of section or component
only, will not be acceptable. The Contractor shall also submit performance data
including performance test results, charts, curves or certified computer selection data;
data sheets; fabrication and insulation details; and the number of pieces that each unit
will have to be broken into to meet shipping and job site rigging requirements.
3. Submit certified fan-sound power ratings showing sound power levels in each octave
band for fan and at entrance and discharge of AHUs at both present and future
scheduled conditions. Include sound attenuator capacities and itemized internal
component attenuation. Internal lining of supply air ductwork with sound absorbing
material is not permitted.
4. Provide certified fan curves showing cubic meters per minute (cubic feet per minute),
static pressure, efficiency, and horsepower for both present and future design point of
operation and at maximum of present and future design cubic meters per minute
(cubic feet per minute) and 110 percent of design static pressure.
5. Submit total fan static pressure, external static pressure, for AHU including total, inlet
and discharge pressures, and itemized specified internal losses and unspecified
internal losses. Refer to air-handling unit schedule on drawings.
6. Certified coil-performance ratings with system operating conditions indicated.
7. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics plus motor and fan accessories.
8. Material gages and finishes.
9. Filters with performance characteristics.
B. Delegated-Design Submittal relevant to the life safety system: For vibration isolation and
seismic restraints indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria,
including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer
responsible for their preparation.
1. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and

attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include adjustable motor bases,
rails, and frames for equipment mounting.
seismic restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases.
C. Shop Drawings from manufacturer detailing equipment assemblies and indicating

dimensions, weights, loadings, required clearances, method of field assembly,
components, and location and size of each field connection.
D. Wiring diagrams detailing wiring for power and control systems and differentiating
E. Coordination Drawings, including floor plans and sections drawn to scale. Submit with
Shop Drawings. Show mechanical-room layout and relationships between components

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
and adjacent structural and mechanical elements. Show support locations, type of
support, and weight on each support. Indicate and certify field measurements.
F. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For air-handling units relevant to the life safety
system, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual

test of assembled components or on calculation.
G. Field Commissioning Reports: As specified in "Commissioning" Article in Part 3 of this

Section. Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
H. Operation and Maintenance data for central-station air-handling units to include in the
operation and maintenance manual specified in Division 1.
2. Warranties: Warranties specified in this Section.
A. NFPA Compliance: Central-station air-handling units and components shall be designed,

fabricated, and installed in compliance with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning
and Ventilating Systems."
B. AHRI Certification: Central-station air-handling units and their components shall be

factory tested according to the applicable portions of ANSI/AHRI 430, "Performance
Rating of Central-Station Air-Handling Units," and shall be listed and bear the label of
the Air-Conditioning, Heating and Refrigeration Institute (AHRI).
C. Provide motors required as part of air-handling units that are listed and labeled by UL
and comply with applicable NEMA standards or equivalent characteristics in accordance
with applicable parts of IEC 60034.
D. Condensation: During first year guarantee period, if condensation forms on any section of
air handler when unit is operating at design conditions, the Contractor shall replace or
repair unit to correct the situation. Repairs shall not impair unit or component
accessibility and future reparability and inherent access for maintenance. All repairs shall
be subject to the Engineer’s approval.
E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in latest
and relevant IEC standard, by a testing agency acceptable to the Engineer.
F. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated components specified in this Section

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete housekeeping bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts
into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Section
B. Coordination: Coordinate layout and installation of central-station air-handling units

with piping and ductwork and with other installations.
A. Deliver air-handling unit as a factory-assembled module with protective crating and

covering.
B. Lift and support units with manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points.
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete housekeeping bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts
into base.
B. Coordinate size and location of structural-steel support members.
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
B. Filters: Furnish 1 set for each central-station air-handling unit.
C. Fan Belts: Furnish 1 set for each central-station air-handling unit fan.
D. Gaskets: Furnish 1 for each sectional joint of each central-station air-handling unit.
1.10 WARRANTY

repair or replace components of the modular central-station air-handling units that fail in
materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
severally liable and agree to repair or replace defective components of the warranted
item.

use.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. AHUs shall be entirely of double wall galvanized steel construction. Galvanizing shall be
hot dipped conforming to A653/A653M and shall provide a minimum of 0.275 kg of zinc
per square meter (0.90 oz. of zinc per square foot) (G90). Aluminum constructed units
may be provided subject to the Engineer’s approval and documentation that structural
rigidity is equal or greater than the galvanized steel specified.
B. General Description: Factory assembled, consisting of fans, motor and drive assembly,
coils, damper, plenums, filters, drip pans, mixing dampers, and discharge collars with
flexible duct connectors.
C. The Contractor and the AHU manufacturer shall be responsible for insuring that the unit
will not exceed the allocated space shown on the drawings, including required clearances
for service and future overhaul or removal of unit components. All structural, piping,
wiring, and ductwork alterations of units, which are dimensionally different than those
specified, shall be the responsibility of the Contractor at no additional cost to the
Employer.
D. AHUs shall be fully assembled by the manufacturer in the factory in accordance with the
arrangement shown on the drawings. The unit shall be assembled into the largest sections
possible subject to shipping and rigging restrictions. The correct fit of all components and
casing sections shall be verified in the factory for all units prior to shipment. Factory
tested units shall be fully assembled, tested and then split to accommodate shipment and
job site rigging. On units not shipped fully assembled, the manufacturer shall tag each
section and include airflow direction to facilitate assembly at the job site. Lifting lugs or
shipping skids shall be provided for each section to allow for field rigging and final
placement of unit.
E. The AHU manufacturer shall provide the necessary gasketing, caulking, and all screws,
nuts, and bolts required for assembly.
F. The manufacturer shall provide a local representative at the job site to supervise the
assembly and to assure the units are assembled to meet manufacturer's recommendations
and requirements noted on the drawings. Provide documentation that this representative
has provided this service on similar jobs to the Engineer. If a local representative cannot
be provided, the manufacturer shall provide a factory representative.
G. Gaskets: All door and panel gaskets shall be high quality which seal airtight and retain their
structural integrity and sealing capability after repeated assembly and disassembly of
bolted panels and opening and closing of hinged components. Bolted sections may use a
more permanent gasketing method provided they are not disassembled.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
H. Motor and Electrical Components: Refer to Section "Common Motor Requirements For
HVAC Equipment."
I. Air-handling units intended for outdoor installation shall be of the weather proof type.
They shall have protective pitched roof and corrosion resistant paint finish.
J. Air handling units with DX coils shall be completed with condensing units, specified
separately in other sections.
2.2 BASE
A. Provide a heavy-duty steel base for supporting all AHU major components. Bases shall be
constructed of wide-flange steel I-beams, channels, or minimum 152 mm (6 inch) high
3.5 mm (10 gauge) steel base rails. Welded or bolted cross members shall be provided as
required for lateral stability. The Contractor shall provide supplemental steel supports as
required to obtain proper operation heights for cooling coil condense drain trap as shown
on drawings.
B. AHUs shall be completely self-supporting for installation on concrete housekeeping pad,

steel support pedestals, or suspended as shown on drawings.
C. The AHU bases not constructed of galvanized material shall be cleaned, primed with a rust
inhibiting primer, and finished with a rust inhibiting exterior enamel.
D. Seismic Fabrication Requirements relevant to the life safety system: Fabricate mounting
base and attachment to air-handling unit sections, accessories, and components with
reinforcement strong enough to withstand seismic forces defined in Section 230548
"Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC" when air-handling unit frame is anchored to
building structure.
2.3 CABINET
A. General: AHU shall be designed and constructed such that removal of any panel shall not
affect the structural integrity of the unit. Plug panels may be used to enhance structural
stability provided access space is not reduced.
B. Materials: Formed and reinforced, double wall construction, galvanized steel panels,
fabricated to allow removal for access to internal parts and components, with joints
between sections sealed. The outer walls of the double skin panel shall be precoated with
oven backed polyester paint finish. Units for outdoor installation shall have protective
pitched roof and corrosion resistant paint finish. Units with 100% outdoor air shall have
internal sides protected with corrosion resistant paint finish.
1. Outside Casing: Galvanized steel, 1.2 mm.
2. Inside Casing: Galvanized steel, 1 mm.
3. Floor Plate: Galvanized steel, 2.0 mm, with additional 1.0 mm galvanized checkered
plate at fan and filter plenum sections.
C. Thermal Conductance (C): Maximum overall thermal conductance of casing panels shall not
exceed 0.68 W/square meter. K (0.12 Btu/ (h. square feet. degree F)).
D. Condensation Requirements: AHUs shall be designed to ensure that there is no condensation

on the exterior of the unit based on outside design conditions. Through metal connections

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
between inner and outer panels shall be kept to an absolute minimum. If tubular
structural members are used inside of tube shall be insulated equal to casing.
E. Unit sections shall be tightly joined in the field through the use of all-thread rod or casing
brackets and shall be gasketed to make airtight.
F. Exterior and interior panels shall be secured to the support channels with stainless steel
screws and gaskets installed around the panel perimeter. Screw spacing shall not be
greater than 229 mm (nine inches). Panels shall be completely removable to allow
removal of fan, coils, and other internal components for future maintenance, repair, or
modifications. Welded exterior panels are not acceptable.
G. Provide sealed sleeves, metal or plastic escutcheons or grommets for penetrations through
casing for power and temperature control wiring and pneumatic tubing. Coordinate
number and location with electrical and temperature control subcontractors. Coordinate
lights, switches, and duplex outlets and disconnect switch location and mounting. All
penetrations and equipment mounting shall be provided in the factory. All field
penetrations shall be performed neatly by drilling or saw cutting. No cutting by torches
will be allowed. Neatly seal all openings airtight.
H. Insulation: CFC free polyurethane insulation, complying with NFPA 90A flame spread and
smoke generation requirements, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating
Systems," for insulation.
1. The walls, roof and floor of the AHU shall be insulated. Insulation shall be held
securely in position between the inner and outer skin of casing.
2. Thickness: 50 mm.
3. Insulation shall have 44 kg/cubic meter minimum density rigid glass fiber. Insulation
shall meet ASTM C1071 requirements.
4. Location and Application: Factory applied with adhesive and mechanical fasteners to
the internal surface of section panels downstream from and including the cooling coil
section.
I. Access Panels and Doors: Same materials and finishes as cabinet and complete with hinges,
latches, handles, and gaskets. Provide in each access section. Doors shall be a minimum
of 600 mm (24 inches) wide and shall be the full casing height up to a maximum of 1850
mm (6 feet). Doors shall be gasketed, hinged, and latched to provide an airtight seal.
Each door shall include a minimum 150 mm x 150 mm (6 inch x 6 inch) double thickness
reinforced glass or Plexiglas window in a gasketed frame.
1. Hinges: Manufacturers standard, designed for door size, weight and pressure
classifications. Hinges shall hold door completely rigid with minimum 45 kg (100
pound) weight hung on latch side of door.
2. Latches: Non-corrosive alloy construction, with operating levers for positive cam
action, operable from either inside or outside. Doors that do not open against unit
operating pressure shall be provided with safety "Vent lock"-style latches which
allow the door to open approximately 75 mm (3 inches) and then require
approximately 0.785 radian (45 degrees) further movement of the handle for
complete opening. Latch shall be capable of restraining explosive opening of door
with a force equal to a minimum of 2986 Pa (12 inches water) of differential static
pressure or 1-1/2 times operating differential pressure whichever is greater.
3. Gaskets: Neoprene, continuous around door, positioned for direct compression with
no sliding action between the door and gasket. Secure with high quality mastic to
eliminate possibility of gasket slipping or coming loose.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
4. Fan section and filter sections shall have inspection and access panels and doors sized
and located to allow periodic maintenance and inspections.
J. Floor:
1. Unit floor shall be level without offset space or gap and designed to support a
minimum of 488 kg/square meter (100 pounds per square foot) distributed load
without permanent deformation or crushing of internal insulation.
2. Provide adequate structural base members beneath floor in service access sections to
support typical service foot traffic and to prevent damage to unit floor or internal
insulation.
3. Unit floors in casing sections, which may contain water or condensate, shall be
watertight with drain pan.
4. Thermal Conductance (C): Maximum overall thermal conductance of casing floors
shall not exceed 0.68 W/square meter. K (0.12 Btu/ (h. square feet. degree F)).
K. Drain Pans: Formed sections of insulated stainless steel (316), sheet based. Fabricate pans
in sizes and shapes to collect condensate from cooling coils (including coil piping
connections and return bends) when units are operating at maximum cataloged face
velocity across cooling coil. Depth of drain pan shall be at least 43 mm (1.7 inches) and
shall handle all condensate without overflowing. Drain pan shall be sloped to drain.
Drain pan shall be continuous metal or welded watertight. No mastic sealing of joints
exposed to water will be permitted. Drain pan shall be placed on top of casing floor or
integrated into casing floor assembly. Maximum overall thermal conductance of
floor/drain pan assembly shall not exceed 0.68 W/square meter K (0.12 Btu/ (h. sq. ft.
degree F)).
1. Double-Wall Construction: Fill space between walls with foam insulation and seal
moisture tight.
2. Drain Connections: Both ends of pan.
3. Pan-underside Surface Coating: Elastomeric compound.
4. Units with stacked coils shall have an intermediate drain pan or drain trough to
collect condensate from top coil.
5. Cooling coil ends shall be enclosed by cabinet and shall be factory insulated against
sweating or shall drain to a drain pan.
6. All pans shall have a double slope to the drain point.
L. Electrical and Lighting: Wiring and equipment specifications shall conform to Division 26
Sections.
1. Provide factory installed vapor-proof lights using cast aluminum base style with glass
globe and cast aluminum guard shall be installed in each access section, fan, coil,
filter and mixing box sections.
2. A switch shall control the lights in each compartment with pilot light mounted outside
the respective compartment access door. Wiring between switches and lights shall be
factory installed. All wiring shall run in neatly installed electrical conduits and
terminate in a junction box for field connection to the building system. Provide single
point 230 volt - one phase connection at junction box.
3. Install compatible 100 watt bulb in each light fixture.
4. Provide a convenience duplex outlet next to the light switch.
5. Disconnect switch and power wiring: Provide factory or field mounted disconnect
switch. Coordinate with Electrical Specifications.
M. Inspection Windows: Provide factory installed 150mm glass inspection windows on fan and
filter plenum section access panels of air-handling units.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
2.4 FAN SECTION
A. Fan-Section Construction (supply and return fans sections as applicable): Belt-driven

centrifugal fans, consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft, bearings, motor and disconnect
switch, drive assembly, and support structure, equipped with formed-steel channel base
for integral mounting of fan, motor, and casing panels. Mount fan scroll, wheel, shaft,
bearings, and motor on structural-steel frame, with frame mounted on base with vibration
isolation.
B. Housings: Fabricate from formed- and reinforced-steel panels to form curved scroll
housings with shaped cutoff, spun-metal inlet bell, and access doors or panels to allow
entry to internal parts and components.
C. Fan Assemblies: Statically and dynamically balanced and designed for continuous
operation at maximum rated fan speed and motor power. Fan wheel shall be double-
width, double-inlet type with backward-curved or airfoil blades as indicated.
1. Backward Inclined: Steel or aluminum construction with curved inlet flange, back
plate, backward-curved blades, and cast-iron or cast-steel hub.
2. Airfoil Wheel: Steel; with smooth, curved inlet flange; back plate; die-formed,
hollow, airfoil blades; and cast-iron or cast-steel hub.
3. Shafts: Hot-rolled steel; turned, ground, and polished, and having keyway to secure
to fan wheel hub.
4. Shaft Bearings: Prelubricated and sealed, self-aligning, pillow-block-type ball or
roller bearings with the following:
a. Rated Bearing Life: ANSI/ABMA STD 9 or ABMA STD 11, L-50 of 200,000
hours.
5. Belt Drives: Factory mounted, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after
installation.
6. Pulleys: Cast iron or steel with split, tapered bushing, dynamically balanced at
factory.
7. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch, selected so pitch adjustment is at middle of
8. Belts: Oil resistant, non-sparking, and nonstatic; matched for multiple belt drives.
9. Belt Guards: Fabricate to OSHA/SMACNA requirements, 2.7 mm thick, 20-mm
diamond-mesh wire screen welded to steel angle frame or equivalent, prime coated.
10. Motor Mount: Adjustable for belt tensioning.
11. Accessories: Provide the following:
a. Variable torque drives.

b. Discharge dampers.
12. Vibration Control: Install fans on open-spring vibration isolators, PVC coated,
minimum 25 mm static deflection, with side snubbers. Allowable vibration
tolerances for fan shall not exceed a self-excited vibration maximum velocity of
0.005 m/s (0.20 inch per second) RMS when measured with a vibration meter on
bearing caps of machine in vertical, horizontal and axial directions or measured at
equipment mounting feet if bearings are concealed.
D. Fan-Section Source Quality Control: The following factory tests are required.
Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Test fans according to ANSI/AMCA

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
300, "Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Fans shall bear
AMCA-certified sound ratings seal.
2. Factory test fan performance for flow rate, pressure, power, temperature, rotation
speed, and efficiency. Establish ratings according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory
Methods of Testing Fans for Certified Aerodynamic Performance Rating."
2.5 MOTORS
A. General: Refer to Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment" for
general requirements.
B. Provide internally vibration isolated fan, motor and drive, mounted on a common integral
bolted or welded structural steel base with adjustable motor slide rail with locking device.
Provide vibration isolators and flexible duct connections at fan discharge to completely
isolate fan assembly. Fan drive and belts shall be factory mounted with final alignment
and belt adjustment to be made by the Contractor after installation.
C. Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to accelerate driven loads satisfactorily.
D. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load
will not require motor to operate in service factor range.
E. Temperature Rating: 50 deg C maximum temperature rise at 40 deg C ambient for

continuous duty at full load (Class A Insulation).
F. Service Factor: 1.15 for polyphase motors and 1.35 for single-phase motors.
G. Motor Construction: ANSI/NEMA MG 1, general purpose, continuous duty, Design B.
1. Bases: Adjustable.
H. Bearings: The following features are required:
1. Ball or roller bearings with inner and outer shaft seals.

2. Grease lubricated.
3. Designed to resist thrust loading where belt drives or other drives produce lateral or
axial thrust in motor.
I. Enclosure Type: The following features are required:

operation.
occupants.
J. Overload Protection: Built-in, automatic reset, thermal overload protection.
K. Noise Rating: Quiet.
L. Efficiency: Energy-efficient motors shall have a minimum efficiency as scheduled

according to IEEE 112, Test Method B. If efficiency is not specified, motors shall have a
higher efficiency than "average standard industry motors" according to IEEE 112, Test
Method B.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
M. Nameplate: Indicate full identification of manufacturer, ratings, characteristics,

construction, and special features.
N. Starters, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Electrical devices and connections are specified
in Division 26 Sections.
2.6 COILS
A. Coil Sections: Common or individual, insulated, galvanized steel casings for heating and
cooling coils. Design and construct to facilitate removal and replacement of coil for
maintenance and to assure full airflow through coils.
B. Coil Construction: Rigidly supported across full face, pitched to allow drainage.
1. Fins: Aluminum, mechanically bonded to tubes.

2. Tubes: Seamless copper, minimum tube size 0.5 inch, minimum thickness: 0.035
inches.
3. Coil Casing: Galvanized steel with thickness of 1.6 mm.
4. Headers for Steam and Water Coils: Steel, cast iron, or copper with connections for
drain valve and air vent, and threaded piping connections.
C. Water Coils: Drainable with threaded plugs, serpentine with return bends in smaller sizes
and with return headers in larger sizes.
D. Coil face area velocity is not to exceed 2.5 meters per second at specified air quantity.
Coil to have number of rows and fins per cm to satisfy required capacity at specified
condition, with not more than 5 fins per cm.
E. Number of circuits to be such that water velocity satisfies specified conditions without
exceeding specified maximum water pressure drop through coil. Water velocity through
tubes is not to exceed 1.8 meters per second and not less than 0.76 meters per second.
F. Direct-Expansion Refrigerant Coils: ASHRAE 15 AND 34 PACKAGE, “Safety

Standard for Refrigeration Systems”, with the following features:
1. Suction Headers and Distributor Tubes: Seamless copper.

2. Refrigerant Distributor: Design for low pressure drop, for down feed with solder
connections, and with maximum of 12 circuits for each distributor.
G. Coil-Performance Tests: Factory-test cooling and heating coils, except sprayed surface
coils for rating according to ANSI/AHRI 410, "Forced-Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-
Heating Coils."
2.7 DAMPERS
A. General: Leakage rate, according to AMCA 500-D, "Laboratory Methods of Testing

Dampers for Rating," shall not exceed 2 percent of air quantity at 10-m/s (2000-fpm) face
velocity through damper and 1000-Pa (4-inch wg) pressure differential.
1. Damper operators shall be electrically operated.
B. Mixing Boxes: Parallel-blade galvanized steel damper blades mechanically fastened to

steel operating rod in reinforced, galvanized steel cabinet. Connect operating rods with
common linkage and interconnect linkages so dampers operate simultaneously.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
C. Combination Filter/Mixing Box: Parallel-blade galvanized steel damper blades

mechanically fastened to steel operating rod in reinforced, galvanized steel cabinet.
Connect operating rods with common linkage and interconnect linkages so dampers
operate simultaneously. Cabinet support members shall hold 50-mm thick, pleated, flat
permanent or throwaway filters. Provide hinged access panels or doors to allow removal
of filters from both sides of unit.
2.8 FILTER SECTION
A. Filters: Comply with NFPA 90A.
B. Provide minimum arrestance according to ASHRAE 52.1, and a minimum efficiency

reporting value (MERV) according to ASHRAE 52.2.
C. Filter Housing: Provide filter media holding frames arranged for flat, angular orientation, or
bag filters, minimum thickness, 14 gage galvanized steel with baked finish inside and
out. Joints shall be continuously welded. Flange shall have a fixed air-sealing gasket
with hollow cross section, closed cell rubber or resilient neoprene, suitable for repetitive
reuse. Cabinets shall have flanged ends for connection to adjacent ducts. Hinged access
doors on both cabinet sides. Provide access doors with fixed air sealing gaskets to be
airtight at the static pressure expected in service. Weld test ports into each filter cabinet
or plenum. Test port shall not penetrate to filter frame or media.
D. Pre-filters: 25 mm thick, viscous-coated fibers flat panel with cardboard frame and
perforated metal retainer, clean airflow resistance of 62 Pa (0.25 inch wg) at face velocity
of 2.54 m/s (500 fpm), and ANSI/ASHRAE 52.1 filter-arrestance efficiency of 60 to 80
percent.
E. Permanent Filters: Washable, cleanable, 50 mm thick, with aluminum- or stainless-steel

media and stainless-steel frames, clean airflow resistance of 62 Pa (0.25 inch wg) at face
velocity of 2.54 m/s (500 fpm), and ANSI/ASHRAE 52.1 filter-arrestance efficiency of
60 to 80 percent.
F. Permanent Filters: Bag type, viscous coated fiber, 450mm long with holding stainless
steel frames and fasteners, and ASHRAE filter-arrestance efficiency of 60 to 80 percent.
G. Construction Filters for pre-commissioning: 25 mm thick, viscous-coated fibers encased

in fiberboard cell with perforated-metal media support, clean airflow resistance of 37 Pa
at face velocity of 1.52 m/s and ASHRAE 52.1 filter-arrestance efficiency of 70 to 82
percent.
H. Filter Gage:
1. 90-mm- (3-1/2-inch-) diameter, diaphragm-actuated dial in metal case.

2. Vent valves.
3. Black figures on white background.
4. Front recalibration adjustment.
5. 2 percent of full-scale accuracy.
6. Range: 0 to 1000 Pa (0- to 4.0-inch wg).
7. Accessories: Static-pressure tips with integral compression fittings, 6-mm (1/4-inch)
plastic tubing, and 2- or 3-way vent valves.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
2.9 ENERGY RECOVERY SECTION
A. Heat Recovery Wheels, or Heat Pipes shall be factory installed within Air Handling
Units, as per design requirements where needed.
B. Refer to Section “Air-to-Air Energy Recovery Equipment”
2.10 VARIABLE SPEED CONTROLLERS
A. Variable air volume Air Handling units shall be provided with Variable Speed Drives, as
specified in Division 26, Section 262419 “Motor-Control Centers”.
2.11 TESTING
A. General:
1. ARI certified AHUs: AHUs selected by the Engineer for testing shall be factory
assembled and tested prior to shipment and shall be shipped prior to any untested
units.
2. Non-ARI certified AHUs: All units shall be factory assembled and tested.
3. Units specified to be tested shall be factory assembled and tested in accordance with
specified Test Procedure to demonstrate compliance with required unit capacities,
ensure correct fit of all components and minimize field assembly labor.
B. Factory Test:
1. The test procedure, instrumentation and calculation shall use those methods specified
in Section “Testing, Adjusting and Balancing”; however test methods including
instruments used must be submitted and approved by the Engineer prior to initiating
testing. The AHUs shall be tested for air volume, static pressure for AHU and each
component, fan RPM and power consumption for the maximum of present or future
design conditions. Submit fan curves showing test results.
C. Approval:
1. Factory tests shall be witnessed by the Engineer’s and Employer’s representative. The
team will comprise at least three persons from the Client’s side. All expenses to be
borne by the Contractor . The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with a minimum
two-week notice prior to proposed schedule test.
2. Failure of AHU to meet test requirements shall require correction of deficiency and
re-testing of unit.
3. Submit written results of factory tests for approval prior to shipping.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions to receive equipment, for compliance with installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of central-station air-handling
units.
B. Examine roughing-in of steam, hydronic, condensate drainage piping, and electrical to

verify actual locations of connections before installation.
C. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install central-station air-handling units level and plumb, according to manufacturer's

written instructions.
1. Floor-Mounted Units: Support on concrete housekeeping bases using neoprene pads.

Secure units to anchor bolts installed in concrete housekeeping base.
2. Suspended Units: Suspend units from structural-steel support frame using threaded
steel rods and vibration isolation.
B. Arrange installation of units to provide access space around air-handling units for service
and maintenance.
A. Coordinate size of housekeeping bases with actual unit sizes provided. Construct base
100 mm larger in both directions than overall dimensions of supported unit.
B. Install reinforcing bars, tied to frame, and place anchor bolts and sleeves to facilitate
securing units.
C. Place concrete and allow to cure before installing units. Use portland cement conforming
to ASTM C150/C150M, 27-MPa compressive strength, and normal-weight aggregate.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections. The Drawings indicate
the general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. The following are specific
connection requirements:
1. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.

2. Connection piping to suspended air-handling units with flexible connectors.
3. Connect condensate drain pans. Extend to nearest equipment or floor drain.
Construct deep trap at connection to drain pan and install cleanouts at changes in
direction.
4. Hot- and Chilled-Water Piping: Conform to applicable requirements of Section
"Hydronic Piping." Connect to supply and return coil tappings with shutoff or
balancing valve and union or flange at each connection.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
5. Refrigerant Piping: Conform to applicable requirements of Section "Refrigerant

Piping." Connect to supply and return coil tappings with shutoff valve and union or
flange at each connection.
B. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Sections. The
Drawings indicate the general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final
duct connections with factory-provided duct collars and flexible connections.
C. Electrical: Conform to applicable requirements of Division 26 Sections.
1. Connect fan motors to wiring systems and to ground. Tighten electrical connectors
and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. Where
manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A -
486B.
2. Temperature control wiring and interlock wiring is specified in Section "Building
Management System."
3.5 ADJUSTING
3.6 CLEANING
A. After completing installation, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and
construction debris, and repair damaged finishes including chips, scratches, and
abrasions.
B. Clean fan interiors to remove foreign material and construction dirt and dust. Vacuum
clean fan wheels, cabinets, and coils entering air face.
3.7 COMMISSIONING
A. Manufacturer's Field Inspection: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

perform the following:
1. Inspect field assembly of components and installation of central-station air-handling

units including piping, ductwork, and electrical connections.
2. Prepare a written report on findings and recommended corrective actions.
B. Final Checks before Startup: Perform the following before startup:

for piping, ductwork, and electrical are complete. Verify that proper thermal
overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnects.
free fan wheel rotation and smooth bearings operations. Reconnect fan drive system,
align belts, and install belt guards.
5. Lubricate bearings, pulleys, belts, and other moving parts with factory-recommended
lubricants.
6. Set zone dampers to fully open position for each zone.
7. Set face-and-bypass dampers to full face flow.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
8. Set outside-air and return-air mixing dampers to minimum outside-air setting.

9. Comb coil fins for parallel orientation.
10. Install clean filters.
11. Verify that manual and automatic volume control, and fire and smoke dampers in
connected ductwork systems are in fully open position.
C. Starting procedures for central-station air-handling units include the following:
Adjust fan to indicated rpm.
a. Replace or adjust fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design

conditions. Fix in final position after balancing is achieved.
2. Measure and record motor electrical values for voltage and amperage.
3. Manually operate dampers from fully closed to fully open position and record fan
performance.
D. Refer to Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for air-handling system
testing, adjusting, and balancing.
3.8 DEMONSTRATION

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain central-station air-handling units. Refer to
Division 1.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A3-ME-01 REV 1
SECTION 237413 - PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes packaged, outdoor, central-station air-handling units (rooftop units)
for cooling.
A. Wind-Restraint Performance:
1. Basic Wind Speed (3 sec gust): 33 m/s.

2. Building Classification Category: as specified in section 230548 “Vibration and
Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment”.
3. Minimum 48.8 kg/sq. m (10 lb/sq. ft) multiplied by the maximum area of the
mechanical component projected on a vertical plane that is normal to the wind
direction, and 45 degrees either side of normal.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's technical data for each model indicated, including
rated capacities of selected model clearly indicated; dimensions; required clearances;
shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties; accessories; and installation
and startup instructions.

field connection. Detail mounting, securing, and flashing of roof curb to roof structure.
Indicate coordinating requirements with roof membrane system.
C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For RTU supports indicated to comply with performance

requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified
professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators for

designing vibration isolation bases.
PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS 237413 - Page 1 of 13

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
2. Detail mounting, securing, and flashing of roof curb to roof structure. Indicate
coordinating requirements with roof membrane system.
3. Wind- Details: Detail fabrication and attachment of wind and snubbers. Show
anchorage details and indicate quantity, diameter, and depth of penetration of
anchors.
D. Coordination Drawings: Plans and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following
items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items
involved:
1. Structural members to which RTUs will be attached.

2. Roof openings
3. Roof curbs and flashing.
E. Commissioning Reports: As specified in "Commissioning" Article in Part 3 of this Section.

Indicate and interpret results of startup and commissioning requirements. Submit copies of
checklists.
F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For equipment to include in the operation and
A. AHRI Compliance:
1. Comply with AHRI 210/240 or AHRI 340/360 for testing and rating energy
efficiencies for RTUs.
2. Comply with AHRI 270 or AHRI 370 for testing and rating sound performance for
RTUs.
B. Fabricate and label refrigeration system to comply with ASHRAE 15 AND 34 PACKAGE,
“Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems.”
C. Comply with ASHRAE 33 for methods of testing cooling coils.
D. Comply with applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and

Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."
E. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1,

Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."
F. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B.
G. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated components specified in this Section
H. Comply with NFPA 70.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
A. Deliver rooftop units as factory-assembled units with protective crating and covering.
B. Coordinate delivery of units in sufficient time to allow movement into building.
C. Handle rooftop units to comply with manufacturer's written rigging and installation
instructions for unloading and moving to final location.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations with roof
construction. Roof specialties are specified in Division 7 Sections.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Provide system warranty in which Manufacturer, Installer, and Contractor are jointly and
B. Warranty shall include:

weathering and use.
C. Warranty Period, Compressors: 5 years after date of Substantial Completion.
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
1. Fan Belts: One set for each belt-drive fan.

2. Filters: One set of filters for each unit.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ROOFTOP UNITS SMALLER THAN 21 kW (6 TONS)
A. Description: Factory assembled and tested; designed for roof or slab installation; and
consisting of compressors, condensers, evaporator coils, condenser and evaporator fans,
refrigeration and temperature controls, filters, and dampers.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
B. Casing: Manufacturer's standard weatherproof construction with corrosion-protection

coating and exterior finish, removable panels or access doors with neoprene gaskets for
inspection and access to internal parts, minimum 13-mm thick thermal insulation, knockouts
for electrical and piping connections, exterior condensate drain connection, and lifting lugs.
C. Casing Insulation and Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.
1. Materials: ASTM C 1071, Type I.

2. Liner materials shall have air-stream surface coated with an erosion- and temperature-
resistant coating or faced with a plain or coated fibrous mat or fabric.
3. Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916, Type I.
D. Condensate Drain Pans: Formed sections of galvanized or stainless-steel sheet, a minimum

of 50 mm (2 inches) deep.
moisture tight.
2. Drain Connections: Threaded nipple both sides of drain pan.
3. Pan-Top Surface Coating for galvanized steel pans: Corrosion-resistant compound.
E. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements
in ASHRAE 62.1.
F. Evaporator Fans: Forward curved, centrifugal, directly driven with permanently lubricated
motor bearings.
G. Condenser Fans: Propeller type, directly driven with permanently lubricated motor
bearings.
H. Refrigerant Coils: Aluminum-plate fin and seamless copper tube in galvanized steel casing
with equalizing-type vertical distributor. Coils shall have baked phenolic or cathodic epoxy
coating.
I. Compressors: Hermetic with integral vibration isolators, overcurrent and high-temperature

protection, internal pressure relief.
J. Refrigeration Specialties:
1. Refrigerant: R-407C or R-410A.
2. Expansion valve with replaceable thermostatic element.
3. Refrigerant filter/dryer.
4. Manual-reset high-pressure safety switch.
5. Automatic-reset low-pressure safety switch.
6. Minimum off-time relay.
7. Automatic-reset compressor motor thermal overload.
8. Four-way reversing valve with a replaceable magnetic coil, thermostatic expansion
valves with bypass check valves, and a suction line accumulator.
K. Air Filtration:
1. Minimum arrestance according to ASHRAE 52.1, and a minimum efficiency

2. Glass Fiber: Minimum 80 percent arrestance, and MERV 5.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
L. Economizer Control: Return-, relief- and outside-air dampers, outside-air filter with
magnehelic gauge for dirty filter indication, fully modulating electronic-control system with
adjustable mixed-air thermostat and automatic changeover.
M. Thermostat: Programmable, electronic; with heating setback and cooling setup with 7-day
programming.
2.2 ROOFTOP UNITS, 26 TO 70 kW (7-1/2 TO 20 TONS)
B. Casing: Manufacturer's standard weatherproof construction with corrosion-protection

coating and exterior finish, removable panels or access doors with neoprene gaskets for


moisture tight.
in ASHRAE 62.1.
F. Evaporator Fans: Forward curved, centrifugal, belt driven with adjustable sheaves or direct-
drive fans; and with permanently lubricated motor bearings.
G. Condenser Fans: Propeller type, directly driven with permanently lubricated motor
bearings.
H. Air Filtration:

2. Prefilter: permanent washable aluminum type, 50mm thick with minimum 75 percent
arrestance, and MERV 4.
3. Bag Filter: Class 1 type with minimum 98 percent arrestance, and MERV 14, in
galvanized steel frame.
I. Refrigerant Coils: Aluminum-plate fin and seamless copper tube in galvanized steel casing
with equalizing-type vertical distributor. Coils shall have baked phenolic or cathodic epoxy
coating.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
J. Compressors: Serviceable, fully hermetic compressors with integral vibration isolators,

overcurrent and high-temperature protection, internal pressure relief,.
K. Refrigeration Specialties:
3. Refrigerant filter/dryer.
8. Brass service valves installed in compressor suction and liquid lines.
9. Hot-gas bypass solenoid valve with a replaceable magnetic coil.
L. Outdoor- and Return-Air Mixing Dampers: Parallel- or opposed-blade galvanized-steel

dampers mechanically fastened to cadmium plated for galvanized-steel operating rod in
reinforced cabinet. Connect operating rods with common linkage and interconnect linkages
so dampers operate simultaneously.
1. Damper Motor: Modulating with adjustable minimum position.

2. Relief-Air Damper: Gravity actuated or motorized, as required by
ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, with bird screen and hood.
M. Economizer Control: Return-, relief- and outside-air dampers, outside-air filter with
adjustable mixed-air thermostat and automatic changeover through adjustable enthalpy-
control device.
N. Variable-Air-Volume Control: Electric discharge-air-temperature step controller and

electronic-control system.
O. Thermostat: Programmable, electronic; with heating setback and cooling setup with 7-day
programming.
P. Smoke Detectors: Photoelectric detector located in both supply- and return-air plenum, to
de-energize unit.
Q. Operating Controls: Factory-installed microprocessor controls and monitors unit and

communicates with central control processor.
1. Control Outputs: 2-stage cooling; and automatic or continuous fan operation and
economizer damper operation.
2. Control Sensors: Return-air-temperature sensor, fan airflow-proving switch, dirty-
filter switch, discharge-air-temperature sensor, room-temperature sensor, and night-
setback-override switch.
3. Control Features: Day/occupied modes for high or low enthalpy and
night/unoccupied mode.
4. Comply with requirements of Building Management System (BMS) specifications
section 230900.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
2.3 ROOFTOP UNITS LARGER THAN 70 kW (20 TONS)
B. Casing: Manufacturer's standard weatherproof, double-wall construction with corrosion-

protection coating and exterior finish, hinged access doors with neoprene gaskets for


moisture tight.
in ASHRAE 62.1.
F. Evaporator Fans: Airfoil, centrifugal, belt driven with adjustable sheaves and permanently
lubricated motor bearings.
G. Return-Air Fans: Airfoil, centrifugal, belt driven with adjustable sheaves and permanently
lubricated motor bearings.
H. Exhaust/Relief: Barometric damper.
I. Condenser Fans: Propeller type, directly driven with permanently lubricated motor
bearings.
J. Air Filtration:

2. Prefilter: permanent washable aluminum type, 50mm thick with minimum 75 percent
arrestance, and MERV 4.
3. Bag Filter: Class 1 type with minimum 98 percent arrestance, and MERV 14, in
galvanized steel frame.
K. Refrigerant Coils: Aluminum-plate fin and seamless copper tube in galvanized steel casing
with equalizing-type vertical distributor and thermal expansion valve; tested to 3110 kPa
(450 psig) and leak tested to 2070 kPa (300 psig) with air under water. Insulate coil section.
Coils shall have baked phenolic or cathodic epoxy coating.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
L. Compressors: Semihermetic or hermetic compressors with integral vibration isolators,

overcurrent and high-temperature protection, internal pressure relief, .
M. Refrigeration Specialties:
2. Refrigerant Circuits: Interlaced coil refrigerant circuiting with circuit for each
compressor.
4. Refrigerant filter/dryer and sight glasses.
9. Brass service valves installed in compressor suction and liquid lines.
10. Oil-Pressure Switch: Designed to shut down compressors on low oil pressure.
11. Hot-gas bypass solenoid valve with a replaceable magnetic coil.
N. Outdoor- and Return-Air Mixing Dampers: Parallel- or opposed-blade galvanized-steel

dampers mechanically fastened to cadmium plated for galvanized-steel operating rod in
reinforced cabinet. Connect operating rods with common linkage and interconnect linkages
so dampers operate simultaneously.
1. Damper Motor: Modulating with adjustable minimum position.

2. Relief-Air Damper: Gravity actuated or motorized, as required by
ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, with bird screen and hood.
O. Economizer Dampers: Return-, relief- and outside-air dampers with damper operator and
control package.
1. Leakage: Maximum leakage 2.5 percent at nominal airflow of 54 L/s per kW (400
cfm per ton) with 250-Pa (1-inch wg) pressure differential.
2. Damper Operator: 24 V, with gear train sealed in oil with spring return.
P. Economizer Control: Return-, relief- and outside-air dampers, outside-air filter with
adjustable mixed-air thermostat and automatic changeover through adjustable enthalpy-
control device.
Q. Variable-Air-Volume Control: Electric discharge-air-temperature step controller; supply-air

static-pressure controller with damper operator operating variable-inlet-fan vanes.
R. Temperature Control: Factory-installed, demand-oriented, solid-state control system with

minimum of 2 cooling steps, including solid-state room thermostat with dead band, and
subbase with system and fan switches. Include the following:
1. Discharge-air-temperature reset with space-temperature override.

2. 7-day programmable clock, with power-failure carryover, for remote mounting.
3. Warm-up cycle.
S. Remote-Control Panel: Contains controls and indicator lights as follows:
1. Heat-cool-auto system switch.

2. On-off fan switch.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
3. Minimum outside-air damper potentiometer position LCD.

4. Supply-fan operating indicator light.
5. Mechanical cooling malfunction indicator light.
6. Clogged filters indicator light.
T. Smoke Detectors: Photoelectric detector located in both supply- and return-air plenum, to
de-energize unit.
U. Electrical Convenience Outlet: 220-V, ac fused outlet, separately fused, located in unit
cabinet or in roof curb perimeter.
V. Operating Controls: Factory-installed microprocessor controls and monitors unit and

communicates to central control processor.
1. Control Outputs: cooling; and automatic or continuous fan operation and economizer
damper operation.
2. Return-air-, discharge-air-, outdoor-air-, space-, control set-point temperature LCD.
3. Outdoor enthalpy LCD.
4. Filter pressure drop LCD.
5. Status: Airflow, fans, system, unit operation, operating mode.
6. Inlet-vane and economizer-damper position LCD.
7. Duct static-pressure LCD.
8. Alarm LCD.
9. Control Features: Day/occupied and night/unoccupied modes, temperature reset.
10. Comply with requirements of Building Management System (BMS) specifications
section 230900.
2.4 ROOF CURBS
A. Manufacturer's standard, insulated with corrosion-protection coating, gasketing, factory-

installed wood nailer, according to NRCA standards.
1. Curb Insulation and Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.
a. Materials: ASTM C 1071, Type I or II.

b. Thickness: minimum 25 mm (1 inch).
2. Application: Factory applied with adhesive and mechanical fasteners to the internal
surface of curb.
a. Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916, Type I.

b. Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel, suitable for adhesive attachment,
mechanical attachment, or welding attachment to duct without damaging liner
when applied as recommended by manufacturer and without causing leakage in
cabinet.
c. Liner materials applied in this location shall have air-stream surface coated
with a temperature-resistant coating or faced with a plain or coated fibrous mat
or fabric depending on service air velocity.
d. Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916, Type I.
3. Curb Height: Minimum 400 mm.

4. Isolation Curb: Rigid upper and lower steel structure with vibration isolation springs
and vertical and horizontal restraints; with elastomeric waterproof membrane. 50-
mm static deflection.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
B. Wind Restraints: Metal brackets compatible with the curb and casing, painted to match
RTU, used to anchor unit to the curb, and designed for loads at Project site. Comply with
requirements in Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC" for wind-load
requirements.
2.5 MOTORS
B. Motor Construction: ANSI/NEMA MG 1, general purpose, continuous duty, Design B.
C. Enclosure Type: Open, dripproof.
A. Verification of Performance: Rate capacity according to AHRI 210/240, "Performance

Rating of Unitary Air-Conditioning and Air Source Heat Pump Equipment."
B. Verification of Performance: Rate capacity according to AHRI 340/360, "Performance

Rating of Commercial and Industrial Unitary Air-Conditioning and Heat Pump Equipment."
C. Sound Power Level Ratings: Comply with AHRI 270, "Standard for Sound Performance
Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment."
D. Testing Requirements: Factory test sound-power-level ratings according to AHRI 370,

"Standard for Sound Performance Rating of Large Air-Cooled Outdoor Refrigeration and
Air-Conditioning Equipment."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roof for compliance with requirements for conditions affecting installation and
performance of rooftop units. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install units according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install units level and plumb, maintaining manufacturer's recommended clearances.
C. Curb Support: Install roof curb on roof structure, level. Install and secure rooftop units on
curbs and coordinate roof penetrations and flashing with roof construction.
D. Unit Support: Install unit on structural curbs and level. Coordinate wall penetrations and
flashing with wall construction. Secure RTUs to structural support with anchor bolts.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections. Drawings indicate the
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. The following are specific
1. Install piping to allow service and maintenance.
B. Duct installation requirements are specified in other Sections. Drawings indicate the
general arrangement of ducts. The following are specific connection requirements:
1. Install ducts to termination in roof mounting frames. Where indicated, terminate

return-air duct through roof structure and insulate space between roof and bottom of
unit.
C. Electrical: Conform to applicable requirements in Division 26 Sections.

those specified in ANSI/UL 486A-486B.
3.4 COMMISSIONING

results in writing:
B. Verify that installation is as indicated and specified.
C. Complete manufacturer's installation and startup checks and perform the following:
1. Level unit on housekeeping base, and flash curbs to unit and to roof.
2. Inspect for visible damage to unit casing.
3. Inspect for visible damage to furnace combustion chamber.
4. Inspect for visible damage to compressor, air-cooled condenser coil, and fans.
5. Verify that clearances have been provided for servicing.
6. Check that labels are clearly visible.
7. Clean furnace flue and condenser and inspect for construction debris.
8. Verify that controls are connected and operable.
9. Remove shipping bolts, blocks, and tie-down straps.
10. Verify that filters are installed.
11. Adjust vibration isolators.
12. Connect and purge gas line.
13. Check acoustic insulation.
14. Check operation of barometric dampers.
D. Lubricate bearings on fan.
E. Check fan-wheel rotation for correct direction without vibration and binding.
F. Adjust fan belts to proper alignment and tension.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
G. Start unit according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Perform starting of refrigeration in summer only.

2. Complete startup sheets and attach copy with Contractor's startup report.
H. Check and record performance of interlocks and protection devices; verify sequences.
I. Operate unit for an initial period as recommended or required by manufacturer.
J. Perform the following operations for both minimum and maximum firing, and adjust burner
for peak efficiency. Adjust pilot to stable flame.
1. Measure gas pressure on manifold.

2. Measure combustion-air temperature at inlet to combustion chamber.
3. Measure flue-gas temperature at furnace discharge.
4. Perform flue-gas analysis. Measure and record flue-gas carbon dioxide and oxygen
concentration.
5. Measure supply-air temperature and volume when burner is at maximum firing rate
and when burner is off. Calculate useful heat to supply air.
6. Check for backdraft under full operation.
K. Calibrate thermostats.
L. Adjust and check high-temperature limits.
M. Check internal isolators.
N. Check outside-air damper for proper stroke and interlock with return- and relief-air
dampers.
O. Check controls for correct sequencing of mixing dampers, refrigeration, and normal and
emergency shutdown.
P. Start refrigeration and measure and record the following:
1. Coil leaving-air, dry- and wet-bulb temperatures.

2. Coil entering-air, dry- and wet-bulb temperatures.
3. Outside-air, dry-bulb temperature.
4. Air-cooled-condenser, discharge-air, dry-bulb temperature.
Q. Measure and record the following minimum and maximum airflows. Plot fan volumes on
fan curve.
1. Supply-air volume.
2. Return-air volume.
3. Relief-air volume.
4. Outside-air intake volume.
R. Simulate maximum cooling demand and check the following:
1. Compressor refrigerant suction and hot-gas pressures.

2. Short circuiting air through condenser or from condenser to outside-air intake.
S. Verify operation of remote panel, including pilot-light operation and failure modes. Check
the following:
1. Warm-up for morning cycle.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
2. Freezestat operation.
3. Free-cooling mode, outside-air changeover.
4. Alarms.
T. After starting and performance testing, replace filters with new, clean filters, change
vacuum cooling and condenser coils, lubricate bearings, adjust belt tension, and check
operation of power vents.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain rooftop units. Refer to Division 1 Section
1. Schedule at least eight (8) hours of training.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
SECTION 238123 - COMPUTER-ROOM AIR-CONDITIONERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes air-conditioning units and their accessories intended specifically for
computer-room applications, in the following arrangements:
1. Floor-mounted computer-room air conditioners.

2. Ceiling-mounted computer-room air conditioners.
3. Console computer-room air conditioners.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities operating characteristics, electrical characteristics;

shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties; and accessories for each
model indicated.

field connection.
C. Commissioning Reports: As specified in "Commissioning" Article in Part 3 of this Section.

Indicate and interpret results of startup and commissioning requirements. Submit copies of
checklists.
D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For equipment to include in the operation and
E. Warranties: Warranties specified in this Section.
COMPUTER-ROOM AIR-CONDITIONERS 238123 - Page 1 of 10

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
A. Fabricate and label refrigeration system to comply with ASHRAE 15 AND 34 PACKAGE,
“Safety Standards for Refrigeration Systems.”
B. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 4 - "Outdoor

Air Quality," Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment," Section 6 - "Ventilation Rate
Procedures," and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."
C. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.
D. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated components specified in this Section
E. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label water-cooled condenser shells to comply with 2010
ASME Boiler & Pressure Vessel Code - Section VIII - Pressure Vessels, Division 1.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of units and suspension components with other
construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC
equipment, fire-suppression-system components, and partition assemblies.
B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations with roof
construction.
C. Coordinate installation of computer-room air-conditioning units with computer-room raised

floor installation.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide written warranty, signed by the manufacturer and

countersigned by the Contractor, agreeing to replace components that fail in materials or
workmanship within the specified warranty period, provided manufacturer's written
instructions for installation, operation, and maintenance have been followed.
Warranty shall include:

weathering and use.
8. Warranty Period: Two years after date of Substantial Completion.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
9. Warranty Period, Compressors: 5 years after date of Substantial Completion.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
1. Fan Belts: One set for each belt-drive fan.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Furnish a computer room process cooling self-contained units complete, including all
temperature controls, filters, fans and other system components as specified, all assembled
and tested at the factory prior to shipment in accordance with ANSI/ASHRAE 51 or
AMCA 210. Ratings shall comply with AHRI 430. Total static pressure and coil face area
classification shall conform to AMCA 99.
B. The system shall include an automatic temperature control panel and electric panel with
main disconnect operable from the exterior of the room unit. Cooling capacity of unit shall
meet the sensible heat requirements and total heat requirements shown. In selecting unit
size, make true allowance for "sensible to total heat ratio" to satisfy required sensible
cooling capacity.
C. Design the separate assemblies to be used together and base ratings on the use of the
matched assemblies:
1. Self-contained direct expansion cooling units.

2. Water Cooling Coil.
3. Humidifier.
4. Electric reheat coil.
5. Factory fabricated floor stand.
6. All units shall have automatic controls and shall be a complete factory assembled,
piped and wired package.
D. Corrosion Prevention: All equipment fabricated from ferrous metals shall be coated with
epoxy finish or a zinc coating or a duplex coating of zinc and paint. If accepted by the
Engineer, equipment fabricated from ferrous metals that do not have a zinc coating or a
duplex coating of zinc and paint shall be treated for prevention of rust with a factory coating
or paint system that will withstand 125 hours in a salt-spray fog test, except that equipment
located outdoors shall be tested for 500 hours. The salt-spray fog test shall be in accordance
with ASTM B117 using a 20 percent sodium chloride solution. Immediately after
completion of the test, the coating shall show no signs of blistering, wrinkling or cracking,
no loss of adhesion, and the specimen shall show no signs of rust creepage beyond 3 mm
(1/8-inch) on either side of the scratch mark.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
E. Unit Cabinet:
1. Unit frame shall be minimum 14 gage (2.0 millimeter) welded steel tubes or steel
angles and shall be mill-galvanized or coated with an epoxy finish, or as specified
above.
2. Exterior panels shall be furniture grade steel sheet, minimum of 20 gage (1.0 mm),
mill-galvanized or coated with a corrosion-inhibiting epoxy finish, or an approved
equivalent finish. Mill galvanized sheet metal shall be coated with not less than 1.25
ounces of zinc per square foot (380 gram of zinc per square meter) of two-sided
surface. Mill rolled structural steel shall be hot-dip galvanized or primed and painted.
Cut edges, burns and scratches in hot-dip galvanized surfaces shall be coated with
galvanizing repair coating.
3. Provide removable panel for access to controls without interrupting airflow. Panels
shall be gasketed to prevent air leakage under system operating pressure and shall be
removable for service access without the use of special tools. Condensate pans shall
be minimum 22 gage (1.0 millimeter) Type 304 stainless steel and shall be piped to
drain.
4. Exterior surfaces of cabinets constructed of mill-galvanized steel shall be finished by
the manufacturer's standard enamel finish in the required color as directed by the
Engineer.
5. Unit manufacturer's standard cabinet materials and finishes will be acceptable if
considered equivalent to the above requirements by the Engineer.
F. Cabinet Interiors Sound Attenuation:
1. Provide a factory-installed sound attenuation system in the interior of the unit cabinet.
2. Unit cabinet panels interior shall be provided with 25 millimeters of 24 kilogram per
cubic meter (one inch of 1 1/2 pound per cubic foot) neoprene-coated fiberglass
insulation on interior of cabinet panels. Insulation shall be applied to the cabinet
panels with 100 percent adhesive coverage and both the insulation and the adhesive
shall conform to NFPA 90A.
3. Finish of Interior Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with
requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.
4. Fans and compressors located in the unit interior cabinet shall be provided with
vibration isolators between their respective support frames and the cabinet framing.
G. Each unit shall be provided complete with the following:
1. Heating Coil Interlock: An interlock shall be provided to de-energize the electric

heating coil in the event of airflow failure.
2. Air Sensor: Air sensing devices shall be installed to indicate clogged filters and loss
of airflow.
3. Water Sensor: A water sensor shall be mounted on the main floor directly below the
unit and shall activate the alarm system if it detects the presence of moisture.
4. Smoke Detector: Smoke detector shall be located in the return air stream and shall
shut down the air-handling unit and activate the alarm when smoke is detected. Alarm
shall be connected to building alarm system.
5. Thermostat: Thermostat shall be an electronic solid state device with its element
located in the filtered return air stream. Thermostat shall have a minimum range of
16 to 27 deg. C (60 to 80 deg. F) and shall be accurate to within 0.5 (1.0) degrees at
the set point.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
6. Humidistat: Humidistat shall be an electronic solid state device with its element
located in the filtered return air stream entering the unit's coils. Humidistat shall have
an accuracy of plus or minus 5 percent in reading relative humidity and shall have a
minimum adjustable dead band of plus or minus 5 percent. Humidistat shall have a
minimum operating range of 35 to 65 percent relative humidity and shall be
adjustable over the full range.
2.2 MANUFACTURER'S FACTORY TEST PLANS
A. For each unit, submit a factory test plan which when followed during factory testing shall
verify that the performance scheduled on the drawings is met by the produced unit models.
B. The manufacturer shall perform factory tests on the actual units produced for this project.
The test reports shall document the performance tests conducted on the factory assembled
computer-room air-conditioning units. Performance testing on the individual computer-
room air-conditioning unit components, not factory assembled, is not acceptable.
C. Submit the required test plans for review and approval to the Engineer at least 30 calendar
days before scheduled factory test date.
D. Test Procedure: Indicate in each test plan the factory acceptance test procedures.
Procedures shall be structured to test all modes of operation to confirm that the controls
through all modes of control to confirm that the controls are performing in accordance with
the intended sequence of control. Controllers shall be verified to be properly calibrated and
have the proper set point to provide stable control of their respective equipment. Include in
each test plan a detailed step-by-step procedure for testing automatic controls provided by
the manufacturer.
2.3 FLOOR-MOUNTED UNITS
A. Description and Assembly: Packaged, factory assembled, prewired, and prepiped;

consisting of cabinet, fans, filters, humidifier, and controls.
1. Assembly: Downflow air delivery, in draw-through configuration.
B. Cabinet and Frame: Welded steel suitably braced for rigidity, supporting compressors and
other mechanical equipment and fittings with floor stand with adjustable legs and vibration
isolation pads.
1. Doors and Access Panels: Galvanized steel with polyurethane gaskets, hinges, and
concealed fastening devices.
2. Insulation: Thermally and acoustically insulate cabinet interior with 25-mm thick
duct liner.
3. Finish of Exterior Surfaces: Baked-on, textured vinyl enamel.
a. Color: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's standard colors.
C. Evaporator Fans: Double inlet, forward curved, centrifugal, statically and dynamically
balanced.
1. Drive: Steel shaft with self-aligning ball bearings; and V-belt drive with cast-iron or
steel sheaves, variable- and adjustable-pitch motor sheave, minimum of 2 matched
belts, with drive rated at a minimum of 2.0 times the nameplate rating of motor.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
2. Motor: Dripproof, permanently lubricated ball-bearing motor with built-in current

and overload protection.
D. Compressors: Hermetic with resilient suspension system, oil strainer, oil sight glass,
internal motor protection, low-pressure switch, and manual-reset high-pressure switch.
1. Refrigeration Circuits: 2, each with hot-gas mufflers, thermal-expansion valve with

external equalizer, liquid-line solenoid valve, liquid-line filter-dryer, refrigerant sight
glass with moisture indicator, service shutoff valves, charging valves, and
accumulator sized for liquid seal under light load.
E. Evaporator Coil: Alternate-row or split-face circuits, direct-expansion cooling coil of

seamless copper tubes expanded into aluminum fins, mounted over stainless-steel drain pan
and having a condensate pump unit with integral float switch, pump-motor assembly, and
condensate reservoir.
F. Remote Air-Cooled Refrigerant Condenser: Corrosion-resistant cabinet, copper-tube

aluminum-fin coils arranged for 2 circuits, multiple direct-drive propeller fans with
permanently lubricated ball bearings, and single-phase motors with internal overload
protection. Provide capacity control by cycling fans.
G. Chilled Water Coil: Seamless copper tubes expanded into aluminum fins with modulating
control valve.
1. Mount coil assembly over stainless-steel drain pan and having a condensate pump
unit with integral float switch, pump-motor assembly, and condensate reservoir.
H. Extended-Surface, Disposable, Panel Filters: Pleated, lofted, nonwoven, reinforced cotton

fabric; supported and bonded to welded-wire grid; enclosed in cardboard frame.
1. Nominal Thickness: 100 mm.

2. Dust-Spot Efficiency: 25 to 30 percent.
3. Weight Arrestance (ASHRAE 52.1): 90 to 92 percent.
4. Merv (ASHRAE 52.2): 7.
5. Initial Resistance at 2.54 m/s (500-FPM) Face Velocity: 75 Pa (0.30-inch wg).
6. Recommended Final Resistance: 250 Pa (1-inch wg).
I. Electric-Resistance Heating Coil: Enclosed-fin electric elements arranged for minimum of

3 stages, with primary and secondary thermal switches, manual-reset overload protection,
and branch-circuit overcurrent protection.
J. Evaporative Pan Humidifier: Stainless-steel pan and cover, serviceable without

disconnecting water, drain, or electrical connections; prepiped with stainless-steel or brass
float-valve mechanism; electric-resistance heating coil with low-water-cutoff switch; flush-
cycle timer; and solenoid drain valve.
K. Integral Electrical Panel: Unit mounted NEMA 250, Type 2 enclosure, with piano-hinged
door, grounding lug, combination magnetic starters with overload relays, circuit breakers
and cover interlock, and fusible control-circuit transformer.
1. Disconnect Switch: Nonautomatic, molded-case circuit breaker with handle

accessible with panel closed and capable of preventing access until switched to off
position.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
L. Microprocessor-Control System: Continuously monitors operation of process cooling

system; continuously displays room temperature and room relative humidity; sounds alarm
on system malfunction and simultaneously displays problem. If more than one malfunction
occurs, system displays fault in sequence with room temperature and continues to display
fault when malfunction is cleared until system is reset.
1. Malfunctions: Power Loss, Loss of Airflow, Clogged Air Filter, High Room
Temperature, Low Room Temperature, High Humidity, Low Humidity, Smoke/Fire,
Water-under-Floor, Supply Fan Overload, Compressor No. 1--Overload, Compressor
No. 1--Low Pressure, Compressor No. 1--High Pressure, Compressor No. 2--
Overload, Compressor No. 2--Low Pressure, and Compressor No. 2--High Pressure.
2. LED Display: Control Power On, System On, Humidification, Dehumidification
Taking Place, Compressor No. 1 Operating, Compressor No. 2 Operating, Heat or
Reheat Operating, Economy Cooling.
3. Push Buttons: Provide to stop process cooling system, start process cooling system,
silence audible alarm, push-to-test LED indicators, and display room relative
humidity.
4. Remote Signaling: Provide termination for remote signaling of system status and
alarms. Comply with requirements of Building Management System (BMS)
specifications section 230900.
2.4 CEILING-MOUNTED UNITS
A. Description: Self-contained, factory assembled, prewired, and prepiped; consisting of

cabinet, fan, filters, controls; for horizontal ceiling mounting to fit 600-by-1200-mm T-bar
ceiling opening.
B. Cabinet: Welded steel with baked-enamel finish and insulated with 15-mm thick, acoustic
duct liner.
1. Integral factory-supplied supply and return grille to fit ceiling grid kit of 600 by 1200
mm, with filter.
C. Evaporator Fan: Forward curved, centrifugal, directly driven by 2-speed motor.
D. Compressor: Hermetic with resilient suspension system, oil strainer, and internal motor
1. Refrigeration Circuit: Low-pressure switch, manual-reset high-pressure switch,

thermal-expansion valve with external equalizer, sight glass with moisture indicator,
service shutoff valves, charging valves, and charge of refrigerant.
E. Evaporator Coil: Direct-expansion cooling coil of seamless copper tubes expanded into
aluminum fins, with thermal-expansion valve with external equalizer, liquid-line filter-
dryer, service shutoff valves, and charging valves. Mount coil assembly over stainless-steel
drain pan and having a condensate pump unit with integral float switch, pump-motor
assembly, and condensate reservoir.
F. Remote Air-Cooled Refrigerant Condenser: Integral copper-tube aluminum-fin coil with

fan driven by double-shafted evaporator fan motor.
1. Split System: Provide suction- and liquid-line compatible fittings and refrigerant
piping for field interconnection.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
G. Filter: 25-mm thick, disposable, glass-fiber media.
H. Electric-Resistance Heating Coil: Finned-tube electric elements with contactor,

dehumidification relay, and high-temperature-limit switch.
I. Atomizing Humidifier: Centrifugal atomizer with stainless-steel pan, demister pad, and
solenoid valve.
J. Chilled Water Coil: Seamless copper tubes expanded into aluminum fins with modulating
control valve.
1. Mount coil assembly over stainless-steel drain pan and having a condensate pump
unit with integral float switch, pump-motor assembly, and condensate reservoir.
K. Control System: Unit-mounted panel with main fan contactor, compressor contactor,
compressor start capacitor, control transformer with circuit breaker, solid-state temperature-
and humidity-control modules, humidity contactor, time-delay relay, reheat contactor, and
high-temperature thermostat. Provide solid-state, wall-mounted control panel with start-
stop switch, adjustable humidity set point, and adjustable temperature set point.
2.5 FLOOR STANDS
A. For computer-room raised access flooring applications, provide floor mounted computer-
room air-conditioning units with factory matched, seismic floor stands. Coordinate size and
height of floor stands with computer-room raised access flooring installation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine area for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance of units. Do not proceed with installation until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. Verify that flooring system is ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as
indicated on Shop Drawings.
C. Verify that ceiling system is ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as indicated
on Shop Drawings.
D. Verify that power supply is available and of the correct characteristics.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install units according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install units level and plumb.
C. Install air-cooled condenser on vibration isolation.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections. Drawings indicate the
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. The following are specific
1. Install piping to allow service and maintenance.

2. Water and Drainage Connections: Conform to applicable requirements of Sections.
Provide adequate connections for water-cooled units, condensate, and humidifier
flushing system.
3. Condenser Water Piping: Conform to applicable requirements of Section "Hydronic
Piping." Provide shutoff valves in water inlet and outlet piping on water-cooled units.
4. Refrigerant Piping: Conform to applicable requirements of Section "Refrigerant
Piping." Provide shutoff valves and piping.
C. Ground equipment.

those specified in ANSI/UL 486A-486B or equivalent IEC standard.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Set initial temperature and humidity set points.
B. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.
C. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial

Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied
conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for
this purpose.
3.5 CLEANING
finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris, and repair damaged finishes including
chips, scratches, and abrasions.
3.6 COMMISSIONING

results in writing:
B. After installation, check the following:
1. Components are not damaged.

2. Unit is level.
3. Drain pan and drain line are installed correctly.
4. Vibration isolation and flexible connections are installed correctly.
5. Makeup water is connected.
6. Humidifier water piping is connected.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
7. Ductwork is connected.
8. Bearings are lubricated.
9. Filters are installed and clean.
C. Start unit according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Complete manufacturer's startup checks.
D. After starting and performance test, replace filters with new, clean filters and flush
humidifier.
3.7 DEMONSTRATION

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain computer-room air-conditioning units. Refer to
Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training part of Closeout Procedures."

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
SECTION 238126 - SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes split-system air-conditioning units consisting of separate evaporator-

fan and compressor-condenser components. Units are designed for exposed or concealed
mounting, and may be connected to ducts.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Evaporator-Fan Unit: The part of the split-system air-conditioning unit that contains a coil
for cooling and a fan to circulate air to conditioned space.
B. Compressor-Condenser Unit: The part of the split-system air-conditioning unit that contains
a refrigerant compressor and a coil for condensing refrigerant.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
specialties; and accessories for each type of product indicated. Include performance data in
terms of capacities, outlet velocities, static pressures, sound power characteristics, motor
requirements, and electrical characteristics.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required

clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection.
2. Diagram power, signal, and control wiring and differentiate between manufacturer-
installed and field-installed wiring.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of units of sections of
units showing the full range of colors available for units with factory-applied color finishes.
D. Field Test and Commissioning Reports: As specified in "Field Quality Control" and
SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS 238126 - Page 1 of 7

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A4-ME-01 REV 1
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For split-system air-conditioning units to include in

operation and maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of split-
system units and are based on the specific system indicated. Other manufacturers' systems
with equal performance characteristics may be considered.
B. ASHRAE Compliance:
1. Fabricate and label refrigeration system to comply with ASHRAE 15 and 34 Package,
"Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems."
2. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 4 -
"Outdoor Air Quality," Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment," Section 6 - "
Procedures," and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-up."

NFPA 70, Article 100.
D. Paint finish shall be suitable for hot and humid climates. Unit shall be capable and suitable
of working at outdoor ambient temperature of 50 deg. C.
E. Sound-power-level, decibels reference, 10 to the minus 12 power watt, at the fan operating
speed selected to meet the specified capacity. Sound level shall not exceed 40dBa at low
speed and 48dBa at high speed.
F. Sound-power-level data or values for these units shall be obtained in accordance with the
test procedures specified in ANSI/ASA S12.23. Sound-power values apply to units
provided with factory-fabricated cabinet enclosures and standard grilles. Values obtained
for the standard cabinet models will be acceptable for concealed models without separate
tests provided there is no variation between models as to the coil configuration, blowers,
motor speeds, or relative arrangement of parts. Each unit shall be fastened securely to the
building structure.
G. Local Certification: Units should be certified by local authorities as applicable.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases for units. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
B. Coordinate size, location, and connection details with roof curbs, equipment supports, and
roof penetrations specified in Section "Roof Accessories."
1.7 WARRANTY

repair or replace components of split-system air-conditioning units that fail in materials or

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A4-ME-01 REV 1

5. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering
and use.
C. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS

2. Fan Belts: One set of belts for each unit.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 STANDARD COMMERCIAL PRODUCTS

industrial use for 5 years prior to bid opening. The 5 years’ use shall include applications of
equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. The 5 years’
brochures. Products having less than a 5 years field service record shall not be acceptable.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A4-ME-01 REV 1
2.2 CONCEALED EVAPORATOR-FAN COMPONENTS
A. Chassis: Galvanized steel with flanged edges, removable panels for servicing, and
insulation on back of panel.
1. Insulation: Faced, glass-fiber duct liner.

2. Drain Pans: Stainless steel, with connection for drain; insulated with polystyrene.
a. Fabricated with minimum one percent slope in at least two planes to collect
condensate from cooling coils (including coil piping connections, coil headers,
and return bends), and to direct water toward drain connection.
1) Length: Extend drain pan downstream from leaving face to comply with
ASHRAE 62.1.
2) Depth: A minimum of 50 mm (2 inches) deep.
b. Units with stacked coils shall have an intermediate drain pan to collect
condensate from top coil.
B. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with
AHRI 210/240, and with thermal-expansion valve.
C. Fan: Forward-curved, double-width wheel of galvanized steel; directly connected to motor.
D. Fan Motor: Multispeed, PSC type. Comply with requirements of section "Common Motor
Requirements for HVAC Equipment."
E. Filters: 25 mm thick, permanent, washable, cleanable type in aluminum frames.
F. Wiring Terminations: Connect motor to chassis wiring with plug connection.
2.3 FLOOR-MOUNTED, EVAPORATOR-FAN COMPONENTS
A. Cabinet: Enameled steel with removable panels on front and ends in color selected by
Engineer.
1. Discharge Grille: Steel with surface-mounted frame.

2. Insulation: Faced, glass-fiber, duct liner.
3. Drain Pans: Stainless steel, with connection for drain; insulated with polystyrene.
a. Fabricated with minimum one percent slope in at least two planes to collect
condensate from cooling coils (including coil piping connections, coil headers,
and return bends), and to direct water toward drain connection.
1) Length: Extend drain pan downstream from leaving face to comply with
ASHRAE 62.1.
2) Depth: A minimum of 50 mm (2 inches) deep.
b. Units with stacked coils shall have an intermediate drain pan to collect
condensate from top coil.
C. Fan and Motor: Centrifugal fan, directly driven by multispeed, electric motor with integral
overload protection; resiliently mounted. Comply with requirements of section "Common
Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A4-ME-01 REV 1
D. Filters: 25 mm thick, permanent, washable, cleanable type in aluminum frames.
2.4 WALL- OR CEILING-MOUNTED, EVAPORATOR-FAN COMPONENTS
A. Cabinet: Enameled steel with removable panels on front and ends in color selected by
Engineer, and discharge drain pans with drain connection.
C. Fan and Motor: Centrifugal fan, directly driven by multispeed, electric motor with integral
overload protection; resiliently mounted. Comply with requirements of section "Common
Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."
D. Filters: 25 mm thick, permanent, washable, cleanable type in aluminum frames.
2.5 AIR-COOLED, COMPRESSOR-CONDENSER COMPONENTS
A. Casing: Steel, finished with baked enamel, with removable panels for access to controls,
weep holes for water drainage, and mounting holes in base. Provide brass service valves,
fittings, and gage ports on exterior of casing.
B. Compressor: Hermetically sealed with crankcase heater and mounted on vibration isolation.
Compressor motor shall have thermal- and current-sensitive overload devices, start
capacitor, relay, and contactor.
1. Compressor Type: Scroll.
C. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with
AHRI 210/240, and with liquid subcooler.
D. Refrigerant Charge: R-407C or R-410A.
E. Fan: Aluminum-propeller type, directly connected to motor.
F. Motor: Permanently lubricated, with integral thermal-overload protection. Comply with

requirements of section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."
G. Mounting Base: Polyethylene.
2.6 ACCESSORIES
A. Thermostat: Low voltage with sub-base to control compressor and evaporator fan.
B. Thermostat: Wireless infrared functioning to remotely control compressor and evaporator

fan, with the following features:
1. Compressor time delay.

2. 24-hour time control of system stop and start.
3. Liquid-crystal display indicating temperature, set-point temperature, time setting,
operating mode, and fan speed.
4. Fan-speed selection, including auto setting].
5. Interface with BMS

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A4-ME-01 REV 1
C. Thermostat: DDC wall type. Comply with BMS specification section 230900
D. Automatic-reset timer to prevent rapid cycling of compressor.
E. Refrigerant Line Kits: Soft-annealed copper suction and liquid lines factory cleaned, dried,
pressurized, and sealed; factory-insulated suction line with flared fittings at both ends.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install units level and plumb.
B. Install evaporator-fan components using manufacturer's standard mounting devices securely

fastened to building structure.
C. Install ground-mounted, compressor-condenser components on minimum 100 mm thick,

reinforced concrete base; 100 mm larger on each side than unit. Concrete, reinforcement,
and formwork are specified in Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete." Coordinate anchor
installation with concrete base.
D. Install compressor-condenser components on restrained, spring isolators with a minimum

static deflection of 25 mm. Refer to Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC
Piping and Equipment."
E. Connect precharged refrigerant tubing to component's quick-connect fittings. Install tubing

to allow access to unit.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
B. Install piping adjacent to unit to allow service and maintenance.
C. Unless otherwise indicated, connect piping with unions and shutoff valves to allow units to
be disconnected without draining piping. Refer to piping system Sections for specific valve
and specialty arrangements.
D. Duct Connections: Duct installation requirements are specified in Section 233113 "Metal
Ducts." Drawings indicate the general arrangement of ducts. Connect supply and return
ducts to split-system air-conditioning units with flexible duct connectors. Flexible duct
connectors are specified in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories."
E. Ground equipment.

F. Comply with requirements of Electrical specifications, Division 26.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A4-ME-01 REV 1
A. Installation Inspection: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-

assembled components and equipment installation, including piping and electrical
connections, and to prepare a written report of inspection.
B. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until
no leaks exist.
C. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper
motor rotation and unit operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new
components, and retest.
D. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
3.4 COMMISSIONING
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service, and report

results in writing.
B. Verify that units are installed and connected according to the Contract Documents.
C. Lubricate bearings, adjust belt tension, and change filters.
D. Perform startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions and do the

following:
1. Fill out manufacturer's checklists.

2. Check for unobstructed airflow over coils.
3. Check operation of condenser capacity-control device.
4. Verify that vibration isolation devices and flexible connectors dampen vibration
transmission to structure.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train the Employer's maintenance

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain split-system air-conditioning units. Refer to
Division 1.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A4-ME-01 REV 1
SECTION 238146 - WATER-SOURCE UNITARY HEAT PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following types of water-source heat pumps:
1. Concealed horizontal and vertical units.

2. Rooftop units.
3. Exposed, floor-mounted console units.
4. Unit ventilators.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities for each model; shipping, installed, and operating
weights; furnished specialties; and accessories for each type of product specified.

B. Shop Drawings: From manufacturer, detailing equipment assemblies and indicating



2. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.
3. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.
4. Other ceiling-mounted items including light fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers,
sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings.
E. Samples for Verification: Of the following products, in manufacturer's standard sizes,

showing the full range of color, texture, and pattern variations expected. Prepare Samples
from the same material to be used for the Work.
F. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of water-source heat pumps certifying that

the products furnished comply with requirements.
WATER-SOURCE UNITARY HEAT PUMPS 238146 - Page 1 of 6

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-ME-01 REV 1
G. Field Test and Commissioning Reports: As specified in "Field Quality Control" and
H. Maintenance Data: For water-source heat pumps to include in the maintenance manuals
specified in Division 1.
I. Warranties: Warranties specified in this Section.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain water-source heat pumps through one source from a single
manufacturer.
B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of water-
source heat pumps and are based on the specific system selected. Other manufacturers'
systems with equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division 1
Section "Product Requirements."
C. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated equipment specified in this Section that
is listed and labeled.
1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the NFPA 70 - 2007, Article 100.
D. Test and rate water-source heat pumps according to ARI 320-98, "Water-Source Heat
Pumps." Provide ARI certification.
E. Comply with ASHRAE 15 AND 34 PACKAGE, “Safety Standard for Refrigeration

Systems.
F. Comply with the minimum COP/efficiency levels according to ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1,

"Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low-Rise Buildings."
G. Comply with NFPA 70 - 2007.
H. Comply with safety requirements of UL 484 - 2007, "Room Air Conditioners," for assembly
of free-delivery water-source heat pumps.
I. Comply with safety requirements of UL 1995, "Heat Pumps," for duct-system connections.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of water-source heat pumps and suspension components
with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light
fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system components, and partition assemblies.
B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These
items are specified in Section "Roof Accessories."

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-ME-01 REV 1
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide a written warranty, signed by the manufacturer, agreeing

to repair or replace components of water-source heat pumps that fail in materials or
workmanship within the specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
1. One set of matched fan belts for each belt-driven fan.

2. One set of filters for each unit.
3. One spare heat-pump unit of each size and model furnished.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements
2.2 UNIT VENTILATOR HEAT PUMPS
A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, packaged water-source heat pumps consisting

of cabinet; sealed refrigerant circuit including compressor, refrigerant-to-water heat
exchanger, refrigerant-to-air heat exchanger, and reversing valve; evaporator fans;
refrigeration and temperature controls; filters; dampers; and isolation valves to allow
servicing of components in refrigeration circuit.
B. Cabinet and Chassis: Manufacturer's standard galvanized-steel casing with the following
features:
1. Access panel for access and maintenance of internal components.

2. Cabinet Insulation: Glass fiber insulation, 13 mm thick, 24-kg/cu. m density.
3. Knockouts for electrical and piping connections.
4. Condensate drain connection.
5. Flat-top cabinet with steel bar grille.
C. Evaporator Fans: Direct-driven, centrifugal fan with permanently lubricated motor.
D. Refrigerant-to-Water Heat Exchanger: Coaxial heat exchanger with inner copper water tube
and outer steel refrigerant tube or coil-in-shell with enhanced copper tubing inside a steel
shell.
E. Refrigerant-to-Air Heat Exchanger: Copper-tube coil with aluminum fins.
F. Reversing Valve: Manufacturer's standard control valve designed to be fail-safe in heating

position.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-ME-01 REV 1
G. Compressor: Hermetic compressor installed on vibration isolators and enclosed in

acoustically treated enclosure with built-in safeties as follows:
1. High-temperature cutout.
2. Low-temperature cutout.
3. Compressor motor overload protection.
H. Refrigerant Piping Materials: Drawn-temper, Type ACR copper tube with wrought-copper
fittings and brazed joints. Insulate refrigerant piping with 10-mm thick, flexible elastomeric
insulation.
1. Insulation Fire-Performance Rating: 25 flame-spread and 50 smoke-developed rating

according to ASTM E84-09c.
I. Outside-Air Economizer: Motorized outside-air dampers that modulate from 5 to 100

percent when unit is in economizer mode.
J. Outside Air: Manufacturer's standard outside-air damper.
K. Outside Air: Barometric exhaust damper with an outside-air damper.
L. Outside Air: Propeller exhaust fan with barometric and outside air dampers.
M. Unit Controls: Manufacturer's standard electromechanical, factory-mounted and -wired

controls, including fan, reversing-valve, and heat- and cool-function controls.
N. Filters: Glass-fiber throwaway type, 13 mm thick, located in mixed-air stream.
O. Hose Kit: Two, 900 mm long by 25-mm diameter hose with automatic self-balancing valve,
strainer and shut off valves.
A. Manufacturer's standard prime-coat finish ready for field painting.
B. Finish: Manufacturer's standard color paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested units
before shipping.
A. Factory test and rate heat exchangers for 2760-kPa (400-psig) refrigerant working pressure,
minimum.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances,
other specific conditions, and other conditions affecting performance of water-source heat
pumps. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-ME-01 REV 1
B. Examine piping and electric rough installations for water-source heat pumps to verify actual
locations of piping connections before installation.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install water-source heat pumps according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install units level and plumb, firmly anchored in locations indicated, and maintain
manufacturer's recommended clearances.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping Connections: Drawings indicate the general arrangement of piping, fittings, and
specialties. Specific connection requirements are as follows:
1. Connect supply and return piping to heat pump with unions and shutoff valves.
2. Connect heat-pump drain pan to nearest indirect waste connection, or as indicated.
B. Duct Connections: Connect supply and return ducts to heat pumps with flexible duct
connections. Provide transitions to match unit duct-connection size.
C. Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be factory mounted.

specified in ANSI/UL 486A-486B - 2004.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Replace filters used during construction.

supervise the field assembly of components and installation of water-source heat pumps,
including piping and electrical connections. Report results in writing.
1. Test and adjust controls and safeties.

2. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
3.6 COMMISSIONING
A. Startup Services: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup

services, and report results in writing.
B. Operate fan motors and verify proper rotation and connections.
C. Operate controls and verify proper response to control inputs.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-ME-01 REV 1
3.7 DEMONSTRATION

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain water-source heat pumps. Refer to Division 1
Section "[Demonstration and Training] [Closeout Procedures]."

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A1-ME-01 REV 1
SECTION 238219 - FAN-COIL UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes fan-coil units and accessories.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties
and accessories for each unit type and configuration.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit the following for each fan-coil unit type and configuration:
1. Plans, elevations, sections, and details.

2. Details of anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment.
3. Power, signal, and control wiring diagrams. Differentiate between manufacturer-
installed and field-installed wiring.
4. Equipment schedules to include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating
weights; furnished specialties; and accessories.


2. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.
3. Size and location of access panels in hard ceilings to provide access to concealed
units.
4. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers,
sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings.
E. Field Test Reports: As specified in "Field Quality Control" Article in Part 3 of this Section.
F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fan-coil units to include in operation and
maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. Include the following:
1. Maintenance schedules and repair parts lists for motors, coils, integral controls, and
filters.
2. Warranties: Warranties specified in this Section.
FAN-COIL UNITS 238219 - Page 1 of 7

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in latest
and relevant IEC standard, by a testing agency acceptable to the Engineer.
B. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems

and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of fan-coil units and suspension system components with
other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures,
HVAC equipment, fire-suppression-system components, and partition assemblies.
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
1. Fan-Coil Unit Filters: Furnish one spare filter[s] for each filter installed.
2. Fan Belts: Furnish one spare fan belt[s] for each unit installed.
1.7 WARRANTY

repair or replace components of the fan-coil units that fail in materials or workmanship

weathering and use.
8. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

industrial use for 5 years prior to bid opening. The 5 year use shall include applications of
equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. The 5 years
brochures. Products having less than a 5 year field service record shall not be acceptable.
2.2 GENERAL
A. Factory-packaged and -tested units rated according to AHRI 440, ASHRAE 33, and
UL 1995.
B. Units shall include an enclosure for cabinet models and casing for concealed models.
C. Units shall have three speeds switch and shall be selected at medium speed.
D. Base unit shall be complete with galvanized casing, water-coil assembly with auxiliary
water coil, valve and piping package, drain pans, air filter, fan motor, and motor control.
E. All thermal and acoustical insulation shall be sealed with a coating that is impervious to
moisture.
F. Sound-power-level, decibels reference, 10 to the minus 12 power watt, at the fan operating
speed selected to meet the specified capacity, shall not exceed the following values at the
midfrequency of each octave band:
OCTAVE BANDS
Frequency
(hertz) 250 500 1,000 2,000 4,000
Power Level 60 55 53 50 48
G. Sound-power-level data or values for these units shall be obtained in accordance with the
test procedures specified in ANSI/ASA S12.23. Sound-power values apply to units
provided with factory-fabricated cabinet enclosures and standard grilles. Values obtained
for the standard cabinet models will be acceptable for concealed models without separate
tests provided there is no variation between models as to the coil configuration, blowers,
motor speeds, or relative arrangement of parts. Each unit shall be fastened securely to the
building structure.
H. Capacity of he units shall be as indicated. Room fan-coil units shall be certified as

complying with AHRI 440 and shall meet the requirements of UL 1995.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
2.3 CONFIGURATION
A. Vertical Units: An assembly for floor-to-floor mounting, including cabinet, filter, chassis,
coil, drain pan, fan, and motor in blow-through configuration with hydronic or direct-
expansion cooling coil and electric heating coil.
B. Horizontal Units: An assembly including cabinet, filter, chassis, coil, drain pan, fan, and
motor in blow-through configuration with hydronic or direct-expansion cooling coil and
electric heating coil.
C. Concealed Units: An enclosed, horizontal type assembly including cabinet, filter, chassis,
coil, drain pan, fan, and motor in blow-through configuration with hydronic or direct-
expansion cooling coil with inlet and outlet duct collars.
2.4 MATERIALS
A. Chassis: Galvanized steel, with flanged edges.
B. Coil Section Insulation: minimum 13-mm (1/2-inch) duct liner (coated glass fiber or foil-
covered, closed-cell foam) complying with ASTM C 1071 and attached with adhesive
complying with ASTM C 916.
1. Fire-Hazard Classification: Duct liner and adhesive shall have a combined maximum
flame-spread index of 25 and smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to
ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency.
2. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with
requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.
C. Drain Pans: Galvanized steel, with connection for drain. Drain pan shall be insulated with
polystyrene or polyurethane insulation. Drain pan shall extend to underside of valves,
strainers and accessories, and be formed to slope from all directions to drain connection.
D. Cabinet: Galvanized steel, with removable panels.
1. Vertical Unit Front Panels: Removable, galvanized steel, with galvanized steel
discharge grilles and channel-formed edges and with insulation on back of panel.
2. Horizontal Unit Bottom Panels: Fastened to unit with cam fasteners and hinge and
attached with safety chain; with cast-aluminum discharge grilles.
E. Cabinet Finish: Bonderize, phosphatize, and flow-coat with baked-on primer with
manufacturer's standard paint, in color selected by Engineer, applied to factory-assembled
and -tested fan-coil unit before shipping.
F. Enclosure shall be constructed of not lighter than 18-gage, 1.3 millimeter, galvanized steel,
properly reinforced and braced. Front panel of enclosure shall be removable and provided
with 1/2-inch (13 millimeter) thick insulation conforming to NFPA 90A, to prevent
condensation. Discharge louvers shall be four-way adjustable and shall be designed to
properly distribute air throughout the conditioned space. All ferrous-metal surfaces shall be
galvanized. All exposed-to-view enclosure corners and edges shall be rounded. Discharge
louvers shall be mounted in a top panel that is removable for coil cleaning. Access doors
shall be hinged and shall be provided for all piping and control compartments. Enclosure
finish shall be manufacturer's standard in color selected by the Engineer.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
2.5 WATER COILS
A. Cooling/Heating Coils: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins spaced no
closer than 2.5 mm and with manual air vent. Coils shall be rated for a minimum working
pressure of 1378 kPa (200 psig) and a maximum entering water temperature of 104 deg C
(220 deg F).
2.6 DIRECT-EXPANSION REFRIGERANT COILS
A. Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins spaced no closer than 2.5 mm and
brazed joints at fittings. Comply with AHRI 210/240, and leak test to minimum 450 psig
(3105 kPa) for a minimum working pressure of 2068 kPa (300 psig). Include thermal
expansion valve.
2.7 ELECTRIC-RESISTANCE HEATING ELEMENTS
A. Nickel-chromium heating wire, free from expansion noise and 50-Hz hum, embedded in
magnesium-oxide insulating refractory and sealed in high-mass steel or corrosion-resistant
metallic sheath with fins no closer than 4 mm. Element ends shall be enclosed in terminal
box. Fin surface temperature shall not exceed 288 deg C (550 deg F) at any point during
normal operation.
1. Circuit Protection: One-time fuses in terminal box for overcurrent protection and
limit controls for overtemperature protection of heaters.
2. Wiring Terminations: Match conductor materials and sizes indicated.
2.8 FAN
A. Centrifugal, with forward-curved, double-width wheels and fan scrolls made of galvanized
steel or thermoplastic material; directly connected to or V-belt driven from motor. Fan shall
be suitable for these speed operation. Fan-coil capacity shall be based on medium speed.
The noise level shall not exceed NC30 unless otherwise specified.
2.9 FAN MOTORS
A. Comply with requirements in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC
Equipment."
B. Motors for Direct-Drive Units: Permanent-split capacitor, multispeed motor with integral
thermal-overload protection and resilient mounts.
C. Motors for Belt-Drive Units: Totally enclosed, fan-cooled, with hinged mount, adjustable
motor pulley and permanently lubricated bearings.
D. Wiring Terminations: Match conductor materials and sizes of connecting power circuit.
Connect motor to chassis wiring with plug connection.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
2.10 ACCESSORIES
A. Outdoor-air aluminum wall boxes with integral eliminators and insect screen, for fan-coil
units with outdoor-air intake.
B. Steel subbase, height as indicated.
C. Steel recessing flanges for recessing fan-coil units into ceiling or wall.
D. Filters: 25-mm thick, washable type, aluminum filters and frames.
E. Dampers: Steel damper blades with polyurethane stop across entire blade length and having
factory-mounted electric operators for 25 percent open cycle.
2.11 CONTROL SYSTEMS
A. Two-Pipe, Valve Cycle: Wall-mounted electronic thermostat, with manual three-speed fan-
speed switch and electronic cycling of valves, suitable to be connected to the central
building control system specified in Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" for
public areas. Residential FCUs are not connected to BMS..
A. Test and rate units according to AHRI 440.
B. Test unit coils according to ASHRAE 33 and AHRI 410.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas to receive fan-coil units for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine roughing-in for piping and electrical connections to verify actual locations before
fan-coil unit installation.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install fan-coil units level and plumb.
B. Install fan-coil units to comply with NFPA 90A.
C. Suspend fan-coil units from structure with rubber-in-shear vibration isolators (rubber
hangers). Vibration isolators are specified in Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for
HVAC Piping and Instruments."
D. Install wall-mounting thermostats and switch controls at heights to match lighting controls.

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1
3.3 CONNECTIONS
B. Unless otherwise indicated, install shutoff valve and union or flange at each connection.
C. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.
E. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-

tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in
UL 486A - 486B.
A. Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing and report results in writing:
1. After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor
rotation and unit operation.
2. Operate electric heating elements through each stage to verify proper operation and
electrical connections.
3. Test and adjust controls and safeties.
B. Repair or replace malfunctioning units. Retest as specified above after repairs or

replacements are made.
3.5 CLEANING
A. After installing units, inspect unit cabinet for damage to finish. Remove paint splatters and
other spots, dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish.
B. After installing units, clean fan-coil units internally according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
C. Install new filters in each fan-coil unit within two weeks after Substantial Completion.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain fan-coil units. Refer to Division 1 Section

E18066-0100D-FD-00-G00-SPC-15A2-ME-01 REV 1

SPC-FD-00-G00-Part 09 of 12-Division 23 (2 of 2)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

SPC-FD-00-G00-Part 09 of 12-Division 23 (2 of 2)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Central Business District CBD EAST – Phase 1

Of the New Administrative Capital

REF DIVISION - SECTION TITLE

DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

010000 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

033000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

042000 UNIT MASONRY

051200 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - Page 1 of 8

REF DIVISION - SECTION TITLE

055213 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS

DIVISION 06 - WOOD AND PLASTICS

061000 ROUGH CARPENTRY

DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

071113 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING

081113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - Page 2 of 8

REF DIVISION - SECTION TITLE

084233 REVOLVING DOOR ENTRANCES

092216 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

101100 VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - Page 3 of 8

REF DIVISION - SECTION TITLE

110000 AUTOMATED PARKING SYSTEM (Office Towers)

122413 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES

DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

131213 EXTERIOR FOUNTAIN

DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT

142100 ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - Page 4 of 8

REF DIVISION - SECTION TITLE

DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION

210513 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION

220513 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - Page 5 of 8

REF DIVISION - SECTION TITLE

224100 RESIDENTIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES (Office Towers)

DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING

230513 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - Page 6 of 8

REF DIVISION - SECTION TITLE

238126 SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS

260500 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

271005 COMMON CLAUSES FOR STRUCTURED CABLING

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - Page 7 of 8

REF DIVISION - SECTION TITLE

274116.21 INTEGRATED AUDIOVISUAL SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT - FOR

DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

281300 ACCESS CONTROL

312000 EARTH MOVING

DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

321116.16 AGGREGATE SUBBASE COURSE

334300 LANDSCAPE DRAINAGE

348313 PRESTRESSED CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION

DIVISION 40 - PROCESS INTERCONNECTIONS

405000 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS SCOPE OF WORK

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - Page 8 of 8

SECTION 232113 - HYDRONIC PIPING

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

1. Section 230719 "HVAC Piping Insulation."

1. BS 10 Flanges for bolting pipes, valves and fittings.

A. Welding inspector: Mechanical Engineer, Certified Welding Inspector (CWI) or

HYDRONIC PIPING 232113 - Page 1 of 21

D. Third Party : International inspection company ( GL,LG,BV,TUV,…etc)]